JP2021119999A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which a game ball flows satisfactorily after flowing down to a winning hole.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a distributor 322 configured to easily guide a plurality of game balls to a specific area by storing the plurality of game balls in a movable ball entry accessory device 190, thus drastically improving a probability that the plurality of game balls pass through the specific area when the balls are stored in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 much more than when game balls are stored in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 one by one.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that has a winning opening in the game area and can win a game ball in the winning opening (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-61177

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the game ball after it has flowed down to the winning opening.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a gaming ball that has flowed down to a winning opening can flow down satisfactorily.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game that enters the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for sorting whether a ball is discharged after passing through a specific area provided in the movable ball entry means or is discharged without passing through the specific area. The movable ball-entry means is provided with a double-ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all the gaming balls that have entered the movable ball-entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is a movable means according to claim 1, wherein the double ball guiding means performs an operation that affects the progress of the gaming ball by coming into contact with the gaming ball, and the movable means thereof. A plurality of distribution channels, which are configured to allow the game balls in contact with the ball to flow down, are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels are an advantageous side flow path for guiding the game ball to the specific region and an advantageous side flow thereof. The advantageous side flow path includes a disadvantageous side flow path in which the probability of passing the game ball through the specific area is low as compared with the road, and the advantageous side flow path is in a throwing state in which the movable means can be configured by operation. In this case, the ball is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is thrown, and the throwing state is when one game ball is in contact with the movable means while another game ball is in contact with the movable means. It is composed.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, and one game ball is movable from one direction of the operation direction of the reciprocating operation. The movable means constitutes the throwing state by contacting the means and the other gaming ball coming into contact with the movable means from another direction in the operating direction of the reciprocating operation.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the winning opening.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the flow of the gaming ball can be improved by the contact with the movable means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the flow of the ball can be further improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the 1st flow device. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down device. It is a side view of the 1st flow-down device in the direction view of arrow VII of FIG. FIG. 7 is a top view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 7. It is a partial rear perspective view of the 1st flow device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution body. (A) to (c) are front views of the distribution body. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). .. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) and (b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. (A) is a front view of the second flow-down device in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device in the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 40 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the second flow-down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 43 is a side view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow XLIV in FIG. 43. FIG. 4 is a top view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow XLV in FIG. 44. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the introduction passage. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device in line XLVIIa-XLVIIa of FIG. 43, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device in line XLVIIb-XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). .. FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device on the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LX-LX of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 59 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXV-LXV of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the rolling floor device. (A) is a front view of the second flow-down device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annulus member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first ring member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd ring member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85, and (c) is the second annulus member in the direction of arrow XCIc of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial internal view. FIG. 8 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). It is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down device in the direction view of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device in the CIa-CIa line of FIG. 85 (b). It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a small hit determination in the first random number counter and the first special symbol in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the value, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter in the first control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a game flow diagram which shows the flow of the game by the pachinko machine of this embodiment as an example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the middle start winning opening to the occurrence of the big hit game in this control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process which is executed in the special symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance passage process which is executed in the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot time accessory device operation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot time accessory device opening process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed in the main process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp editing process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) or changing the effect content of the super reach. ..

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and two rails 61, 62. General winning opening 63, relatively large movable ball-entry accessory device 190, left-starting winning opening 26 arranged at the lower left position of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190, and middle-starting winning award arranged at the center position. The opening 28 and the right starting winning opening 27 arranged at the lower right position are provided, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The game ball thrown into the game area randomly enters the normal winning opening 63 in the process of its flow, or enters the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27. Or, it enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when it is activated (when it is open).

The game balls that have entered each winning opening are collected on the back side of the game board 13 through the through holes formed in the game board 13.

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is discharged after being sorted through processes such as flowing down, rolling, and rising inside the movable ball, and is collected on the back side of the game board 13. NS. The sorting operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The movable ball entry accessory device 190 is predetermined when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27). (When the special symbol of is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit), and enables the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 has a movable piece 190a (so-called blade member) provided at an upper position of the game area, and the movable piece 190a is, for example, a large opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 4). By the action of the link mechanism using the above, it reciprocates by a predetermined angle along the board surface.

As shown in the figure, the movable piece 190a is in a state in which the large winning opening switch 190b is closed in a substantially upright state, and therefore, the inflow of the game ball into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is always impossible. When the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated, the movable piece 190a is displaced so as to tilt in the left-right direction in the game area around the base end portion thereof, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened to perform the movable ball entry role. Allows the inflow of the game ball into the object device 190 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening switch 190b). Since the movable piece 190a and the large winning opening switch 190b are located at the upper position in the game area, particularly near the position where the game ball is first driven, they were driven into the game area when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 was operated. The game ball is guided by the nail at the upper position and easily reaches the movable piece 190a, and is guided by the movable piece 190a as it is and flows into the large winning opening switch 190b.

The movable ball entry accessory device 190 also operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball entry accessory device 190). , Allows entry into the grand prize opening switch 190b. The specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be described later.

In the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a first flow-down device 300 for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the above-mentioned large winning opening switch 190b, and a game that has passed through a fixed region arranged in the first flow-in device 300. A second flow-down device 400, which allows the sphere to flow down and distributes which specific region to pass through, is provided.

All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through the large winning opening switch 190b are guided to the inside of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through the introduction passage 310 of the first flow device 300. All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are detected by the large winning opening switch 190b.

Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a route distribution unit 320 is arranged following the introduction passage 310. The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of guiding the game ball to the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, it will be a big hit after that compared to the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. The probability of becoming is high. The details of the route distribution unit 320 will be described later.

Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a distribution inclination portion 350 is arranged following the route distribution portion 320. The distribution inclination portion 350 passes the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through a fixed region that is determined to be guided to a specific region, or is passed through a fixed region. Sort out whether to discharge without any problems.

Here, the "determined area" is an area that always passes before the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball eventually passes through the specific area. Will be done. However, when the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball has not yet passed through the specific area, so it is not a big hit in a strict sense, but from the player's point of view, the game ball may pass through the fixed area. , It will be a de facto big hit.

In any case, the distribution inclination portion 350 distributes whether the game ball passes through the fixed area or is discharged without passing through the fixed area. The details of the distribution inclination portion 350 will be described later.

Further, a second flow-down device 400 is arranged downstream of the first distribution inclination portion 350. The second flow-down device 400 distributes the game ball that has passed through the fixed region after passing through any specific region among the plurality of specific regions.

That is, in the previous distribution inclination portion 350, distribution was performed such as whether or not to pass through the fixed region, but in this second flow-down device 400, the game ball that has passed through the fixed region and the de facto big hit is confirmed. On the other hand, what kind of profit is to be given is sorted. The details of the second flow-down device 400 will be described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the middle starting winning opening 28, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, or stop symbols. The number of balls on hold is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery as to whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 passes through a specific area) is performed when a prize is given to the large winning opening switch 190b. .. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot are prepared. In the case of a jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B show symbols according to the jackpot type.

Here, the "16R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the "7R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the "3R jackpot" is a jackpot. The maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls in a big hit. In the present embodiment, during one round, the movable piece 190a is tilted, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened, and the process ends when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b. Since there are 10 prize balls by passing one game ball through the large prize opening switch 190b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained in each round.

In the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 (the fixed area switch 340a in the back, see FIG. 5), so that the prize ball is in the first round. There is no. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained in the 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be obtained in the 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be obtained in the 16R jackpot.

The time saving state (time saving medium) is a state of the game in which the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, and the ball easily wins the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which the time is not shortened (a state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is not increased).

In the present embodiment, a time saving switch 190d (on the front side of the discharge detection switch 190c) through which the game ball passes after passing through the specific area hole 440 is arranged, and the time saving state is caused by the game ball passing through the time saving switch 190d. Move to.

During the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. .. When the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 28a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the middle start winning opening 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b can be easily opened.

The time saving switch 190d is arranged so that only the game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the left end of the plurality of specific area holes 440 passes through. As will be described later, in the third specific area hole 443, a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) in which the player acquires the jackpot with the smallest profit (three round jackpot) among the specific area holes 440 is arranged. It is a hole.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball flowing down the second flow-down device 400 results in a jackpot with the smallest profit (three-round jackpot), the player is provided with an auxiliary benefit by giving a time reduction. Can be granted. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a larger profit than the 3-round jackpot, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessively large by not giving the time reduction.

In addition, during the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 28a is hit once. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is released than during normal times. Further, during the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 28a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened at one time are not changed, only the probability of winning the second symbol. May be changed so as to increase compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In addition, a movable ball entry accessory device 190 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The movable ball-entry accessory device 190 is triggered by winning (starting winning) to the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A movable piece 190a that opens and closes, and a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 are provided. Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 28a of the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28.

It should be noted that, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the middle start winning opening 28 during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 28a for each hit. In the case of, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 28a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and is configured to allow a part of the ball launched on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the movable on. It may be performed by using a part of the ball accessory device 190. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembling position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and may be, for example, above the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 where a ball can win are arranged below the left and right of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. When the ball wins the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening are turned on. A lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the opening of the mouth switch 210b, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A, and the movable piece 190a is displayed a predetermined number of times (this). It opens once (once in the embodiment) and closes after a predetermined period (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 in the front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28, the middle starting winning opening switch 210c provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (FIG. 4) is caused by the turning on of the middle starting winning opening switch 210c. The lottery is performed (see), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B, and the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) (opening period). Is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second times is 2 seconds).

Each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 is drawn so as to be a small hit at 1/1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is no big hit lottery due to the game ball passing through each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds), the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the middle starting winning opening 28 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls win the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls win the middle starting winning opening 28 are different numbers, for example, the left and right starting winning prizes. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the openings 26 and 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the middle start winning opening 28 may be five.

An electric accessory 28a is attached to the middle start winning opening 28. The electric accessory 28a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 28a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is short. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 28a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the middle start winning opening 28 than in the normal time.

The probability of becoming a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is set higher when the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 than when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27. (It is easy to put a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at once). On the other hand, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 do not have the electric accessory as in the middle starting winning opening 28, and the ball can always win a prize.

A large winning opening switch 190b is arranged above the movable ball entry accessory device 190. In the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has entered the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 has passed through the specific region hole 440 after winning the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. When it becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is movablely turned on. It is displayed on a part of the ball accessory device 190 to indicate the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit, big hit game) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the movable piece 190a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening switch 190b is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening switch 190b can be repeated up to 15 times (16 rounds excluding the first round), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time. , While the large winning opening switch 190b is open, the large opening opening provided separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the large winning opening switch 190b. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the large winning opening switch 190b is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Instead, for example, it may be below the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. In addition, all the game balls driven into the game area, including the game balls that have entered the movable ball entry accessory device 190, are collected on the back side of the game board 13. The recovered game ball is discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further joins a supply route of an island facility (not shown).

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described. The object of the game of the present embodiment is to pass the game ball through the specific region hole 440, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain the prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball and fires it on the upper surface portion of the center frame 86 so that the game ball slides down. As a result, when the game ball hits a large number of nails and enters each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, the movable piece 190a is opened. At this time, if the game ball can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at the right time, the game ball passes through the specific region hole 440 depending on the subsequent flow of the game ball, so that the player can use the game ball. You can visually check the flow of the ball and enjoy watching the actual movement of the game ball to see if you can get a big hit or if it is out of the game.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the movable piece 190a, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, the method of hitting the game ball so that it does not reach the center frame 86 (so-called "choro hitting") and the method of hitting it so that it reaches the return rubber 69 (so-called "right hitting") are used in order to obtain a big hit in this embodiment. Is at a disadvantage.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which a jackpot can be easily obtained by simultaneously entering two game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end (triangular apex portion) of the center frame 86 to disperse the game ball to the left and right, and when the movable piece 190b is opened, 1 from the left and right. Aiming to enter two balls in total, one by one, this makes it possible to play a game so that a big hit can be easily obtained.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and drawing the display result on the second symbol display device.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of a movable piece 190a of a large winning opening switch 190b. Various solenoid motors 209 including a large opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing rotation to the left and right, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the electric accessory 28a, or a motor are connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

The various direct switches 210, which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly related to the profit given to the player, are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input / output port 205.

The various solenoid motors 209 are at least for opening / closing and rotating the large opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing rotation to the left and right around the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the large winning opening switch 190b and the electric accessory 28a. It includes an electric accessory solenoid 209b, a retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) that drives the flow blocking plate 412, and a drive motor 421b (see FIG. 23) that drives the movable plate 421a.

The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning opening switch 210a (see FIG. 2), a right starting winning opening switch 210b (see FIG. 2), a middle starting winning opening switch 210c (see FIG. 2), and a first specific area switch. 441a (see FIG. 23), a second specific area switch 442a (see FIG. 23), and a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) are included.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as various solenoid motors 209, motors, and the like. Voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are set to the required voltage for each control device 110 to 114 and the like. Supply.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

5 to 9 are views showing the details of the configuration of the first flow-down device 300, FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the first flow-down device 300, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the first flow-down device 300. 7A and 7B are side views of the first flow-down device 300 in the arrow VII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a top view of the first flow-down device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. FIG. 9 is a partial rear perspective view of the first flow device 300.

In addition, in FIGS. 5 and 6, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 320 is omitted (that is, the game ball is inside the introduction passage 310). And, it flows down the inside of the route distribution unit 320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (front side in FIG. 5).

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the first flow-down device 300 includes a pair of introduction passages 310 in which a game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) is guided, and the terminal positions of the introduction passages 310. A route distribution unit 320 that is connected to the introduction passage 310 at (center position in the left-right direction) and allows the game ball to flow down, a distribution inclination unit 330 that causes the game ball sent from the route distribution unit 320 to flow forward, and a distribution inclination unit 330 thereof. A fixed area hole 340 and a fixed area hole 340 that are large enough to accommodate one game ball arranged on the front side of the distribution inclined portion 330 at the center of the distribution inclined portion 330 in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an out-of-hole hole 350 that is larger than the fixed region hole 340 at a position deviated from the left and right.

The introduction passage 310 is a passage formed symmetrically with an inner diameter through which the game ball can pass, and is inclined downward toward the route distribution portion 320 arranged in the center, and the terminal position (route distribution) thereof. A first protruding portion 311 and a second protruding portion 312 are provided on the connecting portion with the portion 320).

The first protrusion 311 is a protrusion that protrudes upward in the front-rear width direction of the introduction passage 310. The game ball decelerates by coming into contact with the first protruding portion 311.

The second protruding portion 312 is an inclined surface portion that limits the flow direction of the game ball thrown from the introduction passage 310 toward the route distribution portion 320, and is connected to the bottom surface of the outlet of the introduction passage 310 and descends in the left-right direction. It is extended in an inclined manner.

The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of distributing the approaching game ball to a normal flow path (normal route) or a special flow path (special route). Further, the route distribution unit 320 is a pair of special routes that are opened in the left-right direction of the route distribution unit guide path 321, the distribution body 322 that rotates when the game ball comes into contact with the route distribution unit guide path 321 and the distribution body 322. The special route guide path 325 that allows the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323, the normal route hole 324 that is opened rearward below the distribution body 322, and the special route hole 323 to flow down toward the distribution inclination portion 350. A normal route guide path 326 that allows a game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to flow down toward the taxiing inclined portion 350 is mainly provided.

The route distribution section guide path 321 is a passage extending vertically downward for guiding the game balls from the introduction passage 310 to the distribution body 322, and is formed with a width capable of arranging two game balls side by side side by side. ..

The distribution body 322 is a member that is rotatably supported by the shaft, and is located below the rotation shaft in a balanced state (see FIG. 6). It mainly includes a plate-shaped portion 322b extending from the position in the direction passing through the rotation axis (upper in FIG. 5) and integrally formed with the fan-shaped portion 322a.

As shown in FIG. 6, the fan-shaped portion 322a has a shape for guiding (flowing) the game ball into the special route hole 323 in an equilibrium state (a shape in which the left and right flat portions extend toward the special route hole 323). Will be done.

The plate-shaped portion 322b is the second when the distribution body 322 is placed in a state between the first angle state (see FIG. 11B) and the second angle state (see FIG. 11C), which will be described later. The distance between the two protrusions 312 is extended to a length that is at least equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The special route hole 323 is a through hole formed in the side wall of the route distribution portion 320, and is arranged as a pair of through holes opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. The special route hole 323 guides the game ball that has entered the special route hole 323 to the special route guide path 325. The special route guide path 325 is provided with special route switches 325a1,325b1, and the game ball that has entered the special route hole 323 is detected by the special route switch 325a1,325b1.

The normal route hole 324 is a through hole formed in the back wall portion in the vicinity of the bottom wall portion of the route distribution portion 320. The normal route hole 324 is formed with a ridge portion 324a at the center thereof to reduce the opening height. Since the opening height of the central portion of the normal route hole 324 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball by the ridge portion 324a, the game ball avoids the central portion of the normal route hole 324 and is left and right of the normal route hole 324. Pass through the edge.

The special route guide path 325 includes a left guide path 325a and a right guide path 325b extending from the pair of special route holes 323, respectively, and they are formed symmetrically and asymmetrically in the front-rear direction.

That is, the left guide path 325a is provided with a left detection switch 325a1 that detects the passage of the game ball inside the left guide path 325a, extends toward the front side, and then extends vertically downward, while the right guide path 325b thereof. It is equipped with a right detection switch 325b1 that detects the passage of the game ball inside, and extends vertically downward without extending to the front side. By making the front and rear arrangements different in this way, when the game balls pass through the pair of special route holes 323 at the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls landing on the distribution inclination portion 330 from colliding in the left-right direction. Can be done. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special route guide path 325 can easily pass through the fixed region.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 are sensors that detect the passage of the game ball. By confirming the detection signals of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to determine how many balls the game ball has passed through the special route.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 may be used as an opportunity to execute the effect. For example, when the game balls pass through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds in the present embodiment), a plurality of game balls subsequently pass through the fixed region hole 340, which is more advantageous. Since it is easy to be a big hit, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, the player's interest can be enhanced by performing a violent agitation (violent light emission, sound effect). ..

On the other hand, when the game ball is detected only by one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 due to the irregular flow of the game ball, even if the game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340, which jackpot will be subsequently received. Since it is unclear whether it will be (whether it will be a big hit on the side with a large number of prize balls), it is possible to slightly enhance the interest of the player by performing a modest fanning (modest light emission, sound effect).

Further, for example, when it is repeatedly detected that a game ball enters one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 (for example, it is detected three times in a row), an error of fixing the distribution body 322 in some way is performed. It is possible to suppress the player's fraud by determining that the game is being performed and issuing an error.

Since the exit of the special route guide path 325 is arranged near the front end of the taxiing slope 330, the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 hits the protrusion 331 of the taxiing slope 330. It flows down toward the center of the front without touching.

The normal route guide path 326 extends rearward from the left and right end portions of the normal route hole 324 while inclining outward in the left-right direction, and extends vertically downward at the rear end portion thereof. Since the exit of the normal route guide path 326 is located near the rear end of the taxiing slope 330, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 hits the protrusion 331 of the taxiing slope 330. While touching, it flows down toward the front side.

The distribution inclined portion 330 is an inclined surface portion in which the cross section of the plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction is formed from the sunken curved shape of the central portion, and a plurality of protrusions 331 are scattered and convexly provided on the middle portion.

A plurality of the protrusions 331 are arranged so as to be inclined toward the left and right ends toward the front side, and have a gap about the diameter of the game ball in the intermediate portion. Therefore, most of the game balls discharged from the normal route guide path 326 are flown toward the left and right ends by the protrusions 331, while some game balls pass through the gap and head toward the fixed region hole 340.

The protrusion 331 is arranged behind the position where the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 abuts on the distribution inclination portion 330 (upstream side of the distribution inclination portion 330). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 can flow down to the front side while heading toward the center along the curved shape of the taxiing inclined portion 330 without colliding with the protrusion 331. It becomes easy to pass through the region hole 340.

On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 flows down the distribution inclined portion 330 while colliding with the protrusion 331, so whether or not it passes through the fixed region hole 340 is random in the flow of the game ball. It is left to sex. In the present embodiment, since the gap holes 350 arranged on the left and right of the fixed region hole 340 are opened larger than the fixed region hole 340, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 can easily pass through the gap hole 350. Become.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special route guide path 325 can easily pass through the fixed region hole 340 as compared with the game ball passing through the normal route guide path 326. ..

The game ball that has entered the fixed area hole 340 will then pass through the fixed area, and the game ball that has entered the outlier hole 350 will be discharged without passing through the specific area thereafter. Become.

Here, the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the fixed area, and the game ball passing through the fixed area is detected by the fixed area switch 340a. Further, an out passage (not shown) is formed at the lower edge of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the outlier hole 350 without entering the fixed area hole 340 is guided to the out passage and is discharged from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the fixed area or the specific area. NS. Then, the game ball flowing down the out passage is configured to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c, and the game ball passing through the out passage is detected by the discharge detection switch 190c. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 also joins the out passage and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c.

The discharge detection switch 190c detects the difference in the number of detected balls from the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b, and the difference disappears within a predetermined period (for example, within 15 seconds), so that the game can be played stably. It is a switch to confirm that it has been damaged. For example, when the game balls are deposited on the protrusions 331 of the distribution inclination portion 330 and the discharge of the game balls is delayed, it is possible to determine that the discharge error of the game balls has occurred and issue an alarm.

The distribution body 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution body 322, and FIGS. 11A to 11C are front views of the distribution body 322. In addition, in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11A, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and in FIG. 11B, the first distribution body 322 is rotated clockwise by the first angle θ1 from the equilibrium state. The angular state is illustrated, and FIG. 11C shows a second angle state in which the distribution body 322 is rotated clockwise by a second angle θ2 from the first angle state. Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c), a partial cross-sectional view at an intermediate position in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 11) of the distribution body 322 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution body 322 is a pair of annular connecting rings that connect the above-mentioned fan-shaped portion 322a, the plate-shaped portion 322b, and the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b at the front and rear ends. It has an inner circumference of the portion 322c and the inner circumference of the connecting ring portion 322c and an inner circumference serving as a surface position, and is extended in the front-rear direction (axial direction of the distribution body 322) between the pair of connecting ring portions 322c. A resistance extension portion 322d whose cross section perpendicular to the extension direction is formed from a split ring shape in which the ring is divided in half and a pair of connection ring portions 322c are connected in a phase range in which the resistance extension portion 322d is not formed. A rod-shaped member that communicates with a pair of connecting ring portions 322c and a separation center portion 322e that is recessed outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 322c, and is formed on the back side wall of the root distribution portion 320. It mainly includes a shaft support rod 322f to be fixed.

The shaft support rod 322f is a member that is adhesively fixed to the back side wall of the root distribution portion 320 and extends to the vicinity of the front side wall (not shown), and is composed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting ring portion 322c. It is provided with a pair of shaft support cylinders 322f1 and a connecting rod portion 322f2 which is a rod-shaped member connecting the shaft support cylinders 322f1 and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the cross-sectional shape of the shaft support cylinders 322f1.

The pair of axial support column portions 322f1 are arranged coaxially, and the separation interval in the axial direction is the same as the separation interval of the connecting ring portion 322c. As a result, since the pair of connecting ring portions 322c can be supported by the pair of axial support cylindrical portions 322f1, the axial support state can be stabilized, and the rotational state of the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b is stabilized. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod portion 322f2 has a lower substantially half-circumferential portion at the outer circumference and a surface position of the shaft support columnar portion 322f1, and an upper substantially half-circumferential portion is recessed inward in the radial direction. The purpose will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), the state in which the distribution body 322 is between the equilibrium state (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the first angle state (see FIG. 11 (b)). In this case, since the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d are separated from each other, frictional resistance is generated between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d even if the distribution body 322 starts to rotate. No. Therefore, in the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the distribution body 322 can be easily rotated (rotational resistance can be suppressed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c), the distribution body 322 is in the first angle state (see FIG. 11 (b)) and the second angle state (see FIG. 11 (c)). In the case of a state between The resulting frictional resistance can be increased. Therefore, the distribution body 322 can be made harder to rotate (rotational resistance can be increased) as compared with the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state.

Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 can be quickly rotated at the start of contact, and the distribution body 322 can be rotated in a manner in which the momentum of rotation gradually weakens.

The distribution operation of the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 22. First, a case where one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 (a), 12 (b) and 13 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. The equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 12A, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 12B, and the second angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. At the same time, the flow of the game ball A1 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 flowing down the introduction passage 310 gets over the first protrusion 311 while abutting on the first protrusion 311 to reduce the speed in the left-right direction, and the second protrusion 311. It flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the portion 312. Therefore, the game ball A1 is prevented from being swiftly thrown to the left from the introduction passage 310 and overcoming the distribution body 322, and landing on the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (position close to the special route hole 323). Is prevented.

When the game ball A1 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 flows down along the arrow A1x shown in FIG. 12B, and then flows down. It rolls along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322a and reaches the position shown in FIG. 12B (the position close to the special route hole 323).

Here, since the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is reduced from the equilibrium state shown in FIG. 12A to the first angle state shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 becomes the distribution body 322. By landing, the distribution body 322 rotates by the weight of the game ball A1. Therefore, the game ball A1 is suppressed (absorbed) from bouncing from the distribution body 322 and flows down in a manner of pushing the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a until the distribution body 322 is in the first angle state (about 0.5 seconds in the present embodiment). Then, it flows down to the lower right and reaches the front side (left side of FIG. 12B) of the special route hole 323. In this state, since the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game ball A1 is mounted) is sunk below the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323, the game ball A1 passes through the special route hole 323. Is prevented from doing.

After that, the distribution body 322 is further rotated by the load given from the game ball A1 to reach the second angle state shown in FIG. 13 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), so that the game ball A1 is moved from the distribution body 322. It falls down and heads for the normal route hole 324.

That is, when one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320, the game ball A1 passes through the normal route hole 324.

Next, a case where two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution unit 320 from the left and right at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. 14 (a), 14 (b) and 15 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. In addition, in FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B and FIG. 15, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and the flow of the game balls A2 and A3 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the game balls A2 and A3 flowing down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A2 and A3 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

When the game balls A2 and A3 roll on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a and flow down from the state shown in FIG. 14 (a), the game balls A2 and A3 become the arrows A1x and A2x shown in FIG. 14 (b). After flowing down along the line, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. The arrow A2x is an arrow in the direction in which the arrow A1x is horizontally inverted.

Here, since the load in the rotation direction about the shaft support rod 322f given to the distribution body 322 is balanced, the rotation of the distribution body 322 is suppressed, and the distribution body 322 maintains an equilibrium state. While the game balls A2 and A3 flow down to the left and right along the inclination of the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, the game balls A2 and A3 have the same flow mode, so that the distribution body 322 is maintained in an equilibrium state. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game balls A2 and A3 are mounted) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game ball. A2 and A3 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at the same time, the game balls A2 and A3 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, a case where the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing slightly deviated from the left and right (for example, a timing deviated by 0.5 seconds) will be described. do. 16 (a), 16 (b), 17 (a), 17 (b) and 18 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. In addition, in FIG. 16A, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, in FIG. 16B, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and in FIG. 17A, the distribution body 322 is the first. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 17B, the distribution body 322 is a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, and in FIG. 18, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown. However, the flow of the game balls A4 and A5 is shown in chronological order.

In the present embodiment, since the opening period of the movable piece 190b is 0.5 seconds, the game ball that enters with one opening does not have a time delay of 0.5 seconds or more. Is an example in which the game balls are displaced by the maximum deviation width (for example, one game ball A4 enters immediately after the opening of the movable piece 190b, and the other game ball A5 enters immediately before the movable piece 190b is closed. It is an example of a ball).

As shown in FIG. 16A, the game balls A4 and A5 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A4 and A5 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

When the game ball A4 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protruding portion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 16A, it flows down along the arrow A1x and then lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Then, the distribution body 322 rotates clockwise to enter the first angle state shown in FIG. 16 (b).

From the state shown in FIG. 16B until the game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A4. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed slows down, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period of can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A4 from falling out of the distribution body 322 because the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state before the later game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the game ball A5 lands on the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation directions are balanced (cancelled). , As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the distribution body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, as the loads applied from the game balls A4 and A5 to the distribution body 322 are balanced, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state as shown in FIG. 18, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (game ball). The surface on which A2 and A3 are placed) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without steps), and the game balls A4 and A5 flow into the special route hole 323. NS.

That is, when the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution portion 320 at a timing slightly deviated, the game balls A4 and A5 pass through the special route hole 323. As described above, even if the plurality of game balls arrive with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, which is the opening period of the movable piece 190a, the distribution body 322 in the phone embodiment absorbs the deviation and absorbs the deviation to form the special route hole. It is configured in such a manner that a game ball can be thrown to 323.

Next, a case where two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 in succession from one side will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19 (a), 19 (b), 20 (a) and 20 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. Note that the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 19A, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 19B, and the distribution body 322 is the first in FIG. 20A. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 20B, the distribution body 322 is illustrated as a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, respectively, and the game balls A6, respectively. The flow of A7 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the game balls A6 and A7 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A6 and A7 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

Further, when the game balls A6 and A7 flow down the introduction passage 310 in a row, the game balls A6 come into contact with the first protruding portion 311 and are decelerated, behind the game balls A6 (right side in FIG. 19A). The game ball A7 is decelerated while abutting on the game ball A6, and after the game ball A6 passes over the first protruding portion 311 and flows down again, the game ball A7 abuts on the first protruding portion 311 and is decelerated. As a result, a space is provided between the first game ball A6 and the second game ball A7 (in the present embodiment, about 1 second).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, after the game ball A6 flows down along the arrow A1x, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, and after rotating the distribution body 322 to the first angle state, It is said that the state is in the process of getting over the first protruding portion 311.

From the state shown in FIG. 19B until the game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A6. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed slows down, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period of can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A6 from falling off from the distribution body 322 because the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state before the later game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the distribution body 322 is further rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball A6, so that the tip of the plate-shaped portion 322b approaches the second protruding portion 312 on the right side. .. In this state, the game ball A7 rolls down on the inclined surface of the second protrusion 312 along the arrow A1x, thereby rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 322b, and the game ball A7 of the distribution body 322. Land on the left side. That is, the plate-shaped portion 322b can distribute the game balls A6 and A7 to the left and right of the distribution body 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball A7 flows down by the second protruding portion 312 at a speed toward the rotation center of the distribution body 311, the rotation angle of the plate-shaped portion 322b is insufficient (for example, FIG. 19 (FIG. 19). Even if the game ball A7 flows downward from the second protruding portion 312 in the state shown in b)), the game ball A7 is supported by the tip portion (between the second protruding portion 312) of the plate-shaped portion 322b. Then, by further rotating the distribution body 322 clockwise, the game ball A7 can be surely flowed down to the left of the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the game ball A7 lands on the left side portion of the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation directions are balanced (cancelled). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the distribution body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, the loads applied to the distribution bodies 322 such as the game balls A6 and A57 are balanced, so that the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state. The surface) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game balls A6 and A7 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 in succession from one side, the game balls A6 and A7 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case where the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing (in the present embodiment, about 2 seconds) that is significantly deviated will be described. In such a state, for example, the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice by one operation trigger, and one game ball is opened each time the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened. ) Is formed when the ball is entered.

21 (a), 21 (b) and 22 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. Note that FIG. 21A shows the second angle state of the distribution body 322, and FIG. 21B shows the distribution body 322 as a state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Then, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and the flow of the game balls A8 and A9 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state due to the load of the game ball A8, and after the game ball A8 is dropped off, the distribution body 322 starts to rotate toward the equilibrium state. However, since the rotation resistance is increased between the second angle state and the first angle state, the distribution body 322 rotates slowly.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in the state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Here, since the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is large, the operation of the game ball A9 pushing the distribution body 322 as in the case of landing on the distribution body 322 in the equilibrium state does not occur, but the game ball A9 Bounces on the inclined surface of the distribution body 322, and an operation in which the angular state of the distribution body 322 is maintained between the first angle state and the second angle state occurs.

Therefore, as soon as the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 does not pass the equilibrium state and the distribution body 322 faces the opposite side to the left and right, and the distribution body 322 rotates slowly. Therefore, after arranging the game ball A9 on the side close to the special route hole 323 (the left and right end sides of the fan-shaped portion 322a) along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322b, the distribution body 322 is brought to an equilibrium state. Can be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22B, the game ball A9 can flow into the special route hole 323 at the same time when the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state.

That is, when the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the previous game ball A8 passes through the normal route hole 324. , The later game ball A9 passes through the special route hole 323.

In order to achieve this, in the present embodiment, the game ball abuts on the distribution body 322 to change the state of the distribution body 322 from the equilibrium state to the second angle state, and then returns to the first angle state. The period (about 4 seconds) is set to be equal to or longer than the interval (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from closing to opening when the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice.

In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds to 5 for the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to reach the fixed region hole 340 through the normal route guide path 326 and the taxiing inclined portion 330. Designed to fit in a second. Further, the period required for the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323 to reach the fixed region hole 340 after passing through the special route guide path 325 and the taxiing inclined portion 330 is set to 2 to 3 seconds. Designed.

That is, for example, in FIG. 21 (a), when both the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340, the game ball A8 has a fixed region about 4 to 5 seconds after the state of FIG. 21 (a). After reaching the hole 340, the game ball A9 is about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), and about 2 to 3 seconds after the state of FIG. 21 (b) (FIG. From the state of 21 (a), the confirmed region hole 340 is reached in 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (after about 1 second, the equilibrium state is reached, and then 1.5 to 2.5 seconds after that, the confirmed region hole is confirmed. Reach the region hole 340). Therefore, the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340 with a deviation of at most 2.5 seconds.

In this way, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 by one small hit lottery, the maximum deviation interval when those game balls reach the fixed area hole 340 is It is set to about 2.5 seconds. Based on this, the extension period of the residence solenoid 413 of the second flow-down device 400, which will be described later, is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reliably carry out that a plurality of game balls are retained by the flow-down blocking plate 412 and then flowed down again.

Next, the second flow-down device 400 in which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) of the first flow-down device 300 flows down will be described.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 400, and FIG. 24 is a front view of the second flow-down device 400. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the second flow-down device 400 is a device composed of a plurality of branched flow paths and allowing a game ball that has passed through a fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) to flow down, and the flow path is a device. The first branch region 410 that branches into two and the region where the game ball that has flowed down the second branch guide flow path R2, which is the upper flow path branched in the first branch region 410, reaches, and the flow path is The game ball that has flowed down the second branch region 420 that branches into two and the third branch guide flow path R3 that is the lower flow path branched in the first branch region 410 arrives and the second branch flow path 420. A third branch area 430, which is a region reached by a game ball flowing down a special induction flow path R4, which is a flow path on the front side branched in, and the flow path branches into two, and a plurality of game balls are discharged. The specific basin holes 440 and the guide flow paths R1 to R6 for guiding the game ball are connected to the branch regions 410 to 430.

The first branch guide flow path R1 is a flow path in which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is guided, and after extending downward to the right, the direction slightly deviates from the vertical direction to the right (see FIG. 5). It is a flow path that extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the lower right) and is connected to the first branch region 410 from above. That is, the game ball flows into the first branch region 410 along a direction slightly deviating to the right from the vertical direction (diagonally lower right direction). In the present embodiment, the first branch guide flow path R1 is configured to discharge the inflowing game ball to the first branch region 410 in a maximum of 3 seconds.

The second branch guide flow path R2 is an upper flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and is connected to the second branch region 420 from the right side after extending to the lower left.

The third branch guide flow path R3 is a lower flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side and then descends and inclines to the left. After extending vertically and further downward, it is connected to the third branch region 430 from above.

The special guide flow path R4 is a flow path on the front side branched from the second branch region 420, and after extending vertically downward, joins the portion of the third branch guide flow path R3 extending in the vertical direction from above. do. After the game ball flows into the special induction flow path R4, it takes 1 second to reach the distribution protrusion 431 and the game ball flows to either the left or right flow path.

The first delay induction flow path R5 is a flow path on the right side branched from the third branch area 430, extends downward to the lower right, and a second specific area hole 442 is arranged at the lower end portion.

The second delay induction flow path R6 is a flow path on the back surface side branched from the second branch region 420, extends downward to the left, and a third specific region hole 443 is arranged at the left end portion.

As shown in FIG. 24, the third branch guide flow path R3 has a longer path than the second branch guide flow path R2, while the inclination angle is increased. Therefore, the flow-down position (left-right position) of the game ball flowing down the respective induction flow paths R2 and R3 can be made uniform. In the present embodiment, two game balls that are simultaneously sent from the first branch region 410 to the second branch guidance flow path R2 and the third branch guidance flow path R3 are stopped at the second branch guidance flow path R2. The shape of the flow path is designed so that the ball comes into contact with the special guide flow path R4 in the vertical direction at the confluence position.

As shown in FIG. 24, the first delay guidance flow path R5 has a larger inclination angle and a shorter extension length than the second delay guidance flow path R6. That is, compared to the case where the game ball passes through the first delay guidance flow path R5 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), the case where the game ball passes through the second delay guidance flow path R6 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment). (5 seconds), the staying time of the game ball is longer. A plurality of deceleration protrusions for decelerating the game ball are provided on the bottom surface of each of the guide flow paths R5 and R6.

The specific region hole 440 is a first specific region hole 441 arranged in the left flow path branched from the third branch region 430 and a second specific region hole 441 arranged in the lower end portion of the first delay induction flow path R5. It mainly includes a region hole 442 and a third specific region hole 443 arranged at the left end of the second delay induction flow path R6.

The first specific area hole 441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 441a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 441a.

The second specific area hole 442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 442a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the second specific area hole 442 and the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 442a.

The third specific area hole 443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 443a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 and the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 443a.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area and the game ball passes through the first specific area while the effect of the three-round jackpot is being executed. , The game ball is invalid (since the 3R jackpot process is already running, it does not interrupt), and the 16-round jackpot production is not executed. Therefore, it was a cause of dissatisfaction of the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball can pass through a plurality of specific areas, the game ball first passes through the specific area having the greatest benefit to the player. NS. The details will be described later.

The configuration of the first branch region 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 25, the first branch region 410 comes into contact with the game ball flowing down the first branch guide flow path R1 from the right side, and the contact wall 411 reflects the game ball toward the second branch flow path R2. The flow prevention is configured so that it can appear and disappear in a mode of switching between the overhanging state of the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 and the retracted state of sinking to the outside. It includes a plate 412 and a retention solenoid 413 that drives the flow-down prevention plate 412 and is arranged on the back surface side of the second branch guide flow path R2.

The contact wall 411 is a side wall having a length equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball and extending vertically upward. As a result, the distribution of the game balls can be changed depending on whether the number of game balls approaching the contact wall 411 is one or two or more. A state in which the contact wall 411 distributes the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

In the overhanging state, the flow blocking plate 412 narrows the size of the opening inside the second branch guide flow path R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3 to the diameter of the game ball or less, and stops the game ball. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the flow blocking plate 412 sinks to the outside of the second branch guide flow path R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3, so that the game ball is released from stopping.

That is, by keeping the flow-down blocking plate 412 in the overhanging state, the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 and has reached the left side of the contact wall 411 can be temporarily stopped, and then the game ball can be temporarily stopped. By switching the driving state of the staying solenoid 413 to put the flow blocking plate 412 in the retracted state, the game ball can be thrown to the left. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball is thrown downward from the vicinity of the contact wall 411 can be arbitrarily specified depending on the control of the staying solenoid 413.

26 (a) to 26 (c) are partial front views of the second flow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. 24. It should be noted that in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first specific area 410 in chronological order, and in FIG. 26 (a), the appearance is shown first. The state immediately before the entered game ball B1 abuts on the contact wall 411 is illustrated, and in FIG. 26B, the later entered game ball B2 abuts on the game ball B1 and is pushed to the right. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 26C, the game balls B1 and B2 are separated, the game ball B1 flows into the second branch guide flow path R2, and the game ball B2 flows into the third branch guide flow path R3, respectively. Is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the flow prevention plate 412 is shown in an overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the above-mentioned game ball B1 flows down the first branch guide flow path R1 toward the lower right along the extending direction thereof, and collides with the contact wall 411 on the right side surface. After landing on the bottom plate of the second branch guide flow path R2, the second branch guide flow path R2 flows down to the left.

At this time, the game ball B1 starts to flow down from the state where the speed in the left-right direction is suppressed (the state where it lands) to the second branch guide flow path R2 toward the left. Then, at the position where it bounces to the left from the contact wall 411 (see FIG. 26B), the flow is blocked by the flow blocking plate 412 and stays there for a while.

Since the later game ball B2 flows into the first branch region 410 while the game ball B1 is staying, the game ball B2 comes into contact with the game ball B1 before it comes into contact with the contact wall 411. At the time of this contact, the game ball B1 is arranged at a position slightly shifted to the left from the position where it abuts on the contact wall 411, and the game ball B2 hits the game ball B1 from above on the right side of the center of the game ball B1. Touch. Therefore, a load is applied from the game ball B1 to the game ball B2 in the right direction due to the contact.

Further, since the game ball B2 has a velocity component in the lower right direction along the extending direction of the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball B2 moves to the right after coming into contact with the game ball B1. Here, since the extended height of the contact wall 411 is shorter than the diameter of the game balls B1 and B2, the game ball B2 can be moved to the right while overcoming the contact wall 411. As a result, the game ball B2 flows down the third branch guide flow path R3, is prevented from flowing down by the flow-down blocking plate 412 below the game ball B1, and stays there for a while.

The retention solenoid 413 is a period required from when the game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guide flow path R1 until the game ball B2 reaches the flow blocking plate 412 of the third branch guide flow path R3 (this). In the embodiment, when a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) sufficiently longer than (3 seconds) elapses, the drive state is switched and the evacuation state is set. Therefore, even if the intervals at which the two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guidance flow path R1 are different, the flow start timing when the game balls B1 and B2 stop once and then start flowing down again. And the flow start position can be fixed.

When the two game balls B1 and B2 are collectively entered into the first branch region 410, the later game balls B2 are entered into the third branch guide flow path R3, which is more advantageous than the second branch guide flow path R2. be able to. On the other hand, when the game balls enter the first branch region 410 one by one, the game balls enter the third branch guidance flow path R3 by being blocked by the contact wall 411 no matter how many times the ball enters the first branch region 410. Inflow is prevented.

Therefore, the way in which the game balls are branched can be changed depending on the number of game balls that collectively enter the first branch area 410, and when two game balls collectively enter the first branch area 410. Both of them can be prevented from flowing into the second branch induction flow path R2.

As described above in FIGS. 12 to 20, when two game balls enter the first flow-down device 300 as a stage before the game balls flow into the first branch region 410, the two game balls Is thrown into the special route hole 323 at almost the same timing and flows down to the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5). This is a situation that occurs with a high probability if two game balls enter the one flow device 300 together.

27 (a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXVIIa of FIG. 24, and FIG. 27 (b) is a second flow-down device 400 in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of. In addition, in FIG. 27 (a) and FIG. 27 (b), the region corresponding to the second branch region 420 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), the second branch region 420 is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the second branch guide flow path R2 comes into contact with the second branch region 420, and performs a constant reciprocating swing operation. The distribution operation device 421, the special area hole 422 through which the game balls distributed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27 (a)) by the distribution operation device 421 pass, and the back side (FIG. 27) by the distribution operation device 421. The first delay preparation hole 423 through which the game balls distributed to 27 (a) upper side pass, and the prevention wall portion 424 that prevents the game balls distributed by the distribution operation device 421 from going to the opposite side. Mainly prepare.

The distribution operation device 421 generates a movable plate 421a rotatably supported near the outlet position of the first branch guide flow path R2 and a driving force for driving the movable plate 421a, and generates a driving force to drive the movable plate 421a, and generates a flange of the second flow-down device 400. It mainly includes a drive motor 421b fixed to a portion (not shown).

The movable plate 421a is provided with a rotation shaft that is in contact with the right side of the prevention wall portion 424 and extends in the vertical direction at a position that is tangent to the central axis of the second branch guide flow path R2, and the extension direction of the movable plate 421a is the second branch guide. A mode in which a predetermined angle (45 ° in this embodiment) is swung back and forth (up and down in FIG. 27 (a)) with reference to a state along the central axis of the flow path R2 (a state shown by a solid line in FIG. 27 (a)). Rotate back and forth with. The rotation operation is an operation that is continued from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (except when the power is turned off or other power failure) to when the power is cut off, and it reciprocates once in 2 seconds (rotation of 90 ° one way). The speed mode is about 1 second).

In the present embodiment, the movable plate 421a is placed between the pair of reference straight lines L1 with the pair of reference straight lines L1 connecting the rotation axis of the movable plate 421a and the front and rear side wall ends of the second branch guide flow path R2 as a boundary. The state in which the movable plates 421a are arranged is referred to as a retention state of the movable plates 421a, and a state in which the movable plates 421a are arranged outside the pair of reference straight lines L1 including a state in which the pair of reference straight lines L1 and the longitudinal directions of the movable plates 421a coincide with each other. It is referred to as a passable state of the movable plate 421a.

The special region hole 422 guides the passing game ball to the special guide flow path R4. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27 (a)) by the movable plate 421a falls vertically downward while flowing from the special guidance flow path R4 into the third branch guidance flow path R3. It flows into the third branch region 430.

On the other hand, the special region hole 423 guides the passing game ball to the second delay guidance flow path R6. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 27A) by the movable plate 421a passes through the second delay guidance flow path R6 and passes through the third specific region hole 443.

FIG. 28 is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24. In FIG. 28, the region corresponding to the third branch region 430 is shown. As shown in FIG. 28, the third branch region 430 is a region in which the game ball that has passed through the third branch guidance flow path R3 enters from above, and is the third region from the exit position of the third branch guidance flow path R3. A distribution protrusion 431 is provided which is projected vertically upward at a position where the central axis of the branch guide flow path R3 is extended.

The distribution protrusion 431 is formed from a mountain shape that is symmetrical with respect to a line extending the central axis of the third branch guide flow path R3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 has a center vertically above the center of the distribution protrusion 431 at the start of contact with the distribution protrusion 431. Therefore, the probability of distributing the game ball to the left and right is 50% (50% each).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 39, some aspects in which the game balls B1 and B2 pass through the second branch region 420 and the third branch region 430 will be described separately for each case. First, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, a case where the game ball B1a flows down in the second branch region 420 without staying and passes through the special region hole 422 will be described.

29 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 29 (b) is a portion of the second flow device 400 in the direction of arrow XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a). Top view, FIG. 30 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 30 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, and FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24. In addition, in FIG. 29 (a), FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 30 (a), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31 (b), two pieces are collectively included in the first branch region 410. The state in which the balled game balls B1a and B2a flow down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), when the movable plate 421a opens the special area hole 422 side when the game ball B1a reaches the second branch region 420, the passage is allowed to pass. As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the game ball B1a reaches the special region hole 422 and falls into the special region hole 422 without decelerating in particular.

Here, the flow of the game balls B1a and B2a from the first branch region 410 to the left occurs because the velocity to the left starts from the first branch region 410, so that the mode of the second branch guide flow path R2 ( By setting the extension length and inclination angle) and the third branch guide flow path R3 (extension length and inclination angle), it is possible to aim at the positions of the flowing game balls B1a and B2a.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the game ball B1a falls into the special region hole 422 without being decelerated by the movable plate 421a in the second branch region 420, the third branch guide flow path R3 is used. The flow path shape is designed so that it falls on the upper surface of the passing game ball B2a.

For example, the game ball flows down from the second branch guide flow path R2 to the special region hole 422 in 2 seconds, and falls from the special guide flow path R4 to the third branch region 430 in 1 second, while the third branch guide flow flows. It is configured such that the game ball flows down the road R3 in about 2.5 seconds.

Here, when the game ball B2a moves from the state shown in FIG. 30A to the state shown in FIG. 31A, it collides with the left side wall of the third branch guidance flow path R3 to move to the left. The speed of the ball is killed and it falls vertically downward. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the speed in the left-right direction and the speed in the up-down direction of the game ball B2a are greatly reduced. By dropping the game ball B1a toward a position where the speed is greatly reduced, the game ball B1a and the game ball B2a can be stably brought into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), from the state where the game balls B1a and B2a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the game balls B1a and B2a are continuously connected and fall vertically downward, and then the lower game ball B2a is a distribution protrusion. Collide with 431. In that case, the ratio of the game ball B2a being distributed to the distribution protrusions 431 is half left and right (50%), but when the game ball B2a is distributed to either the left or right, it collides with the game ball B1a above it. By doing so, the game ball B1a can be easily distributed to the left and right opposite sides of the game ball B2a. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the two game balls B1a and B2a one by one in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431.

In the present embodiment, after the game balls B1a and B2a are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the second specific area switch 442a is compared with the period required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area switch 441a. The time it takes for the game ball to pass through is greatly increased.

Therefore, by causing the two game balls B1a and B2a to flow down one by one in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431, the game balls B1a and B2a pass through the second specific area switch 442a. B2a can be passed through the first specific area switch 441a. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability that the player will win a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot that is more profitable than a 7-round jackpot) as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the third branch region 430.

A case where the game ball B1b temporarily stays in the second branch region 420 and then passes through the special region hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35.

32 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). It is a top view, FIG. 33 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 33 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, FIG. 34 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 34 (b) is an arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 400 in the directional view, and FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24.

In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), FIG. 32 (b), FIG. 33 (a), FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. The appearance of the two game balls B1b and B2b flowing down is shown in the figure series.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when the game ball B1b reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a is in a staying state while rotating in the direction approaching the first delay preparation hole 423. In the case of, the game ball B1b is hindered by the tip of the movable plate 421a, and temporarily (about 1 second) at the position shown in FIG. 32 (b) (the exit position of the second branch guide flow path R2). After staying, the movable plate 421a further rotates and flows down toward the special region hole 422 as the passage is allowed to pass (see FIG. 33 (b)). Here, since the game ball B2b continues to flow down while the game ball B1b stays, the game ball B1b reaches the special region hole 422 at a timing deviated from the timing at which the game balls B1b and B2b come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing when the game ball B1b starts flowing into the special induction flow path R4, the game ball B2b has already reached the distribution protrusion 431 and the distribution in the third branch region 430 is executed. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B1b reaches the distribution protrusion 431. Here, when the game balls B1b and B2b are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the game balls B1b and B2b do not interfere with each other, so that the distribution ratio for each of the game balls B1b and B2b is half (50%). ..

That is, since the player has two chances to flow the game balls B1b and B2b into the first special area hole 441, when only one game ball enters the second flow-down device 400. In comparison, it can be easier for the player to improve the profits obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B2b that first reached the distribution protrusion 431 by disposing the first delay flow path R5 between the distribution protrusion 431 and the second specific region hole 442. Is distributed to the second specific region hole 442 side, while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay induction flow path R5 (about 2 seconds), the later game ball B1b is in the first specific region. Passing through the hole 441 (one second after the state shown in FIG. 34A, that is, while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay induction flow path R5), the first specific area switch 441a is reached. A state of being detected (a state in which the player has won a 16-round jackpot) can be configured. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits that can be obtained.

A case where the game ball B1c passes through the first delay preparation hole 423 without staying in the second branch region 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39.

36 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 36 (b) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). Top view, FIG. 37 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 37 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400.

In addition, in FIG. 36 (a), FIG. 36 (b), FIG. 37 (a), FIG. 37 (b), FIG. The state in which B2c flows down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), when the game ball B1c reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a opens the first delay preparation hole 423 side to allow passage. In this case, the game ball B1c reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 and falls into the first delay preparation hole 423 as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) without decelerating in particular.

The game ball B1c that has fallen into the first delay preparation hole 423 flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 and heads for the third specific region hole 441. Here, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the game ball B2c flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 is distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431, but the first side has a long distance to the specific region. The period during which the game ball B2c flows down the delayed induction flow path R5 (about 2 seconds) is shorter than the period during which the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 (about 5 seconds). ..

That is, regardless of whether the game ball B2c is distributed to the left or right by the distribution protrusion 431, before the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 and passes through the third specific area switch 443a, The game ball B2c can be made to flow into the first specific area switch 441a or the second specific area switch 442a. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits that can be obtained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the route distribution unit 320 and the distribution unit can easily allow the game balls to enter the fixed region hole 340 by collectively entering the game balls into the first flow-down device 300. The inclined portion 330 is arranged, and the player can easily obtain the profit by playing a game in which two game balls are put together into the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and both of them enter the fixed area hole 340, one second flow-down device 400 follows. The structure is such that it is easier to obtain a jackpot with a larger profit than when the game ball of the game flows down. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second delay induction flow path R6 is configured as a long and gently sloping flow path to increase the period until the game ball passes through the third specific region switch 443a has been described. The second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment projects for a predetermined period when the game ball enters each of the starting winning openings 26 to 28 (see FIG. 2), and causes the game ball to fall into the specific area hole 2440. A timed blocking plate 2411 for blocking is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

40 (a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are the second flow-down on the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 40 (a). It is sectional drawing of the apparatus 2400. In addition, in FIG. 40A, the illustration of the lid member arranged on the front side is omitted, and the inner side surface of the specific region hole 2440 is shown, which is the same in FIGS. 41 and 42. Further, FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is projected, and FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is retracted.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the second flow-down device 2400 has a first branch guide flow path R1, a timed branch region 2410 connected to the first branch guide flow path R1, and a timed period of the timed branch region 2410. It mainly includes an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411.

The timed branching region 2410 is a region for sending the game ball flowing down the first branch guide flow path R1 to any specific region, and the game is played in the specific region hole 2440 which is an inlet for the game ball to flow into the specific region. It includes a timed blocking plate 2411 that prevents the ball from passing in a timely manner, and some (three in this embodiment) specific region holes 2440 into which the game ball is thrown.

The time blocking plate 2411 overhangs inside the specific region hole 2440 (overhangs downward in FIG. 40 (b)) and sinks outside the specific region hole (submerges upward in FIG. 40 (b)). The immersive state can be configured by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, and the upper surface of the plate in the overhanging state is arranged at a position where it is sunk downward by the radius of the game ball from the entrance (upper surface) of each specific area hole 2440. ..

The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is energized when the game ball passes through the fixed region switch 340a (see FIG. 5) to form an overhanging state. The overhanging state is longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the first branch guide flow path R1 and for the game ball to be arranged inside each specific region hole 2440 (up to 10 seconds in the present embodiment). It is maintained for a sufficiently long period (12 seconds). As a result, it is possible to align the fall timings of the game balls falling from each specific region hole 2440.

Each specific region hole 2440 is a hole having a size large enough for one game ball to pass through, and the first specific region hole 2441 in which the game ball flowing down to the first branch guide flow path R1 falls with an equal probability. And a second specific area hole 2442 and a third specific area hole 2443 are mainly provided.

The first specific area hole 2441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 2441a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 2441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 2442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 2442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a.

The third specific area hole 2443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 2443 and passing through the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40A, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 2441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 2443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a. H1 <distance H2 <distance H3). Since the flow resistance of each specific region hole 2441 to 2443 is configured to be the same, a profit that can be obtained by a player when a plurality of game balls fall into each specific region hole 2441 to 2443 in a manner in which the fall timings are aligned. Can be the maximum benefit in the specific region holes 2441 to 2443 through which the game ball passes. In this embodiment, the flow resistance is the same, but the effect may be achieved by changing the flow resistance and making the distances H1 to H3 equivalent.

An example of the flow-down mode of the game balls B10 and B11 when two game balls B10 and B11 flow into the second flow-down device 2400 together will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

41 (a), 41 (b) and 42 are front views of the second flow-down device 2400. In addition, in FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 42, the appearance of two game balls B10 and B11 entering the third flow-down device 2400 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the previous game ball B10 enters the third specific area hole 2443 with an equal probability, the game ball B10 becomes a lid, and the latter game ball B11 becomes the third specific area. It is impossible to enter the hole 2443. As a result, when two game balls enter the second flow-down device 2440, it is possible to prevent the two game balls from entering the same specific area hole 2440 (for example, the third specific area hole 2443). Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the later game ball B11 enters the second specific region hole 2442 or the first specific region hole 2441 with equal probability. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), the case where the game ball B11 enters the first specific area hole 2441 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is turned off and the timed blocking plate 2411 is immersed, the game balls B10 and B11 fall at the same time. At this time, since the distance H1 is shorter than the distance H3, the game ball B10 passes through the third specific area switch 2443a after the game ball B11 passes through the first specific area switch 2441a and is detected. Therefore, it is invalid that the game ball B10 has passed the third specific area switch 2443a, and the player can win a 16-round jackpot.

Thereby, in the present embodiment, when the two game balls B10 and B11 are entered into the second flow-down device 2440, it is possible to prevent both of them from entering the same specific region holes 2441 to 2443. It is possible to effectively detect the game ball that has entered the specific area holes 2441 to 2443, which is more advantageous for the player, with the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a. This makes it possible for the player to obtain a more profitable jackpot as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the second flow-down device 2400.

Next, the first flow-down device 3300 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the game ball changes when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322 has been described, but the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow device 3300 in the third embodiment has a route distribution unit 3320. By colliding the game balls with each other, the flow path of the game balls is changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

43 is a front view of the first flow-down device 3300 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow-down device 3300 in the direction of arrow XLIV of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 is a side view of FIG. 44. It is a top view of the first flow-down device 3300 in the direction view of arrow XLV. In FIG. 43, the front side wall of the introduction passage 3310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 3320 are not shown for ease of understanding (that is, the game ball is inside the introduction passage 3310 and the route swing). It flows down the inside of the branch portion 3320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (front side in FIG. 43).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the first flow-down device 3300 has an introduction passage 3310 for guiding the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) to the route distribution unit 3320, and an introduction passage thereof. It mainly includes a route distribution portion 3320 into which a game ball that has passed through 3310 enters, a distribution inclination portion 330 having a protrusion 331, a fixed region hole 340, and an outlier hole 350.

The introduction passage 3310 is a branch region 3311 arranged in the central portion of the front view, is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the branch region 3311, and is a flow path through which the game ball flows down and is connected to the branch region 3311. The upper passage 3312 and the lower passage which is formed so as to be inclined downward from the branch region 3311 in both the left and right directions in the front view and allows the game ball to flow down and is connected to the connecting passages 3314 and 3315 at the left and right ends. The side flow path 3313, the right side connecting flow path 3314 extending downward from the right end of the lower flow path 3313 toward the back side without any left-right component, and the left end of the lower flow path 3313. The left side connecting passage 3315 extending downward from the portion toward the front side without any component in the left-right direction, and the left and right inner positions of the lower bottom plates of the connecting flow passages 3314 and 3315 are projected upward. Mainly includes a protruding portion 3316 to be formed.

The branching region 3311 includes a partition wall portion 3311a which is a wall portion for flowing the game ball sent from the upper flow path 3312 into the lower flow path 3313 on the same side on the left and right sides in a state where the game ball is not accommodated.

The partition wall portion 3311a is a position separated by one game ball (one game ball in the left-right direction) from the position where the bottom plate of the upper flow path 3312 is interrupted, and extends the bottom plate of the lower flow path 3313 in the left-right direction. It is a wall portion that extends upward from the installed position at a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The function of the partition wall portion 3311a will be described with reference to FIG. 46. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partial front views of the introduction passage 3310. In addition, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the flow of the game balls B20 and B21 when the game balls B20 and B21 enter from one entrance of the introduction passage 3310 in chronological order is shown. Will be done.

When the game ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, it enters the branch area 3311 from the upper passage 3312 and falls in the vertical direction, and the partition wall portion 3311a restricts the movement to the left, and then the lower flow. Enter the road 3313.

That is, if there is one game ball flowing down the introduction passage 3310, or even if there are two game balls, one is divided into left and right, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 3312 from one of the left and right sides is a branch region 3311. The ball is entered into the lower passage 3313 in a manner of being bounced back to the same side. The introduction passage 3310 has a symmetrical shape, and this is the same even if the game ball enters from the left side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46A, when the two game balls B20 and B21 flow down the introduction passage 3310 together from the right side, the previous game ball B20 enters the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312. In the state of falling in the vertical direction, the rear game ball B21 can get over the previous game ball B20 before turning left and right. Since the protrusion 3316 has a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, in this case, the game ball B21 gets over the protrusion 3316 and enters the lower flow path 3313 on the left side of the protrusion 3316.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the introduction passage 3310 together, one ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from both the left and right sides, or two balls enter the introduction passage 3310 together from the left and right sides, from the introduction passage 3310. A game ball can be inserted into the route distribution unit 3320 in a manner of one on each side.

It will be described back to FIG. 43 to FIG. 45. The game ball that has passed through the lower flow path 3313 falls downward along the extending direction (direction without the left-right direction component) of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315. Each of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 is configured such that the lower bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) is inclined downward toward the center. Therefore, the game ball sent from the lower flow path 3313 to the respective connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 has almost no velocity in the left-right direction when it lands on the lower bottom plate of each connecting flow path 3314 and 3315, and the lower bottom plate has almost no velocity. It rolls toward the center of the left and right according to the inclination.

After that, the game ball comes into contact with the protruding portion 3316, is decelerated, and then flows into the route distribution portion 3320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the route distribution unit 3320 from jumping out in the left-right direction, and it is possible to roll the game ball along the shape of the inner surface of the route distribution unit 3320. Since the extending directions of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 are different in the front-rear direction, the front-rear position of the game ball entering the route distribution portion 3320 is slightly shifted.

Next, the route distribution unit 3320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the description of the route distribution unit 3320, FIGS. 43 to 45 will be referred to as appropriate. 47 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow device 3300 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow device 3300 in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device 3300 on the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47 (b).

In the route distribution unit 3320, a pair of guide rails 3321 for guiding the rolling of the game ball entered from the introduction passage 3310 and a region in which the game ball can move at the left and right center positions of the guide rail 3321 are located in the front-rear direction (FIG. An expansion area 3322 that is expanded in the 47 (a) vertical direction), a special route hole 3323 that is configured as a hole through which a game ball can fall at the center position in the front-rear direction of the expansion area 3322, and a terminal portion of each guide rail 3321. The normal route hole 3324, which is configured as a hole through which the game ball can fall, and the normal route hole 3324, which has passed through the normal route hole 3324, are caused to flow backward and fall to the rear end of the distribution inclined portion 330. It mainly includes a route guide path 3326.

The guide rail 3321 is curved downward in a front view in which the game ball is supported by two rails arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction and the flow path thereof is regulated. Since the pair of guide rails 3321 are rotationally symmetric with respect to the center point on the left and right in the top view, the guide rail 3321 that guides the game ball flowing in from the left side will be described, and the guide rail 3321 on the opposite side will be described. Is omitted.

The guide rail 3321 is a central rail portion 3321a extending along the curved shape of the bottom plate (lower plate of FIG. 43) of the route distribution portion 3320 near the center position in the front-rear direction of the route distribution portion 3320, and the center thereof. An auxiliary rail portion 3321b provided in parallel with the rail portion 3321a is provided.

The central rail portion 3321a and the auxiliary rail portion 3321b have the same overhang height (overhang height toward the curved center side) in the cross-sectional shape. The formation of the central rail portion 3321a is omitted in the central portion in the left-right direction corresponding to the special route hole 3323. Further, the formation of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is omitted from the position shifted outward to the left and right from the portion where the central rail portion 3321a is omitted, and is omitted from the position to the central portion, and the terminal position of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (route distribution portion 3320). A normal route hole 3324 is bored downward at a position where the speed in the left-right direction of the game ball that has entered the ball and did not collide with another game ball is substantially eliminated). The central rail portion 3321a is also used in the pair of guide rails 3321.

The enlarged area 3322 is provided with a special route hole 3323 in the lower portion (the portion on the back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface) at the center position in the front-rear direction (FIG. 47 (a) vertical direction), and is used for the special route. It includes an inclined surface 3322a arranged at a front-rear position of the hole 3323, and a curved receiving wall 3322b arranged as a wall portion that is convexly curved toward the front-rear direction of the inclined surface 3322a.

The inclined surface 3322a is connected to the central end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (the end in the portion where the formation is omitted) and has a downwardly convex curved shape with the end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b as an end point (FIG. It includes a curved side wall 3322a1 composed of (see 48). The inclined surface 3322a is configured to be gently ascended from the curved side wall 3322a1 so as to approach the curved receiving wall 3322b.

The special route hole 3323 is a hole for dropping the game ball near the center position on the left and right of the front end portion of the distribution inclination portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped the special route hole 3323 has a higher probability of entering the fixed region hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped the normal route hole 3324.

The hole for the normal route 3324 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the normal route guide path 3326 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 passes through the normal route guide path 3326 and falls near the rear end of the taxiing inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped the normal route hole 3324 has a lower probability of entering the fixed region hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped the special route hole 3323.

With reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, a flow mode of the game ball B22 when one game ball B22 flows into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 49 (a), 49 (b), 50 (a) and 50 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 49A, FIG. 49B, FIG. 50A, and FIG. 50B, the flow-down mode of the game ball B22 flowing down the route distribution unit 3320 is illustrated in chronological order. NS.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the game ball B22 decelerated by flowing down the left side connecting flow path 3315 and abutting on the protrusion 3316 is supported by the guide rail 3321 and rolls in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 49B, when the game ball B22 approaches the enlarged region 3322, the state in which the game ball B22 is supported by the auxiliary rail portion 3321b shifts to the state in which the curved side wall 3322a1 supports the game ball B22.

In this state, since the curved side wall 3322a1 is sunk downward from the central rail portion 3321a, the center of gravity of the game ball B22 moves toward the inclined surface 3322a (the game ball B22 leans against the inclined surface 3322a).

As shown in FIG. 50A, the game ball B22 passes above the special route hole 3323 while leaning against the inclined surface 3322a. In this state, since the speed of the game ball B22 in the left-right direction is high, it is unlikely that the ball B22 will fall into the special route hole 3323. It is possible to prevent the game ball B22 from colliding with the open end of the special route hole 3323 and decelerating.

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the game ball B22 that has passed above the special route hole 3323 reaches the rightmost normal route hole 3323 and falls. Therefore, when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320, the game ball B22 is preferentially entered into the normal route hole 3324. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B22 passes through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is left to the randomness when it collides with the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclination portion 330, changes its direction at random, and flows down. Be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, a flow mode of the game balls B23 and B24 when two game balls B23 and B24 flow into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 51 (a), 51 (b), 52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 51 (a), FIG. 51 (b), FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game balls B23 and B24 decelerated by flowing down the right side connecting flow path 3314 and the left side connecting flow path 3315 and abutting on the protrusion 3316 are supported by the guide rails 3321 and left and right. Roll in the direction.

Here, since the pair of guide rails 3321 also serve (share) the central rail portion 3321a, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the game balls B23 and B24 flow into the enlarged region 3322, the game balls B23 and B24 Collide.

Since the game balls B23 and B24 are displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)) and flow down, a velocity in the front-rear direction is generated due to the collision. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the game balls B23 and B24 flow down in the direction close to the curved side wall 3322a1 and collide with the curved side wall 3322a1.

Since the curved side wall 3322a1 is formed from a curved shape that is convex in the front-rear direction, a load is applied to the game balls B23 and B24 in the direction of pushing back in the left-right direction, whereby the game balls B23 and B24 increase the velocity in the left-right direction. be killed.

Therefore, neither of the game balls B23 and B24 can reach the hole 3324 for the normal route, and as shown in FIG. It falls into the route hole 3323.

Therefore, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls B23 and B24 are preferentially entered into the special route hole 3323. Therefore, the probability that the game balls B23 and B24 pass through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is dramatically improved.

That is, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls are larger than when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320. The probability of passing through the fixed region hole 340 can be dramatically improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter, the game balls collide with each other in the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow-down device 3300, so that the game balls have a special route hole 3323. It is possible to improve the probability of flowing into.

Next, the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322 and the flow path of the game ball changes depending on whether or not the distribution body 322 is balanced depending on how the weight of the game ball is applied has been described. The route distribution unit 4320 of the first flow-down device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment is configured in a manner in which the path after ejection of the game ball is changed depending on how many game balls are retained on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323. NS. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 53 (a) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and overhangs.

As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the first flow-down device 4300 uses the introduction passage 310 (the first protrusion 311 is omitted) and the game ball thrown from the introduction passage 310. It mainly includes a route distribution portion 4320 for distribution, a distribution inclination portion 330, a fixed region hole 340, and an outlier hole 350 (see FIG. 5).

The route distribution section 4320 has a route distribution section guide path 4321 that causes the taxiing ball to flow down and guides the ball into the drop hole 4321a, and a stay extending vertically below the drop hole 4321a in a downwardly inclined direction to the right. The flow path 4322 and the injection solenoid 4323 fixed to the first flow device 4300 so that the movable portion can be pulled inward of the retention flow path 4322 along the extension direction of the retention flow path 4322. , A special route hole 4324 for causing the taxiing ball to flow down to the special route guidance path 325 (left side guidance path 325a) of the first embodiment, and a normal route hole for allowing the game ball to flow down to the normal route guidance path 326 (see FIG. 5). Mainly equipped with 4325.

The retention flow path 4322 is formed so that the distance from the position where the game ball falling through the drop hole 4321a lands to the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is longer than that of one game ball. As a result, when two game balls B31 and B32 (see FIG. 55 (a)) enter the first flow-down device 4300, the retention flow path is placed in the retention flow path 4322 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323. Two game balls B31 and B32 can be arranged along the extension direction of 4322.

The injection solenoid 4323 operates when the game ball passes through the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 (see FIG. 2). That is, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2), which is opened when the game ball has passed through the starting winning opening 26, 27, 28, reaches the retention flow path 4322. The state is maintained in the retracted state for a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds according to the present embodiment), and then the state is vigorously changed so as to be in the overhanging state (the movable part is overhanging). As a result, the game ball is ejected toward the left side of the retention flow path 4322.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. Note that FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which the game ball B30 reaches the retention flow path 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and a movable portion. The overhanging state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when one game ball B30 is inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, one game ball B30 reaches the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 (injection solenoid). One game ball B30 leans against 4323).

When the injection solenoid 4323 changes to the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B30 vigorously pops out toward the hole 4325 for the normal route, and the game ball B30 falls into the hole 4325 for the normal route (for the normal route to the game ball B30). The injection solenoid 4323 is projected in a manner that gives an initial velocity to reach the hole 4325).

The game ball that has fallen into the hole 4325 for the normal route is guided to the normal route guide path 326 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, when one game ball B30 enters the first flow-down device 4300, as described above. Whether or not the game ball B30 enters the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is left to the randomness when the game ball B30 flows down the taxiing inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, when two game balls are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the situation changes.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the two game balls B31 and B32 reach the retention flow path 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 55 (b) shows the injection solenoid 4323. The state in which the moving part is overhanging is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when two game balls B31 and B32 are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the injection solenoid 4323 is on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state. Two game balls B31 and B32 are lined up along the overhanging direction (along the extending direction of the staying flow path 4322).

When the injection solenoid 4323 is in the overhanging state as shown in FIG. 55 (b) with the two game balls B31 and B32 side by side, the target to be pushed out is the game as compared with the case where there is only one game ball. Since the two balls are heavy, the game balls B31 and B32 do not reach the hole 4325 for the normal route, and the two game balls B31 and B32 fall into the hole 4324 for the special route in front of the hole 4325.

Since the game ball that has fallen into the special route hole 4324 is guided to the special route guide path 325, when two game balls B31 and B32 enter the first flow-down device 4300, it is confirmed as described above. A situation is formed in which the game balls B31 and B32 can easily enter the region hole 340 (see FIG. 5).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game balls entering the first flow-down device 4300 is different, the distance by which the electric operating device (injection solenoid 4323) that operates in the mode of moving the game balls moves the game balls. By making the (flying distance) different, the flow path of the subsequent game ball can be made different.

According to this, as in the case where the two game balls are brought into contact with the movable member (for example, the distribution body 322 (see FIG. 5) in the second embodiment) from both sides in the moving direction to bring the movable member into a balanced state. Since it is not necessary to divide the two game balls into the left and right sides of the taxiing body 322, the structure of the route distribution section guide path 4321 should be simplified (a hole structure having a size that allows only one taxiing ball to pass through). Can be done.

In addition, since the operation of the injection solenoid 4323 is highly durable and accurate, malfunctions such as entering the special route hole 4324 even though only one game ball is in the retention flow path 4322 may occur. Can be suppressed.

Next, the second flow-down device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. In the first embodiment, the contact wall 411 is configured as a fixed portion, and when two game balls are entered in the first branch region 410, one game ball enters the third branch guide flow path R3. Although the case of being sphered has been described, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow-down device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment includes an operation wall 5411 that continuously operates at regular intervals from the time when the power is turned on. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 56, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow device 5400 is provided with a rotation shaft at the bottom plate portion of the second branch guidance flow path R2, and has a cross section L that rotates and reciprocates at predetermined intervals from the time the power is turned on. It is provided with a character-shaped operating wall 5411.

The operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) that guides the game ball arriving from above to the right by the electric operation of the drive motor (not shown), and the contact wall 411 in the first embodiment. At the same position as (see FIG. 24), the wall reciprocates at predetermined intervals from the vertical state (shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in which the wall portion extends vertically upward.

Therefore, in the vertical state, the flow-down mode of the game balls when the two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 is the same as that described above in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure a case where two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 in an inclined state. Hereinafter, the flow mode will be described.

57 (a) to 57 (c) are partial front views of the second flow device 5400 in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. In addition, in FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), the inclined state of the operation wall 5411 is shown, and the flow mode of the two game balls B40 and B41 flowing into the first branch region 5410 is shown in chronological order. NS.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), when the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the gap between the extending tip and the second branch guide flow path R2 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. The position and cross-sectional shape of the rotating shaft are determined. Therefore, in the inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are both guided to the third branch guidance flow path R3.

Therefore, the two game balls B40 and B41 can be reliably guided to the third branch region 430 (see FIG. 31), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are distributed one by one to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since it can be easily made, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific region hole 441. As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31). When the game balls B40 and B41 of the above have entered the first branch area, the player can watch the flow of the game balls with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in the vertical state, as described above in the first embodiment, the game balls are introduced one by one into the second branch guide flow path. The flow mode is divided into R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3 (see FIG. 26), which is a slightly disadvantageous flow mode as compared with the case where the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state, but the second branch guide flow path is The game ball flowing down the second branch guidance flow path R2 passes through the special guidance flow path R4 without being stopped at the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27), so that the game ball flows down the R2. It joins the third branch induction flow path R3 (see FIGS. 29 to 31). That is, similarly to the case where the two game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are moved to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since the pieces can be easily sorted, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific region hole 441. As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31).

As a result, the locations where the flow mode of the game ball differs depending on the state of the operating member (moving wall 5411, movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27)) are located in the first branch region 5410 and the second branch region 420 (see FIG. 24). It can be configured in multiple locations. When two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the player can watch the subsequent flow of the game balls with confidence. On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the player pays attention to the subsequent flow mode of the game balls in the second branch region 420. It will be.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the flowing game ball, increase the variation of the flowing game ball, and provide a fresh game.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the operating wall 5411 is maintained in the inclined state is set to be shorter than the period during which the operating wall 5411 is maintained in the vertical state, thereby preventing the player from becoming too advantageous. There is. That is, in the present embodiment, the operating wall 5411 maintains the vertical state for the first period (for example, 4 seconds), then maintains the inclined state for the second period (for example, 1 second), and then the vertical state is maintained. The state change is repeated from the time when the power is turned on, in such a manner that it is maintained only for the first period. That is, the probability that the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state when the game ball enters the first branch region can be set to a predetermined ratio (20%), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are 2. It is possible to reduce the probability that each of them will be guided to the third branch guidance flow path R3.

Next, the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82. In the second embodiment, when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch region 2410 and fall into the specific region hole 2440, there is a difference between the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls first and the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls later. Although the case where the above does not occur has been described, the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment includes a profit increasing device 6450 in which the profit expected from the game ball that falls later is equal to or greater than the profit expected from the game ball that falls first. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 59 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 59 (b). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 58, the cover member arranged on the front side is not shown, and the inner side surface of the specific region hole 6440 is partially shown.

As shown in FIGS. 58, 59 (a) and 59 (b), the second flow-down device 6400 has a first branch guide flow path R1 and a timed branch region connected to the first branch guide flow path R1. The 6410, the specific area hole 6440 where the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 falls, the profit increasing device 6450 operated by the game ball that has fallen into the specific area hole 6440 (the fall and the bounce are settled), and the game. It mainly includes a slide delay device 6460 that is operated by the game ball in the process of the ball falling into the specific region hole 6440, and a limiting device 6470 that limits the flow path of the game ball by partitioning the inside of the timed branching region 6410 by the operation.

The timed branching region 6410 is a region in which the game ball that has flowed down the first branch induction flow path R1 is sent to any specific region, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface to flow down toward the specific region hole 6440. A plate-shaped rolling plate 6412 that is configured to be possible, a timed blocking plate 2411 that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area hole 6440, which is an entrance for the game ball to flow into a specific area, and a timed period thereof. It includes an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411. Unlike the second embodiment, the timed blocking plate 2411 is arranged diagonally according to the shape of the specific region hole 6440.

The rolling plate 6412 includes a recessed portion 6412a that is recessed rearward in a shape that includes the movement locus of the moving block surface 6451d of the profit increasing device 6450 in a top view, and is provided on the front side (front side of FIG. 58). It is installed in a downwardly inclined posture toward, a plurality of protrusions are arranged on the upper surface thereof, and is assembled so as to cover a slide delay device 6460 arranged below the protrusions.

The specific region hole 6440 mainly includes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) specific region holes, that is, a first specific region hole 6441, a second specific region hole 6442, and a third specific region hole 6443, and each specific region hole 6440 is specified. The region holes 6441 to 6443 are formed from a shape that operably accommodates the profit increasing device 6450 in the entrance opening 6440i that receives the game ball.

In the present embodiment, since the profit increasing device 6450 is configured as a device that rotates around a rotation axis extending to the left and right, it is outside the operation locus of the profit increasing device 6450 so as not to interfere when the profit increasing device 6450 rotates. A wall portion forming the specific region hole 6440 is arranged on the side.

The specific region hole 6440 is a hole having a size large enough for one game ball to pass through, and when a single game ball flows down to the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball has an equal probability of being divided. It mainly includes a first specific region hole 6441, a second specific region hole 6442, and a third specific region hole 6443 that fall.

The first specific area hole 6441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and a vertical flow path extending in the vertical direction from the entrance opening and a game ball at the lower end of the flow path. A diagonal flow path that allows the flow to flow diagonally downward is provided, and a first specific region switch 2441a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first specific area hole 6441 and the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The timed blocking plate 2411 is projected above the first specific area switch 2441a in an overhanging state (see FIG. 60), and prevents the game ball from flowing down the first specific area hole 6441 in the overhanging state. ..

The second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 6441, and the second specific area hole 6442 puts a game ball in the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and is different in that the third specific area hole 6443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot.

That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path of the third specific area hole 6443. ..

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 6442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 6443, and passes through the third specific area. The game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 60, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H1) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the first specific area hole 6441 to the first specific area switch 2441a is compared with the distance (distance H1) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 to the second specific area switch. The distance to 2442a (distance H2) is increased, and the distance (distance H2) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is increased and the third specific area hole 6443 is oblique. The distance (distance H3) from the inlet of the flow path to the third specific region switch 2443a is lengthened (distance H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

As a result, when the game ball falls at the same timing from the entrance of the oblique flow path of each specific area hole 6441 to 6443, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having the distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. , The player can win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds.

The slide delay device 6460 is a member that is operably arranged below the rolling plate 6412 and projects inside the second specific region hole 6442 and the inside of the third special region hole 6443, and is below the rolling plate 6412. A long plate-shaped rotating plate 6461 that rotates about a shaft fixed in the above, and the rotating plate 6461 connected at one end in the long direction (right side in FIG. 59 (a)) and slides in the front-rear direction. The right side slide plate 6462R that is operably supported, the left side slide plate 6462L that is connected at the other end of the rotating plate 6461 in the long direction and is supported so that it can slide in the front-rear direction, and each of these slide plates 6462R, It mainly includes urging springs 6436R and 6436L that urge the 6462L forward.

In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) (a state in which no load is generated by an external force), the slide delay device 6460 is in a balanced state. In this balanced state, the inward protrusions of the right slide plate 6462R and the left slide plate 6462L in the specific region holes 6442 and 6443 are substantially the same.

When the game ball starts to fall into each specific area hole 6442, 6443 from this balanced state, a load is applied from the game ball to the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L, and the slide plates 6462R, 6462L slide in the front-rear direction. do. At this time, since the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are connected to both ends of the rotating plate 6461, the slide plates 6462R and 6462L operate in opposite directions. That is, when one slide plate (for example, the right side slide plate 6462R) slides backward, the other slide plate (for example, the left side slide plate 6462L) slides forward.

The slide plates 6462R and 6462L are formed to have the same length in the elongated direction, but have different tip shapes. That is, the right slide plate 6462R is formed from a shape in which the tip is inclined downward as the tip is directed toward the front side, and the left slide plate 6462L is formed from a shape in which the tip is flat (extending horizontally).

Therefore, for example, when the game ball flows into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the left slide plate 6462L preferentially slides backward (the right slide plate 6462R projects forward). Therefore, the fall of the game ball into the third specific region hole 6443 is delayed. The action and effect at that time will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

Each of the urging springs 6463R and 6436L is formed of the same spring member and has a natural length in a balanced state. In the present embodiment, the elastic spring (loose spring) in which each slide plate 6462R, 6462L has a period of 1 second or more from the retracted state to the balanced state due to the action of the game ball is the urging spring 6464R. , 6463L.

The profit increasing device 6450 mainly includes a first rotating member 6451 arranged inside the first specific area hole 6441 and a second rotating member 6452 arranged inside the second specific area hole 6442. .. Next, the detailed configuration of the profit increasing device 6450 will be described.

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LX-LX line of FIG. 59 (a). As shown in FIG. 60, the first rotating member 6451 has a main body member 6451a formed from a substantially cylindrical shape whose width dimension in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 60) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and its main body. A recessed portion 6451b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at a substantially 1/4 peripheral portion of the member 6451a, a transmission portion 6451c formed by projecting along the peripheral surface at an obliquely front upper portion of the main body member 6451a, and a transmission portion thereof. A moving closed surface 6451d formed in a plane extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the main body member 6451a on the left side of 6451c (in the back direction of the paper surface of FIG. 60) is mainly provided, and the game ball is recessed in the standby state shown in FIG. By being housed in the portion 6451b, it is configured in a mode (center of gravity balance) in which the game ball backflip to a transmission state (see FIG. 65) depending on the weight of the game ball.

The main body member 6451a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G1 of the first rotation member 6451 is provided on the lower front side of the rotation axis in the standby state shown in FIG. As a result, in the standby state, when the main body member 6451a is about to fall forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 60 by being supported by the lid member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6451b includes a vertical side surface VS1 extending along the vertical direction (vertical direction) and a front-rear side surface HS1 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) in the standby state shown in FIG.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS1 are arranged above the rotation axis of the first rotating member 6451, and the distance V1 between the upper and lower side surfaces of the third specific region hole 6443 on the back surface side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts to fall into the third specific region hole 6443, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the right slide plate 6462R via the game ball. Further, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6451b and the first rotating member 6451 starts to perform a backflip operation, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS1 and the back side surface of the third specific area hole 6443 is a distance. By narrowing the size of the ball from V1 (that is, the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the third specific region hole 6443, or the game ball already contained in the recessed portion 6451b rebounds. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

The transmission portion 6451c includes an arc side surface RS recessed in a circular arc shape in a cross section near the rear end portion and extending in the left-right direction, and the transmission state as the arc side surface RS moves to the left (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 60). It is formed so as to be inclined in a downwardly inclined manner.

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS1 is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS1, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS1 guiding the game ball can be improved.

The moving block surface 6451d is formed below the straight line extending along the surface on which the arc side surface RS1 is formed (the side surface at the upper end of FIG. 66). As a result, in the transmission state (see FIG. 65), the moving block surface 6451d is arranged below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 on which the game ball rolls, so that the game ball and the moving block surface 6451d are in the transmission state. It is possible to prevent contact.

Further, the moving block surface 6451d has a mode in which the gap between the moving block surface 6451 and the limiting device 6470 is smaller than the size of the game ball when the limiting device 6470 is in the post-operation state in the standby state of the first rotating member 6451. It is composed.

In the standby state, the front side surface of the moving block surface 6451d comes into contact with the rear side surface of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 (see FIG. 59 (b)).

FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 59 (a). As shown in FIG. 61, the second rotating member 6452 has the same cross-sectional shape as the first rotating member 6451 except that there is no portion corresponding to the moving block surface 6451d. That is, the second rotating member 6452 has a main body member 6452a formed from a substantially cylindrical shape whose width dimension in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 61) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and substantially 1 of the main body member 6452a. FIG. 61 mainly includes a recessed portion 6452b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at the / 4 peripheral portion and a transmission portion 6452c that is formed so as to project along the peripheral surface at the diagonally front upper portion of the main body member 6452a. In the standby state shown, the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b, so that the game ball backflip to the transmission state (see FIG. 66) due to the weight of the game ball (center of gravity balance).

Similar to the main body member 6451a of the first rotating member 6451, the main body member 6452a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G2 of the second rotating member 6452 is shown in FIG. In the standby state, it is provided in the lower part on the front side of the rotating shaft. In the standby state, when the main body member 6452a is about to fall forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 61 by being supported by the lid member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6452b includes upper and lower side surfaces VS2 and front and rear side surface HS2, similarly to the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS2 are arranged above the rotation axis of the second rotating member 6452, and the distance V2 between the upper and lower side surfaces of the second specific region hole 6442 on the back surface side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the left slide plate 6462L via the game ball. Further, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6452b and the second rotating member 6452 starts to perform a backflip operation, the distance between the upper and lower side surface VS and the back surface side surface of the second specific area hole 6442 is a distance. By narrowing the distance from V2 (that is, the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the second specific region hole 6442, or the game ball already contained in the recessed portion 6452b bounces back. It is possible to prevent the backflip.

Similar to the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451, the transmission portion 6452c includes an arc side surface RS2 that is recessed in the vicinity of the rear end portion in a circular arc shape and extends in the left-right direction, and the arc side surface RS2 is on the left side. It is formed so as to be inclined in a downwardly inclined manner in the transmission state toward (the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 61).

Further, the transmission unit 6452c is configured such that the right end portion interferes with the moving block surface 6451d in the moving locus (see FIG. 59 (b)). Therefore, when the second rotating member 6452 backflip, the transmission unit 6452c pushes the moving block surface 6451d, and the first rotating member 6452 also backflip (FIGS. 64A and 64). See (b)).

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS2 is equivalent to the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS2, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS2 guiding the game ball can be improved.

Next, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62 (a). In addition, in FIG. 62A, FIG. 62B and FIG. 63, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 is shown, and in FIG. 63, the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6451b is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 after the first rotating member 6451 backflip due to the weight of the game ball, the transmission unit 6451c The rear end abuts on the back side of the entrance opening 6440i to stop the rotation in the backflip direction (the back side of the entrance opening 6440i functions as a detent). Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state, the game ball is left on the upper surface of the timed blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front-rear side surface HS1 hit each other in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 6451. Since they are in contact with each other, the first rotating member 6451 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the first rotating member 6451 is stabilized in the transmission state.

Since the game ball on the timed blocking plate 2411 is maintained on the timed blocking plate 2411 until the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the game ball falls, the game ball is in a transmission state depending on the operation control of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420. The maintenance period can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and the other game balls are in the third specific region hole 6443. It can be prevented from falling into.

Since the transmission portion 6451c is arranged below the front end portion (left end portion in FIG. 63) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state, the rolling plate 6412 is rolled to form the third specific region hole 6443. The game ball that reaches the entrance opening 6440i can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c.

As described above, the transmission unit 6451c is configured to incline downward toward the left side (in the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 63) in the transmission state, so that the game ball on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 62 (a), when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c, the game ball is directed toward the second specific region hole 6442 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6451c (FIG. 62 (a). ) Can be rolled (to the left).

Therefore, the transmission unit 6451c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down into the third specific area hole 6443, and the flow direction of the game balls that have flowed down toward the third specific area hole 6443. Can be switched in the flow direction toward the second specific region hole 6442 (or the first specific region hole 6441), which has a higher expected profit than the third specific region hole 6443.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the moving blocking surface 6451d slips below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412, so that the game ball does not come into contact with the moving blocking surface 6451d. The game ball can freely move in the left-right direction above the recessed portion 6412a.

From the state shown in FIG. 63, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is activated and the timed blocking plate 2411 is in an immersive state (a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is pulled out of the third specific basin hole 6443), the game ball falls and the first rotating member 6451 Since the load for stopping the forward rotation operation is released, the first rotating member 6451 performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the transmission state of the second rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LXV-LXV line of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 66 is a second flow-down device in the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of 6400. It should be noted that FIGS. 64 to 66 show the transmission states of the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452, and FIG. 65 shows the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6452b.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the transmission state after the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation due to the weight of the game ball, the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c hits the side surface on the back surface side of the entrance opening 6440i. By contacting, the rotation in the backflip direction is stopped (the side surface on the back side of the entrance opening 6440i functions as a detent). Further, as shown in FIG. 65, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the timed blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front-rear side surface HS2 hit each other in the rotation direction of the second rotating member 6452. Since they are in contact with each other, the second rotating member 6452 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the second rotating member 6452 is stabilized in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIG. 66, the first rotating member 6451 also performs a backflip operation based on the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation. Here, the game ball is not housed in the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, but the rear end portion of the transmitting portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 is on the front side of the moving blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451. (See FIG. 64 (b)), the first rotating member 6451 also performs a backflip operation based on the backflip operation of the second rotating member 6452, and the forward rotation operation of the first rotating member 6451 is prevented. NS. Therefore, based on the fact that the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmission state, the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the entrance opening 6440i of the second specific region hole 6442 is blocked by the transmission portion 6452c, and the other game balls are second specified. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the region hole 6442. In addition, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and other game balls fall into the third specific region hole 6443. It can be prevented from doing so.

Since the transmission unit 6452c is arranged below the front end portion (left end portion in FIG. 65) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the rolling plate 6412 is rolled to the second position. 2 The game ball reaching the entrance opening 6440i of the specific area hole 6442 can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c.

As described above, the transmission unit 6452c is configured to incline downward toward the left side (in the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 65) in the transmission state, so that the game ball on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 65, when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c, the game ball is directed toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6452c (left side in FIG. 64 (a)). Can be rolled (towards).

Therefore, the transmission unit 6452c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down into the second specific area hole 6442, and the flow direction of the game balls that have flowed down toward the second specific area hole 6442. This has the effect of being able to switch in the flow direction toward the first specific region hole 6441, which has a higher expected profit than the second specific region hole 6442.

Further, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmitting state when the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmitting state, the transmission unit 6452c has flowed down toward the third specific region hole 6443 where the expected profit is the smallest. The effect is that the flow direction of the game ball can be switched to the flow direction toward the first specific region hole 6441 where the expected profit is the largest. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the great reversal, and the interest of the player can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the timed blocking plate 2411 becomes an immersive state (a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is pulled out of the second specific basin hole 6442), the game ball falls and the second rotation occurs. Since the load for stopping the forward rotation of the member 6452 is released, the second rotating member 6452 moves forward, and accordingly, the first rotating member 6451 also performs a forward rotation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the operation inside the second flow-down device 6400 when two game balls reach the timed branching region 6410 and head toward the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443, respectively, will be described. ..

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXVIII-LXVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 6400 in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG.

70 and 72 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXVIII-LXVIII line of FIG. 67, and FIGS. 71 and 73 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is a figure. In addition, in FIGS. 67 to 69, two game balls B61 and B62 which flow down the timed branching region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 1 second) are shown in FIG. 70. And FIG. 71 shows a state in which the game ball B61 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and FIGS. 72 and 73 show a transmission state between the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game ball B61 coming into contact with the left slide plate 6462L (see FIG. 68) until the left slide plate 6462L is pushed in completely, and from there, the second rotating member 6452 Is configured in such a manner that 0.4 seconds elapse before the transmission state is reached. That is, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69 (elapsed time t = 0), the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, and FIGS. 72 and 73 show the timing state. , T = 0.5 second timing state is shown.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, a state in which the game ball B62 flows down the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 and the game ball B61 starts to come into contact with the tip end portion of the left slide plate 6462L is shown.

From this state, when the game ball B61 begins to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed outward by the game ball B61 to the outside of the second specific area hole 6442. Based on this, the right slide plate 6462R is projected inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B62 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the time the load is released until the slide plates return to the balanced state. Therefore, the game ball B61 is shown in FIG. 70. The right slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state even after it is further dropped from the indicated state.

When the game ball B61 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 70 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation and enter the transmission state (see FIG. 72). The state shown in FIG. 72 is a state in which the elapsed time is t = 0.5 seconds, and since the right slide plate 6462R is maintained in the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B62 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. It is placed on the outside.

Then, in the process of the backflip operation until the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B62 comes into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 and is pushed up. , The game ball B62 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission unit 64514c.

After that, the game ball B62 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, the flow path of the game ball B62, which had flowed down in the path likely to flow into the third specific region hole 6443 (the hole with the smallest expected profit) until immediately before, is driven by the action of the game ball B61. , The flow path to the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole with the largest expected profit) can be switched. As a result, the player can get a feeling of a big reversal, and the player's interest can be improved.

In FIGS. 74 to 80, a case where two game balls B63 and B64 start to fall into the second specific area hole 6462 and the third specific area hole 6464 at the same time will be described.

74 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74, and FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 6400 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74.

77 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74, and FIGS. 78 and 80 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is a figure.

In addition, in FIGS. 74 to 76, two game balls B63 and B64 which flow down the timed branching region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 0 seconds, that is, at the same time) are shown. 77 and 78 show a state in which the game ball B63 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450 are shown. The transmission state is illustrated.

It should be noted that, based on FIGS. 74 to 76 (elapsed time t = 0), the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, and the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 79 and 80. , T = 0.5 second timing state is shown.

FIG. 75 shows a state in which the game ball B63 has begun to come into contact with the tip of the left slide plate 6462L. Due to the difference in the tip shapes of the slide plates 6462L and 6462R, in this state (the state where the elapsed time t = 0), the game ball B64 arranged at the same height as the game ball B63 is different from the right slide plate 6462R. Not in contact (see FIG. 76).

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed outward from the second specific area hole 6442 based on the further drop of the game ball B63 from the state shown in FIG. 74, and the right slide plate 6462R. Projects inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B64 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the time the load is released until the slide plates return to the balanced state. Therefore, the game ball B63 is shown in FIG. 77. The right slide plate 6462R maintains an overhanging state even after further dropping from the indicated state.

Here, in the process of dropping the game ball B64, the game ball B64 also comes into contact with the tip of the right side slide plate 6462R, but the left side slide plate 6462L and the game ball B63 first come into contact with each other and start to slide, so that the right side slides. Since the tip of the plate 6462R slips under the game ball B64, the load component applied from the game ball B64 to the right slide plate 6462R is larger in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction than in the slide movement direction. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B64 from interfering with the operation of the right slide plate 6462R overhanging.

When the game ball B63 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 77 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation and enter the transmission state (see FIG. 79). The state shown in FIG. 79 is a state in which the elapsed time is t = 0.5 seconds, and since the right slide plate 6462R is maintained in the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B64 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. It is placed on the outside. Then, when the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B64 comes into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 in the process of the backflip operation until the transmission state is reached. The game ball B64 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission unit 64514c by being pushed up.

After that, the game ball B64 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the two game balls B63 and B64 reach the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443 at the same time, the third specific region hole 6443 (expected profit) until immediately before. The flow path of the game ball B64, which was flowing down in the path that is likely to flow into the hole (the smallest hole), is changed to the flow path toward the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole with the largest expected profit) by the action of the game ball B63. You can switch. As a result, it is possible to create an opportunity for a game ball flowing down a route that has not been noticed in the past to be noticed, and the corresponding space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used as a production space. Can get a sense of great reversal, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the right side slide plate 6462R is formed by an inclined surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the left slide plate 6462R may be formed on an inclined surface, and the tip of the right slide plate 6462L may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this case, when the game balls B63 and B64 are simultaneously dropped into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B63 that is about to fall into the second specific area hole 6442 is transmitted to the second rotating member 6452. It will be pushed out to the upper surface of the portion 6452c, and the game ball B63 will head toward the first specific region hole 6441. In this case, since the distance for rolling on the upper surface of the game ball B63 transmission unit 6452c can be shortened as compared with the present embodiment, the game ball B63 can reach the first specific region hole 6441 at an early stage, and a big hit. It is possible to shorten the period until.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the tip of the right slide plate 6464R is intentionally tilted in order to direct the game ball B64 toward the third specific area hole 6443 toward the first specific area hole 6441. ing. With the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to change from the situation where the minimum profit can be obtained from the game ball B64 to the situation where the maximum profit can be obtained by the flow of the game ball B64. As a result, the player can be imbued with the feeling that the game ball B64 heading for the third specific area 6443 cannot be ignored, and the attention of the route toward the third specific area 6443, which is usually neglected, is improved. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the entire timed branching region 6410 of the second flow device 6400.

That is, regardless of which tip of the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L is formed on the inclined surface, if two game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410 at short intervals, at least one of the game balls However, it passes through the first special area switch 2441a, which has the greatest profit given to the player. Therefore, the profit given to the player can be maximized while maintaining the effect that the profit given to the player is larger for the later game ball, which improves the interest of the player. It is possible to achieve both the effect (effect that does not get tired, fanning) and the effect that maximizes the substantial profit (number of balls).

81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the second flow device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. In addition, in FIGS. 81 and 82, two game balls B65 and B66 flowing down inside the second flow-down device 6400 are shown in chronological order, and the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the limiting device 6470 has a rotation axis at the rear end of the timed branching region 6410, and the game balls B65 and B66 are directed toward the third specific region hole 6443 in the post-operation state. It is provided with a partition rod 6471 to be flowed down.

The partition rod 6471 is arranged so as to come into contact with the game ball at the height of the center position of the games B65 and B66 that roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B65 and B66 that are in contact with the partition rod 6471 from overcoming the partition rod 6471 and moving to the left.

The flow-down mode of the game balls B65 and B66 that flow down inside the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 will be described.

In FIG. 81, the first rotating member 6451 is in the standby state. In this case, as described above, the size of the gap between the partition rod 6471 of the limiting device 6470 and the moving block surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451 is set to be equal to or smaller than the size of the game ball. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the game ball B65 does not go to the left side of the partition rod 6471, is fixed to the right side of the partition rod 6471, and flows down toward the third specific region hole 6443.

Therefore, in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, when a single game ball flows down to the second flow-down device 6400, it is possible to form a state in which the ball always falls into the third specific region hole 6443. As a result, for example, in a jackpot state in which a single gaming ball enters the second flow-down device 6400 while improving the probability of entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2) by a time-saving game, a jackpot is achieved. By unifying the ball output to the ball output (minimum ball output) obtained by dropping the game ball into the third specific area hole 6443, it is easy to continue the short-time game, but one big hit ball is released. It is possible to configure a suppressed gaming machine. As a result, it is not necessary to have so many balls, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the player's intention to continue playing a game for a long time after a big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has fallen through the third specific area hole 6443 passes through the time saving switch 190d, the time saving game is promised again by winning the jackpot during the time saving game. It becomes. As a result, the player can continuously enjoy the jackpot game and the time-saving game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

On the other hand, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, the first game ball B65 rotates the first rotating member 6451 as shown in FIG. 82. The second game ball B66 rolls the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 toward the second specific region hole 6442 or the first specific region hole 6441. That is, in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, by inserting a plurality of game balls into the second flow-down device 6400, a large number of balls can be obtained in the jackpot game, so that the second flow-down device 6400 can be used. There is a real benefit to having multiple game balls enter. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform a game in which the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted in order to allow the player to enter the plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when two game balls are collectively inserted into the second flow-down device 6400, the profit increasing device 6450 operates to acquire the game ball through the specific region hole 6440 into which the game ball has flowed. It is possible to forcibly increase the profit that can be obtained by the specific region hole 6440 into which the later game ball has flowed. As a result, the flow path of the later game ball can be changed by the action of the earlier game ball, so that the attention to the movement of the game ball can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the later game ball does not have a smaller profit than the earlier game ball, it is possible to see which specific area hole 6440 the later game ball flows into with more peace of mind than usual. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first game ball that has flowed into the second flow-down device 6400 can be configured to surely flow down into the third specific region hole 6443, it is combined with another action while suppressing the ball ejection. (In this embodiment, it is combined with the acquisition of a shorter time), so that the range of playability can be expanded.

Next, the second flow-down device 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball flows down by its own weight and is distributed to the specific region holes 441 to 443 has been described, but the second flow-down device 7440 in the seventh embodiment provides a driving force for moving the game ball. A game ball driving device 7450 that is generated is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the rolling floor device 7410. Note that FIG. 83 shows a game ball that flows down the first branch guidance flow path R1 and starts flowing into the game ball drive device 7450. Further, FIG. 84 corresponds to a state in which the game ball driving device 7450 and the like are removed from FIG. 83.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the second flow-down device 7400 rolls a rolling floor device 7410 that allows a game ball to pass on the upper surface side and extends in the left-right direction, and the rolling floor device 7410. A pair of annular rotary distribution devices 7420 formed from a translucent resin material that distributes game balls, a drive device 7430 that generates rotational driving force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and a rolling floor device 7410. A plurality of specific region holes 7440 in which game balls distributed to the rotary distribution device 7420 can flow down, and the rotary shafts are arranged in such a manner that the axial direction is along the extension direction of the rolling floor device 7410. Mainly includes a game ball driving device 7450 and the like.

The rolling floor device 7410 includes a first branch guide flow path R1, left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R that rotatably support the rotary distribution device 7420, and a tilting floor 7412 that can be tilted by the weight of the game ball. A slanted flow path 7413 in which the game ball that has passed the left support pillar 7411L rolls to the left and inclines downward to the left, a pair of support holes 7414 that support the game ball drive device 7450, and a drive device 7430. A motor support hole 7415 that supports the motor 7431, and an inflow sensor 7416 that is a sensor that detects a game ball immediately before flowing into the screw member 7453 from the first branch guide flow path R1 and is arranged below the support hole 7414. Mainly prepared.

The left support pillar 7411L is composed of a main pillar 7411a extending in the vertical direction and having a T-shaped pillar shape, and a branch pillar 7411b extending in the front-rear direction in a symmetrical shape at the upper end of the main pillar 7411a. Mainly includes a collar 7411c composed of a rotatable ring-shaped member projecting from the upper surface of the branch column 7411b.

The main pillar 7411a is arranged on the side facing the second specific area hole 7442 and the tilted floor 7412, which are bored along the vertical direction, and the tilted floor 7412 supports the tilted floor 7412 so that the tilted floor 7412 can tilt in the vertical direction. Mainly includes a bearing portion 7411a1 and a bearing portion 7411a1.

The upper surface of the branch column 7411b is recessed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation distribution device 7420, and the rotation distribution device 7420 is rotatably supported (fitted) in the recessed portion. A plurality of collars 7411c are arranged near the front and rear ends of the branch column 7411b, and the allowance from the upper surface of the branch column toward the rotation axis side of the rotation distribution device 7420 is constant. As a result, the rotary distribution device 7420 can rotate in a state of being in contact with the plurality of collars 7411c, and it is possible to prevent the rotary distribution device 7420 from rubbing against the branch column 7411b and being worn due to rotation. Durability can be improved.

The right support column 7411R is provided with a third specific area hole 7443 instead of the second specific area hole 7442, and an overhang member 7411h overhanging the inside of the hole by the operation of the tilted floor 7412. Has the same configuration as the left support column 7411L, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The inclined floor 7412 is supported by the bearing portion 7411a1 and can change its state between an upward state in which the game ball is not mounted and a downward state in which the game ball is tilted, and the upper surface is the game ball drive device 7450. It is recessed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of. The distance between the recessed portion on the upper surface and the cylindrical portion 7453a of the game ball driving device 7450 is arranged so as to be longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll on the concave portion on the upper surface while swinging in the front-rear direction (circumferential direction of the arc).

The inclined flow path 7413 is an inclined flow path that guides the game ball that has reached the left side of the left support column 7411L to the first specific area hole 7441, and is a side support column in which the first specific area hole 7441 is bored. 7413a is provided.

In the present embodiment, the side support columns 7413a and the left and right support columns 7411R and 7411L having the specific region holes 7440 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to easily form a configuration in which the timed blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) blocks the flow of the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the time blocking plate 2411 described above in the second embodiment is arranged at a position where the inner diameter of each specific region hole 7440 is narrowed (see FIG. 85 (a)). As a result, the benefit given to the player when a plurality of game balls enter different specific area holes 7440 due to the difference in height of the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a of the present embodiment. The game ball can be passed through the higher switch first. Therefore, since the player can win the jackpot with the higher profit, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Further, the timed blocking plate 2411 is arranged at a position where only one game ball can be accommodated in the specific area hole 7440 and the second and subsequent game balls are not stored (depth corresponding to the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, since only a single game ball is accommodated in the single specific area hole 7440, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 7400, the player can use the second specific area. It is possible to obtain a jackpot of 7 rounds or more that can be obtained by passing the game ball through the switch 2442a.

The rotary distribution device 7420 is a device composed of a ring-shaped rotating member fitted on the upper surfaces of the left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R, and is a first ring fitted on the upper surface of the left support column 7411L. A member 7421 and a second ring member 7422 fitted to the upper surface of the right support column 7411R are mainly provided.

The first annular member 7421 has a main body portion 7421a formed in a cylindrical shape, a plurality of openings 7421b opened by removing a wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7421a, and an opening portion 7421b thereof. The concave fitting portion 7421c in which the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 7421a is recessed toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction from the central portion in the width direction in which the is opened, and the concave fitting portion 7421c outside the concave fitting portion 7421c in the width direction. 7421d, which is formed over the circumference of the gear, is mainly provided.

In the first annular member 7421, the curved surface of the main body 7421a and the opening of the opening 7421b are alternately arranged at the lower portion by the rotational operation of the driving device 7430. As a result, when the game ball is allowed to flow down into the second specific area hole 7442 opened in the left support pillar 7411L (a part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442), the game ball A part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442 and the case where the main body 7421a closes the second specific area hole 7442 when the second specific area hole 7442 does not flow down and passes to the left. If) and can be formed.

The opening 7421b is composed of a pair of opening portions that are opened to a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and openings that are drilled over 90 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees. That is, every time the first annular member 7421 rotates 90 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation axis is replaced by the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. The side surface surrounding the opening 7421b is formed so as to face the inner peripheral side (chamfer the corner portion on the outer peripheral side). As a result, the degree of deceleration when the game ball abuts (is caught) on the side surface of the opening 7421b can be reduced.

The recessed fitting portion 7421c is a portion formed according to the arrangement of the collar 7411c of the rolling floor device 7410. Since the first annular member 7421 rotates in a state where the collar 7411c is in contact with the recessed fitting portion 7421c, the collar 7411c is arranged so as to be in contact with the main body portion 7421a in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the collar 7411c and the main body portion 7421a come into contact with each other in the left-right direction (rotational axis direction), the positional deviation of the first annular member 7421 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

The gear 7421d serves as a transmission portion that meshes with the first gear 7432 of the drive device 7430. In the present embodiment, since the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 are rotated by the same drive motor 7431 with the same gear ratio, the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 are rotated. The rotation speed, the timing of the start of rotation, and the timing of the end of rotation are the same.

Similar to the first ring member 7421, the second ring member 7422 is opened by removing the wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7422a formed in a cylindrical shape and the main body portion 7422a. 7422b, a concave fitting portion 7422c in which the outer peripheral surface is recessed in the main body portion 7422a toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction from the central portion in the width direction in which the opening 7422b is opened, and the concave portion thereof. It mainly includes a gear 7422d formed over the circumference on the outer side in the width direction from the fitting portion 7422c, and unlike the first ring member 7421, at the boundary portion between the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. A plurality of convex portions 7422e that are convexly provided on the inner peripheral side are mainly provided.

Since the configurations of the recessed fitting portion 7422c and the gear 7422d are the same as those of the recessed fitting portion 7421c and the gear 7421d of the first annular member 7421, the description thereof will be omitted.

The opening 7422b is composed of three opening portions that are opened to a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and openings that are drilled over 60 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. That is, every time the second ring member 7422 rotates 60 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation axis is replaced by the main body portion 7422a and the opening portion 7422b. Unlike the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421, the side surface surrounding the opening 7422b is formed perpendicular to the circumference.

The convex portion 7422e is a portion that is projected in a strip shape in the left-right direction to move the game ball in the rotational direction when the game ball rolls on the main body portion 7422a, and is an opening adjacent to the entrance. The opposite side surface of the portion 7422b is formed by an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b. In the present embodiment, of the boundary between the main body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b, the convex portion 7422e is arranged at the boundary between the two openings 7422b and is convex at the boundary with one opening 7422b. The setting portion 7422e is not arranged.

The drive device 7430 is a device that generates a rotational drive force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and is supported by a drive motor 7431 in a state where the rotary shaft is inserted through the motor support hole 7412, and the rotary shaft of the drive motor 7431. The first gear 7432 that is fixed and meshed with the first ring member 7421 and the first gear 7432 are coaxially fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 7431 and meshed with the second ring member 7432. The second gear 7433 and the like are mainly provided.

In the present embodiment, the first gear 7432 and the second gear 7433 are composed of gears having the same shape, and the gears 7421d and 7422d of the rotary distribution device 7420 are composed of gears having the same shape. The gear ratios of the annulus member 7421 and the second annulus member 7422 are the same.

The specific area hole 7440 is formed inside the first specific area hole 7441 arranged inside the side support column 7413a, the second specific area hole 7442 arranged inside the left support column 7411L, and the right support column 7411R. It mainly includes a third specific region hole 7443 to be arranged.

The first specific area hole 7441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to a first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and a first specific area switch 2441a is arranged inside. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first specific area hole 7441 and the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 7442 and the third specific area hole 7443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 7441, and the second specific area hole 7442 puts a game ball in the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and is different in that the third specific area hole 7443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot. That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the second specific area hole 7442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the third specific area hole 7443.

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 7442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 7443, and passes through the third specific area. The game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

By projecting the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) above the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch 2442a, and the third specific area switch 2443a in the overhanging state, in the overhanging state. It is possible to prevent (delay) the game ball from flowing down the specific region holes 7441, 7442, 7443.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific region holes 7441 to 7443 to the specific region switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 7441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 7443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a. H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

As a result, when the game ball falls from the vicinity of the upper end of each specific area hole 7441 to 7443 at the same timing, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having a distance H1 to H3 are effectively detected. Can win jackpots with more rounds.

The game ball drive device 7450 is rotatably supported by a drive motor 7451 held in a state where a rotation shaft is inserted through a pair of support holes 7414 and a pair of support holes 7414 as a rotation shaft of the drive motor 7451. It mainly includes a cylindrical shaft rod member 7452 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 7451 and a spiral screw member 7453 that is integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452.

The screw member 7453 is a member integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452, and is formed in a state in which a thin plate is spirally wound along the cylindrical cylindrical portion 7453a and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 7453a. Mainly includes a spiral plate portion 7453b.

The diameter of the cylindrical portion 7453a is formed so that the distance between the rotary distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed between the rotary distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 and the cylindrical portion 7453a.

In the spiral plate portion 7453b, the distance between adjacent thin plates in the left-right direction is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is accommodated between adjacent plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b, and can move to the left based on the rotation of the screw member 7453. In this embodiment, the distance between adjacent plates is designed to be 25 mm.

The horizontal width of each of the support columns 7411L and 7411R is 20 mm, and the specific region holes 7442 and 7443 are arranged at the center positions of the support columns 7411L and 7411R in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 101 (a)). ).

Further, the diameter of the spiral plate portion 7453b in the axial direction is set to be equal to or smaller than the inner diameter of the locus of the convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422. This prevents the rotary distribution device 7420 and the screw member 7453 from interfering with each other.

In the present embodiment, the spiral plate portion 7453b is formed as a left-handed screw with the right end portion as a base point. Therefore, the game ball can be moved to the left by rotating the screw member 7453 clockwise while visually recognizing the right end (right side view). In the present embodiment, the screw member 7453 is rotationally driven in a constant driving mode in which the accommodated game ball is moved to the left at a speed of 10 mm (V = 10 mm / s) per second from the time when the power is turned on.

The phase relationship between the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The phase relationship described below is merely an example, and the phase relationship between the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 is not limited to this.

85 (a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 7400, and FIG. 85 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annulus member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that in FIG. 85A, the drive device 7430 is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the opening 7421b of the first ring member 7421 is a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the first ring member 7421 in the upper front side (FIG. 85 (b)). The boundary between the main body 7422a and the opening 7422b of the second annulus member 7422 is on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the second annulus member 7422 when it is housed in the area (upper left) of the area separated by the horizon and the horizon. It is composed of the phase relations arranged in. The state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) will be described as an initial state of the rotary sorting device 7420.

The annulus members 7421 and 7422 are rotationally driven at a speed of 60 degrees per second (10 rpm) counterclockwise in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c). Further, the timing of starting the drive is controlled when the game ball wins the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and is stopped and controlled after being rotationally driven for several seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the drive triggers of the screw member 7453 and the ring members 7421 and 7422 are different, it can be difficult for the player to predict the operation pattern, and each ring member 7421 can be difficult to predict. , 7422 It is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being biased by the so-called timing hitting in which the game ball is launched by determining the posture.

In the present embodiment, the main body portions 7421a and 7421b (excluding the gears 7421b and 7422b) of the ring members 7421 and 7422 have a width dimension of 20 mm, and the openings 7421b and 7422b have a width direction dimension of 12 mm, respectively. It is placed in the center in the width direction. Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, the inside of the openings 7421b and 7422b is at the timing when the game ball pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the openings 7421b and 7422b. If the specific region holes 7442 and 7443 corresponding to the above are not arranged (if they do not fit perfectly), the game ball will pass to the left.

Further, the distance between the main bodies 7421a and 7422a of the ring members 7421 and 7422 (ignoring the gear 7422) is set to 30 mm.

Therefore, after the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball can fall into the third specific area hole 7443 (center position in the width direction of the first annulus member 7421), the second specific area hole 7442 can fall (second annulus). The moving distance until the member 7422 is arranged at the center position in the width direction) is defined as 50 mm. That is, the game ball reaches the center position of the second specific area hole 7442 about 5 seconds after passing through the center position of the third specific area hole 7443, and during this time, the ring members 7421 and 7422 are 300 degrees ( It is rotated by an angle of (300 degrees counterclockwise) in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) (that is, it is the same as the state of being rotated 60 degrees clockwise).

Next, the operation of the second ring member 7422 will be described. The second annulus member 7422 is a member that distributes whether the game ball is dropped into the third specific region hole 7443 or flows down to the left without dropping into the third specific region hole 7443, and the game ball is left. It is configured so that a plurality of modes of flowing down toward the direction can be formed.

86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 86 (a) shows a state of being rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a state of being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 86 (a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 86 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 86 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball falls into the third specific region hole 7443. do.

87 (a) and 87 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 87 (a) shows a state of being rotated 330 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 87 (b) shows a state of being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 87 (a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 87 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 shown in FIG. 87 (b). The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball has the third specific region hole 7443. It does not fall to, but passes to the left side in FIG. 85 (a) (inward direction in FIG. 87 (b), toward the second specific region hole 7442 side). At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second ring member 7422, the game ball passes in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the second ring member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, the screw member 7453 passes through the tilted floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

88 (a) and 88 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). In addition, in FIG. 88 (a), the state of the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 87 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 88 (b), it is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second ring member 7422 in FIG. 87 (b) reaches the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 88 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 88 (b), since the opening 7421b is arranged below the game ball, the game ball passes through the opening 7421b and falls into the second specific region hole 7442.

A case where the game ball flows into the rotary distribution device 7420 at different timings will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

89 (a) and 89 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 89 (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. 89 (b) shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a). That is, FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422 shown in FIG. 89 (b). The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the end portion of the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball is specified as the third. It does not fall into the region hole 7443, but passes to the left side in FIG. 85 (a) (in the back direction in FIG. 87 (b), in the direction toward the second specific region hole 7442). The opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball by rotating the second annulus member 7422 counterclockwise by 30 degrees (0.5 seconds) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (b). , The center position of the game ball is moved by 5 mm from the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 (the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453), and the game ball and the third specific area hole 7443 Since the position is shifted, the game ball does not fall into the third specific region hole 7443 and moves to the left in FIG. 85 (a).

At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second ring member 7422, the game ball passes in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the second ring member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, the screw member 7453 passes through the tilted floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

90 (a) and 90 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 90 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 89 (b), and FIG. 90 (b) shows a state rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second ring member 7422 in FIG. 89 (b) reaches the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 90 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 90 (b), since the end of the main body 7421a is arranged below the game ball, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the left side of FIG. 85 (a) (FIG. 90 (b) Downward direction, first specific area hole 7441 side).

In this way, the first annular member 7421 determines whether or not the member falls into the second specific region hole 7442. A slight difference in the timing at which the game ball flows into the rotary distribution device 7420 (for example, a difference of 0.5 seconds) can make it possible to make a difference in which specific region hole 7441 to 7443 the game ball falls into. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game ball passing through the rotary distribution device 7420 can be improved.

Up to this point, the case where the game ball flows down the lowermost portion of the second annulus member 7422 when passing through the second annulus member 7422 has been described. Next, a case where the second ring member 7422 is lifted from the lowermost part and passes through the second ring member 7422 will be described.

91 (a) and 91 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXXVc line of FIG. 85, and FIG. 91 (c) is a direction view of the arrow XCIc of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial internal view of the 2nd ring member 7422 in the above. Note that FIG. 91 (a) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 91 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a). Is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 91 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I9 (a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 91 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). From here, the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 91 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the convex portion 7422e is formed in the vicinity of the entrance with the side surface on the opposite side of the adjacent opening 7422b formed by an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b, for example. When the game ball flows into the second ring member 7422 in a state of being in contact with the end of the convex portion 7422e, the game ball is placed on the opposite side of the opening 7422b (the side where the wall portion of the main body 7422a is located). It can be made easier to guide.

As a result, the second annulus member cannot be immediately determined at the timing at which the game ball abuts on the end of the convex portion 7422e (whether the game ball swings at the main body 7422a or the opening 7422b). When the ball flows into the 7422, it is possible to easily roll the game ball in a direction in which the player has a large profit.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the convex portion 7422e is not merely the timing of distribution in which the game ball falls into the third specific region hole 7443 with a probability of 1/2, but the second ring member 7422. Can be produced as a timing of a large chance that the game ball easily passes to the second specific area hole 7442 side. As a result, it is possible to increase the timing for enhancing the interest of the player.

FIG. 92 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 in the direction of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). In FIG. 92, an example of the path of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is shown by a curved line. Further, the period t until the game ball passes is shown with reference to the end portion of the tilted floor 7412 on the second ring member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), the game ball switches the downward direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction about every second. It flows down while swaying in the mode (illustrated by the arrow in the figure). Therefore, as shown at the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball and the second specific area hole 7442 are displaced, so that the second specific area hole is formed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling on the 7442.

93 (a) and 93 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), and FIG. 93 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 93 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 91 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in the top view. The game ball can fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged in.

When the game ball passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost always falls into the second specific region hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b). As described above in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swayed in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the game ball does not fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the game ball views the first ring member 7421 in FIG. 85 (b). a) A state of passing to the left side (FIG. 93 (b) in the back direction, in the inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) can be configured (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 93 (b)).

Therefore, if the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased. Power can be improved.

Further, FIG. 92 shows an example of how the game ball flows down. For example, when the game ball is caught on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, and the degree of convergence is increased, the game ball is regarded as a game ball. In some cases, the position with the second specific region hole 7442 is aligned.

Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from the same height of the second annulus member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball is not always the same. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of expectation when the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (the degree of expectation that it may pass through the first annulus member 7421 to the left), the flow of the game ball flows down. It can be made to watch over the aspect to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball flowing down the second flow-down device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second flow-down device 7400 itself can be improved.

94 (a) and 94 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state of being rotated 150 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 94 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Is illustrated, and the game ball P75 rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 94 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a).

As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 94 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball P75 is lifted (up to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P75 is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P75 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

FIG. 95 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 in the direction of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). In FIG. 95, an example of the path of the game ball P75 flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is shown by a curved line. Further, the period t until the game ball P75 passes is shown with reference to the end portion of the tilted floor 7412 on the second ring member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 94 (b), the game ball moves downward in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 approximately every 1.2 seconds. It flows down while shaking in the mode of switching to (indicated by the arrow in the figure). Since the swing width is larger than that shown in FIG. 92, the switching interval is long. Also in this example, as shown at the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball P75 passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are displaced. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the second specific area hole 7442.

Here, in FIG. 92, the game ball P75 is arranged at a position where the direction of swing is switched (a position away from the second specific region hole 7442) at a position near the period t = 4, whereas in FIG. 95, it is arranged. At the position of the period t = 4, the game ball P75 is arranged closer to the second specific region hole 7442 than the position where the direction of shaking is switched.

That is, by changing the swinging method of the game ball P75 to the swinging method of the game ball P74, it is possible to increase the types of effects by the movement of the game ball, and the game ball and the second specific area at the position of the period t = 4. By changing the degree of misalignment with the hole 7442, the probability of whether or not the game ball P75 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 can be changed, so that the attention of the game ball can be improved. ..

96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 94 (b), and FIG. 96 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 96 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), and the game ball P75 shown in FIG. 94 (b) is the first ring. The state at the timing when the member 7421 is arranged at the center position in the width direction is shown.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in the top view. The game ball P75 can fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged in.

When the game ball P75 passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost always falls into the second specific region hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 96 (b). As described above in FIG. 95, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swayed in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in a manner in which the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 96 (b), the game ball P75 does not fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the game ball P75 shows the first ring member 7421. It is possible to configure a state in which the ball passes to the left side of 85 (a) (the back side direction of FIG. 96 (b) and the inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 96 (b)). ..

Therefore, if the game ball P75 sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased. You can improve your attention.

Further, FIG. 95 shows an example of how the game ball P75 flows down. For example, when the game ball P75 is caught on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, and the degree of convergence is increased, the game is played. In some cases, the sphere P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are aligned with each other.

Therefore, even if the game ball P75 flows down from the same height of the second ring member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball P75 is always the same. Since it is not limited, the game ball is maintained while maintaining the expectation that the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (the expectation that it may pass through the first annulus member 7421 to the left). It is possible to make the flow of P75 watch over to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball P75 flowing down the second flow-down device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second flow-down device 7400 itself can be improved.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state of being rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 97 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 97 (a). Is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 97B corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I15 (a).

As shown in FIG. 97, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 97 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). From here, the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 97 (b), and FIG. 98 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 98 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 98 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a covers above the second specific region hole 7442. Since it is arranged in the embodiment, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442.

In FIGS. 97 and 98, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 91 (b)), the tilted floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as the mode described with reference to FIG. 92.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 93, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state of being arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, the second ring member 7421 is second. It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413.

That is, even if the flow mode of the game ball that flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. Can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 is the most. Even if the game ball has settled down at the bottom, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annulus member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 side until the end ( It can be obscured (until the game ball passes through the first annulus member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the posture of the first ring member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. ..

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the convex portions 7422e of the second ring member 7422 the game ball is lifted, so that the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the posture of the first ring member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the ring member 7421.

In the present embodiment, all three openings 7422b are configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is filled with one color or is the same regardless of the phase. By forming from a striped pattern that can be visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which of the pair of convex portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

99 (a) and 99 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 99 (a) shows a state of being rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 99 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a). Is illustrated, and the game ball P76 that rolls on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 99 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a).

As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 99 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball P76 is lifted (up to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P76 is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 99 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P76 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

100 (a) and 100 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 100 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 99 (b), and FIG. 100 (b) shows a state rotated by 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 100 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 100 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a is partially above the second specific region hole 7442. The game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged so as to cover the target.

In FIGS. 99 and 100, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b)), the tilted floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as the mode described with reference to FIG. 95.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 95, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state of being arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, the second ring member 7421 is second. It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413.

That is, even if the flow mode of the game ball that flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. Can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 is the most. Even if the game ball has settled down at the bottom, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annulus member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 side until the end ( It can be obscured (until the game ball passes through the first annulus member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the posture of the first ring member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. ..

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the convex portions 7422e of the second ring member 7422 the game ball is lifted, so that the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the posture of the first ring member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the ring member 7421.

In the present embodiment, all three openings 7422b are configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is filled with one color or is the same regardless of the phase. By forming from a striped pattern that can be visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which of the pair of convex portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 100, the maximum amplitude of the pattern of the flow mode of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 swings along the circumferential direction of the arc on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412. It can be formed as at least two different types of flow mode, and if the distribution probability of whether or not the first annular member 7421 is passed to the inclined flow path 7413 side is significantly different while maintaining each flow mode. It can be configured in such a manner.

That is, the game ball is the second ring member 7422 without changing the operation control of the rotary distribution device 7420 while maintaining the flow mode of the game ball that sways on the tilted floor 7412 after being lifted by the convex portion 7422e. It is possible to configure a state in which the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side depending on the timing of flowing into the first annular member 7421.

In the present embodiment, the inflow sensor 7416 (see FIG. 84) detects the timing at which the game ball flows into the screw member 7453. Therefore, from the phase of the first annular member 7421 at that timing, which specific region hole the game ball is in. It is possible to recognize whether or not the screw member 7453 has flowed into the screw member 7453 at the timing of falling to the 7441 to 7443, which can be used for the effect control.

For example, when it is the timing when it is confirmed that the game ball falls into the first specific area hole 7441, the game ball is between the spiral plates of the screw member 7453 with a flashy effect indicating that the maximum profit has been obtained. It can be performed as a look-ahead effect from the inside of the house. That is, by pre-reading the difference in profit that will be obtained depending on the flow mode of the game ball by control and giving a difference in the intensity of the effect when the game ball flows down to the second flow device 7400, the effect can be produced. It is not just a lively event, but can be given a role that is directly linked to the interests of the player.

As a result, when the flow mode of the game ball is the same (for example, in the case of the flow mode shown in FIG. 92), whether or not the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side from the player's point of view. I don't know, but on the control side, it can be recognized that most of the passage passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side (for example, see the above description in FIG. 98).

Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to prevent the flow-down mode of the game ball and the effect from being linked one-to-one, and when the flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as usual, another effect is performed. However, it is possible to prevent it from being determined to be a lively production (so-called "gase production"). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the game ball.

101 (a) and 101 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 7400 on the CIa-CIa line of FIG. 85 (b). In addition, in FIG. 101 (a), the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and in FIG. 101 (b), the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state. Further, FIG. 101 (a) shows a game ball P78 located at the left end position OUT of the second annulus member 7422 and a game ball P79 located at the right end position IN, and FIG. 101 (b) shows. The state after about 0.5 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the game ball P78 is not on the tilted floor 7412, the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and the overhanging member 7411h is arranged outside the inner surface of the third specific region hole 7443. NS. In this state, the game ball P79 can fall into the third specific region hole 7443.

When 0.5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left by about 5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the game ball on the left side. P78 rides on the tilted floor 7412, and the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state due to the weight of the game ball P78.

In this state, since the overhanging member 7411h projects inward of the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443, the opening of the third specific area hole 7443 can be narrowed, so that the game ball P79 is the third specific area hole. It is possible to prevent the 7443 from falling.

Therefore, when the game ball P78 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 first passes through the second ring member 7422 to the left (toward the second specific region hole 7442 side), the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later. However, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling into the third specific region hole 7443, which obtains a profit smaller than the profit obtained by the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. As a result, when two game balls P78 and P79 flow into the second flow-down device 7400, the game ball P79 that has flowed in later can obtain a profit that is greater than the profit that can be obtained by the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. Therefore, after the flow path through which the previous game ball P78 passes is determined, it is possible to further improve the attention to the later game ball P79.

Further, since the game ball P78 stays on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 for about 3 seconds, the tilted floor 7412 returns to the upward state before the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later passes through the second annulus member 7422. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, in order to achieve the above effect, the distance between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b of the screw member 7453 is set to be 20 mm or more apart (in the present embodiment, the distance is about 25 mm). NS). As a result, it is possible to prevent the later game ball P79 from falling into the third specific region hole 7443 before the overhanging operation of the overhanging member 7411h.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b is about 25 mm, so that when the two game balls reach the third specific region hole 7443, the interval is 2.5 seconds (the second). The two ring members 7422 pass through the center position of the second ring member 7422 at intervals of 150 degrees rotation). Therefore, due to the structure of the second ring member 7422 (because the opening of the opening 7422b is arranged 180 degrees opposite to the wall of the main body 7422a), when one game ball falls into the opening, the other game The ball is easy to get on the wall.

Therefore, even if the timed blocking plate 2411 is not provided, at least one of the game balls can be easily sent to the left of the second ring member 7422.

Further, when the two game balls both ride on the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the arrangement of the convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 (arrangement every 120 degrees, one place). (From the omission of arrangement in the above), at least one of the game balls can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422. For example, when the game ball after the spiral plate portion 7453b is sandwiched behind the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) and flows into the second annulus member 7422, FIG. 72 (a) ), When the second ring member 7422 is rotated by 150 degrees (2.5 seconds) (see FIG. 91 (a)), the later game ball flows into the second ring member 7422.

In this case, the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) does not come into contact with the convex portion 7422e and does not swing in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422, but the game shown in FIG. 91 (a). The sphere P74 comes into contact with the convex portion 7422e and moves between the second ring member 7422 and the first ring member 7421 while swinging in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 92 (b)). Therefore, a plurality of game balls are continuously flowed into the screw member 7453 (driven by the operation of the screw member 7453 with one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b sandwiched between them), so that at least one game ball is used. Can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two game balls are collectively inserted into the second flow-down device 7400, and the game balls are formed by the action of the rotary distribution device 7420 and the game ball drive device 7450 and the game balls. Is configured to pass through the second ring member 7421 to the left. That is, the player can obtain a more profitable jackpot (7-round jackpot, 16-round jackpot).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process up to the acquisition of the jackpot, a case where the game ball is operated in the circumferential direction of the second annulus member 7422 and a case where the game ball is not operated are randomly formed, depending on which case is used. Since the distribution (probability) of the profits that can be obtained changes, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the flow locus of the game ball is the same, it is possible to form a pattern that can be any jackpot (7 round jackpot, 16 round jackpot) in each flow locus. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game ball regardless of the flow-down trajectory of the game ball that has passed through the second annulus member 7422 to the left.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 130. In the first control example, since the electrical configuration is configured by the block diagram described above in FIG. 4, FIG. 4 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example, and FIG. 103 (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the first control example, FIG. 103. (B) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 104 (a) schematically shows the contents of the first per random counter in the first control example. FIG. 104 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the first special symbol, and is FIG. 104. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol, and FIG. 104 (d) is the first control. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the example and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

The main control device 110 performs the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown). Run. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, and the like. Used in.

For the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the first winning type used for selecting the winning type of the special symbol are used. The counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for the above is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, which are composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the middle starting winning opening 28 are provided, and each of these areas has a left starting winning opening 26 and a right starting winning opening 27 or a middle starting winning opening. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the mouth 28. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 102. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is left-started winning opening 26 and right-starting winning opening 27 or middle-starting winning opening 28. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the prize. The value of the random number that is the hit of the special symbol is set by the first hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the first. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table, it is determined that the hit is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a of the special symbol is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and any of "0 to 399". If so, it is determined that it is a small hit (small hit probability = 1/1).

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a small hit, and one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to be added and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order. However, in the present embodiment, since the small hit probability is 1, it is not displayed in the out-of-order display mode.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the small hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 104 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for non-time saving time (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), time saving time (period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and period in which the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0). ) Is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the non-time saving time and the time saving time.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 102, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Winning number counter 203j, Operation counter 203k, Stay counter 203l, Notification counter 203m, Remaining ball timer flag 203n, Remaining ball timer 203o, Discharge number counter 203s, It has a time saving medium counter 203t, a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit medium flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit medium flag 203w2, a V inlet passing flag 203x1, a V flag 203x2, and other memory areas 203z.

As shown in FIG. 102, the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has , Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the prize in the middle start winning opening 28 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of balls (starting winning) to the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. , 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 110).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 110 and FIG. 112 in FIG. 112). See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored by winning a prize in the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device up to four times based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c). S703: No) in FIG. 114.

The winning number counter 203j is the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball-entry accessory device 190. It is a counter for counting the number). Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) provided in the movable ball entry accessory device 190. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of ejected (value of the ejection number counter 203s) of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 match. (S1267 in FIG. 123) is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the large opening solenoid 209a is set to be on (excitation).

The retention counter 203l includes the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. It is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the embodiment is set to be on (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the retention counter 203l is subjected to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, second embodiment and sixth) based on the game ball passing through the fixed region hole switch 340a (see FIG. 5). A counter value corresponding to 12 seconds in the embodiment and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set (S724 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, in the process of S1322 of the small hit end process (FIG. 125, S1312) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one.

Further, based on the fact that the value of the retention counter 203l is determined to be 0 (S1323: Yes in FIG. 125), the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described above in the first embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 40) and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are set to off (see FIG. 23). The retention counter 203l is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the retention counter 203l and controlling the device such as the retention solenoid 413 to prevent the flow of the game balls, the winning of the specific area hole 440 depends on the number of the game balls winning the fixed area hole 340. Can be controlled. That is, it is possible to prevent all the game balls from passing through the third specific region hole 443 (the specific region hole having the specific region switch having the smallest profit given to the player).

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, sound and lighting effects) for attracting the attention of the player. In this embodiment, one second corresponds to the timing at which the game ball passes through each of the starting winning openings 26 to 28 and the end timing of the 15th round (10 balls are won in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is set. The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the notification process of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-mentioned processing for outputting the sound and lighting.

With this configuration, the player may be aware that the timing at which the game ball can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is approaching, or that the end of the jackpot game is approaching. Since the movable ball accessory device 190 can be set, the game ball is not fired at the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at the timing when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened, or the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is completed even though the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to reduce wasted balls caused by continuing to fire at.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is set from the open state to the closed state at the timing of the end of one round. .. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1264 in FIG. 123). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the movable piece 190a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for discriminating.

The remaining ball timer 203o wins a prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190a of the movable entry accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round after one of the preset rounds is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game ball to be ejected has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to be discharged is 4 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (2 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 and the number of ejected balls match. (S1267 in FIG. 123). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. 2) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and the number of discharges are determined (S1271 in FIG. 123).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d (see FIG. 2). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 100 times after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125) (see S1327 in FIG. 125). It is referred to in the control process to determine whether it is the jackpot start timing (see S1101 in FIG. 120), and is set to off when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the jackpot start timing (see S1101 in FIG. 120). See S1133 in FIG. 121). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing.

The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125), similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above. (See S1327 in FIG. 125), and in the jackpot control process, it is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1103 in FIG. 120), and in the jackpot control process, it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. When it is determined, it is set to off (see S1114 in FIG. 120).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1301 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the start timing of the small hit. Is set to off (see S1302 in FIG. 124).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203w1 described above (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1305 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit, it is turned off. It is set (S1330 in FIG. 125).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 104. (A) to (c) of FIG. 104 are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 104 (d) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is set. The value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a small hit and the first hit random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 is a small hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not there is a random number is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27. It is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) to be judged is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the middle start winning opening 28. Is a set table. In the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, the total number of random numbers that are small hits at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is 400, so that the first one. The probability of a small hit of a special symbol is "400/400 (= 1)".

In addition, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the middle start winning opening 28, the total number of random numbers that are the small hits of the second special symbol is 400, so the probability of the second special symbol being a small hit. Is "400/400 (= 1)".

As shown in FIG. 104 (d), in the second hit random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by a normal symbol at non-time saving, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for non-time saving. As described above, when the normal symbol is not time-saving, the total number of random numbers is 24 while the total number of random values is 240, so the probability of becoming a jackpot of the normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-time saving time of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-time saving time of a normal symbol, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the time is shortened, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of ordinary symbols, and the range is "5-204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for shortening the working hours. In this way, when the time is shortened, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of being a big hit of a normal symbol is "5/6".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a short time, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Will be done. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the time is shortened, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability time of the normal symbol, and the release period of the middle start winning opening 28 is "0. Since it becomes very long as "2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27.

A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when it hits a normal symbol, but the opening time and the number of times are arbitrary. You can set it to. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the electric accessory 28a is displayed. Is released for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 28a in this control example rotates in a double-opening manner with a pair of axes facing the front-rear direction of the game board 13 as rotation axes by the operation of the electric accessory solenoid 209b. The electric accessory 28a rotates in a double-opening manner (opening operation) to guide the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, by rotating (closing) in a mode of closing from both sides toward the center, the game ball is not guided (not entered) to the middle start winning opening 28.

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 28a in this control example is opened for 2 seconds when the time is shortened, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is hit when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be won in the middle start winning opening 28. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is attempted to enter the middle start winning opening 28 even though the time reduction is not in progress (the jackpot with the time reduction is not displayed).

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets the small hit lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol display according to the value of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display result in the device can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 105A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, an effect counter 223f, and a wing entrance. A pass counter 223i, a V inlet pass counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the above up to 4 times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control device 110, and uses the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. , The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is managed.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, or in the main control device 110, the variation in the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1702 in FIG. 129). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it differs only in that it is performed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The wing entrance passage counter 223i is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. The wing entrance passage counter 223i is incremented by 1 when a wing entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the large winning opening switch 190b is received (S712 in FIG. 115). The wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to when setting a display effect command in the lamp editing process (S1606 and S1609 in FIG. 128), and is set to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. It is initialized (S1604 in FIG. 128).

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the fixed area switch 340a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. The V-entrance passage counter 223j is incremented by 1 when a V-entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a is received (S1737 in FIG. 130). This V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to when setting a display effect command in the lamp editing process (S1621 in FIG. 128), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. (S1605 in FIG. 128).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. The round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S1724 in FIG. 130), and is initialized when a jackpot end command is received (S1724 in FIG. 130). S1728 of FIG. 130).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

FIG. 106 is a game flow diagram showing the flow of the game by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment as an example. The normal game by the pachinko machine 10 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area. Hereinafter, the flow of the game will be described on the premise of launching the game ball. In the description of FIG. 106, FIGS. 1 and 2 are referred to as appropriate.

In the process of the game ball flowing down in the game area, when the ball enters any of the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27, the left starting winning opening switch corresponding to each starting winning opening The passage of the game ball is detected by the 210a, the middle start winning opening switch 210c or the right starting winning opening switch 210b, and a special symbol lottery is performed with this as an opportunity.

The special symbol lottery is a lottery related to whether or not the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In the present embodiment, since any random number in the first random number table 202a is set to be a small hit (small hit probability = 1/1), the special symbol lottery has a confirmatory role. It is a lottery. If no game ball enters any of the starting winning openings, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the starting winning opening (F01).

Further, although not particularly shown, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and then stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the lottery result. .. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be randomly changed by lottery or fixed to a constant fluctuation pattern.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed triggered by the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, while the entry into the middle starting winning opening 28 is performed. The second special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is held as an opportunity.

And since the winning probability (small hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 (= 1/1), when the game ball enters any of the starting winning openings, it corresponds to the small hit as it is. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to acquire the hit determination random number internally in the main control device 110, but in the present embodiment, it is acquired.

In this embodiment, a hit (so-called direct hit, direct hit) in which the big hit game is directly executed when the ball enters each starting winning opening is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The direct hit determination may be performed using the hit determination random number acquired here.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is no display mode of "missing" in the special symbol, and it corresponds to "small hit 1" in the lottery by the first special symbol and corresponds to "small hit 2" in the lottery by the second special symbol. It is supposed to be. The difference between "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" is related to the number of operations of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and when "small hit 1" is applicable, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is 1. It operates twice, and when it corresponds to "small hit 2", the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates twice.

In any case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 operates (opens) with this as an opportunity (F02). The operation of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 changes the movable piece 190a to the open position as described above, but in the present embodiment, the "small hit" is performed over a predetermined opening time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). If it corresponds to "1", the movable piece 190a is opened only once, and if it corresponds to "small hit 2", the movable piece 190a is opened only twice for a short period of time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening switch 190b when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated (F03). Here, when the game ball enters the large winning opening switch 190b, the game flow further proceeds to the distribution operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190. If the game ball does not enter the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is aimed at entering the starting winning opening (F01) again. Will start.

When the game flow progresses into the movable ball entry accessory device 190, it is finally determined whether or not the game ball has passed through any specific area through various game ball distribution operations as described above. It is (F04). As a result, if the game ball is finally ejected from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the specific area, unfortunately the game flow ends there and the ball enters the start winning opening (F01) again. Aiming to start the game flow.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates again. Specifically, for example, either the large winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, opening once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 30 seconds), or a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls are won. A special game (big hit game) is executed in which one round is set until the condition is satisfied, and this round is repeated for a predetermined number of continuous operations.

In the present embodiment, the number of continuous operations (number of rounds) is set to 16 times when the game ball passes through the first specific area switch 441a, and 7 times when the game ball passes through the second specific area switch 442a. When the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a, it is set to three times. During such a big hit game (while the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operating), a large number of balls can be entered into the large prize opening switch 190b, which is normally closed, within a short period of time. A player can win many prize balls in a lump.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable ball entry accessory device (F02) is set as the first round. Therefore, the number of rounds in which a player can actually win a large number of prize balls is the number of times (15 times, 6 times) obtained by subtracting 1 from each of the above-mentioned continuous operation times (16 times, 7 times, 3 times). 2 times).

Further, during the special game (during the big hit game), the opening port configured as the entrance of the flow path that allows the game ball to flow directly from the introduction passage 310 to the back side of the game board 13 and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c (FIG. FIG. When (not shown) is opened, the game ball is flowed down from the middle of the introduction passage 310 to the back of the game board 13, and the game ball hits the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400 as in a small hit game. It prevents it from flowing down.

As a result, the game ball is directly flowed down from the opening to the discharge detection switch 190c. Therefore, the special game can be performed without requiring the time to pass through the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400, and the processing time of the abnormal processing (see FIG. 123) described later can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b passes through the opening (not shown) arranged in the middle of the introduction passage 310, the discharge detection switch 190c is turned on in a maximum of 4 seconds. It is configured to pass.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball detected by passing through the specific region (F04) has passed through the time saving switch 444a (F06). Here, when the game ball has passed the time-saving switch 444a, the game flow proceeds to the time-saving game in which the electric accessory 28a operates a predetermined number of times (F07) after the jackpot game ends. At this time, during the short game, the game ball is easily introduced into the middle start winning opening 28, so that the movable piece 190a can be easily opened, and the distribution game in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is frequently performed. Therefore, it is easy to win big hits continuously.

If the game ball has not passed through the time reduction switch 444a, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the ball (F01) into the start winning opening.

FIG. 107 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 1 (also referred to as the small hit game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on (also referred to as the small hit game 1). Open state). In this state, the player fires the game ball aiming at the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and when the game ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the ball is launched. The game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 or the outlier hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the flow of the small hit control 1 by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time of the entire small hit control 1 is set to 7.5 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 1 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens the set time t2 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t3 (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t2 elapses.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, the main control device 110 ends the small hit control 1 based on the fact that the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 12 seconds in the second embodiment, 12 seconds in the sixth embodiment, 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment) The retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described above in the first embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 40) or the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment is driven to allow the game ball to stay, and then, for example, the staying of the first embodiment. By stopping the drive of the solenoid 413 and putting the flow-down blocking plate 412 in the retracted state, the jackpot game control of a different number of rounds is performed based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flowing game ball has passed. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, the differences from FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning the middle start winning opening 28 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a is turned on (also referred to as the small hit game 2). Open state).

Next, the flow of the small hit control 2 by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time of the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t4 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 2 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for the set time t5 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t6 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the large opening solenoid 209a opens the set time t7 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). After that, when the set time t8 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the confirmation area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t8 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t7 elapses.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control based on the fact that the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). The retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described in the first embodiment for 5 seconds, 8 seconds in the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, and 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are driven, and for example, the flow prevention plate 412 (see FIG. 23) is set to an overhanging state. By causing the game ball to stay, and then de-energizing the staying solenoid 413 to bring the flow-down blocking plate 412 into the retracted state, it is based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flow-down game ball has passed. Then, the jackpot game control of different number of rounds is performed. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 125. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or the middle starting winning opening 28 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 112.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. After the through gate passing process is executed, the wing entrance passing process is executed to produce an effect based on the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S140), and the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340. Based on the above, the V entrance passage process that controls the subsequent jackpot game is executed (S141), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S108). S109), the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109) to control the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It is the processing of.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S201). The jackpot includes during the display indicating the jackpot (including during the jackpot game) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B changes. If it is not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol variation start process is a process of determining a small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 110. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a small hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol is 1 (1/1), this lottery has a meaning as a confirmation work.

In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a small hit of a special symbol (S243). In the process of S243, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244). On the other hand, in the process of S243, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit, this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

After the processing of S244 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1, and this process is terminated (S221).

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit probability of the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set to 1, but it is not necessary to be limited to this. For example, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be 0.01, and the probability of a small hit may be 0.99.

Next, the small hit start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, an opening scenario of the large opening solenoid 209a is set (S301). After that, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit medium flag 203w2 are set to on (S302), and this process ends.

As the opening scenario, different opening modes are set depending on which special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is a small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, an opening scenario of the mode shown in FIG. 107 (opening once) or the mode shown in FIG. 108 (opening twice) is set.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or the middle starting winning opening 28 (starting winning). This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process (FIG. 112, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1). (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, even if there is no winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the special symbol 1 reserved ball If the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes). , The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the middle start winning opening 28 (S407: No), this process ends after the process of S412.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the middle start winning opening 28 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 28a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIGS. 113 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit (S609). The jackpot includes a jackpot game and a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the jackpot is not hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for time saving, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 104 (d)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. Based on the second hit random number table 202c of the above, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for non-time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 104 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), whether or not the current time is a big hit. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the middle start winning opening 28 as much as possible during the big hit, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 28a are opened even when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to a period (0.2 seconds) during which it is impossible to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the game ball entering the middle start winning opening 28 during the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls to be ejected from changing significantly.

In the processing of S615, if the jackpot is not hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is hitting the jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is 0.2 seconds. At the same time, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit, when the time of the normal symbol is shortened, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the non-time reduction of the normal symbol, and the middle start winning opening Since the release period of 28 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set.

When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 113, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), determines whether or not the ball has passed at the normal symbol start port (through gate 67), and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 114 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the wing entrance passage process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a wing entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the wing entrance passing process (S140), when it is detected that the game ball has passed the large winning opening switch 190b, it is first determined whether or not the game ball is in a small hit (S711). In the process of S711, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (S711: Yes), a wing entrance passage command is set (S712), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S712: No), it means that the game ball has entered the large winning opening switch 190b even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S713) and this process is performed. To finish.

The wing entrance passage command set in the process of S712 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the wing entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the large prize opening switch 109b, and at the same time, produces an effect based on the passage of the large winning opening switch 190b to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Send a command to execute. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the movable entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 106).

Next, the V inlet passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process (S141). This V inlet passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the V entrance passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (S721). In the process of S721, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (S721: Yes), the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S722), and the V entrance passage command is set (S723). , A counter value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 8 seconds in the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set in the residence counter 203l (S724). End the process.

While the retention counter 203l maintains a value of 0 or more, the corresponding drive device (retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment), the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the seventh embodiment are set to ON (excitation).

The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S721, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the fixed region hole 340, it is next determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to ON (S725). When it is determined in the process of S725 that the V inlet passage flag 203x is not set on (set to off) (S725: No), this process ends.

In the process of S725, when it is determined that the V inlet passage flag 203x is set to ON (S725: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value corresponds to jackpot C (S726). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S726: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to on (S727), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot C corresponds to a 16-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S726, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot C (S726: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot D (S729). In the process of S729, if it is determined that the jackpot D is applicable (S729: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S730), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. The jackpot D corresponds to a 7-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S729, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot D (S729: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot E (S731). If it is determined in the process of S731 that it corresponds to the jackpot E (S731: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot E is set to ON (S732), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. The jackpot E corresponds to a 3-round jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S731 that it does not correspond to the jackpot E (S731: No), an error command is set (S733), and this process is terminated. In this control example, after the game ball that has entered the movable ball entry accessory device 190 has passed through the fixed region hole 340, the jackpot that can be obtained is limited to jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E. Therefore, when the jackpot type values are not jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E after passing through V, the V entrance passage process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the fixed area switch 340a is executed. Is considered to be the case where the game ball is illegally won by the fixed area switch 340a. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S731, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected. When the processing of S727, S730 or S732 is completed, the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0 and the main processing is terminated (S728).

By setting the time-saving and medium-time counter 203f to 0 in the process of S728, the time-saving game is configured to end when the jackpot game is started.

When any of the V flags 203x2 is set to on in the processing of S141, the V inlet passing flag 203x1 is set to off in the small hit end processing (see S1324 and S1328 in FIG. 125).

When the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to off, the type of jackpot is not determined in the processing of S141. Therefore, in this control example, during the small hit game, the jackpot type is determined depending on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a the game ball first passes through, and then the game ball. No matter which specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a are passed through, the passage is invalid (not reflected in the control).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 119, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 119), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 110) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 112) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, a command such as a round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the jackpot state is reached, the jackpot effect is executed and the movable ball entry combination is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the jackpot switch 190b of the object device 190 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the jackpot switch 190b is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the jackpot switch 190b has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the jackpot switch 190b. .. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening switch 190b is closed. The opening and closing of the large winning opening switch 190b is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

Next, the small hit control process (S1041) that controls the opening and closing of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is executed. In the small hit control process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process. The variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 117 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a big prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth switch 190b.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 116) is executed and then the start of the jackpot is set (see S1327 in FIG. 125), it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the process of the jackpot time accessory device operation start process (S1102) is executed, and this process is terminated. The processing of S1102 will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress (S1103). The jackpot includes a display indicating a jackpot (including during a jackpot game) and a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of opening the jackpot accessory device (S1104) is executed, and then the process of S1105 is executed. The processing of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter has reached the number of times (for example, once) set in the current round. In the process of S1105, when the value of the open count counter reaches the number of times set in the current round (S1105: Yes), the large winning opening closing time timer countdown process is executed (S1106). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if the value of the open count counter does not reach the number of times set in the current round (S1105: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and this process ends.

In the big winning opening closing time countdown process (S1106), the countdown of the big hit time interval timer (S1149) set in S1104 is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed (S1107). Then, when the closing time has not elapsed (S1107: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing time has elapsed (S1107: Yes), the round number counter is incremented (S1108). The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

After the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached the number of execution rounds (S1132) set in S1102. At this time, if the value of the round number counter has not yet reached the number of execution rounds (S1109: No), the process proceeds to S1115 and the round number command is set (S1115).

The land number command set in S1115 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119). The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the current number of rounds based on the received round number command, and reflect the result in the effect control during the jackpot.

Next, a command for designating the closing of the normal round grand prize opening is set (S1116). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closure of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 after each round at the time of a big hit. The command for designating the closing of the large winning opening in the normal round is a command indicating that the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is closed except in the final round. The command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

Next, the process of S1117 is performed, the winning ball count counter counted in this round is reset (S1117), and at the same time, the value of the open count counter is also reset, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1109, when the value of the round number counter reaches the number of execution rounds (S1109: Yes), it means that this round is the final round, and then the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off. It is determined whether or not it is done (S1110). When it is determined in the processing of S1110 that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is not set to off (that is, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to on) (S1110: No), then the abnormal processing is executed. (S1118), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1110 that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1110: Yes), the number of game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and the games that have been discharged. This is the case when the number of spheres matches, and then the round number counter is reset (S1111).

Next, a command for designating the closing of the final round grand prize opening is set (S1112). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closure of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 in the final round at the time of a big hit. Here, the final round corresponds to 3 rounds if it is a 3-round jackpot, 7 rounds if it is a 7-round jackpot, and 16 rounds if it is a 16-round jackpot.

Next, the jackpot end command is set (S1113), the jackpot middle flag is turned off (S1114), the process proceeds to S1117, and the present process is terminated. The final round big winning opening closing designation command and the big hit end command are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

The jackpot time accessory device operation start processing S1102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot time accessory device operation start process S1102.

First, the jackpot start waiting time timer countdown process is executed (S1130). In this process, the main control device 110 sets an initial value in the jackpot start waiting time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time. The initial value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is set as the waiting time (for example, about several seconds) from the end of the operation of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 at the time of a small hit to the operation of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 again. .. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, the pre-start effect of the big hit game is performed by utilizing this “big hit start waiting time”.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start waiting time has elapsed (S1131). If the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is not yet 0 (S1131: No), it is determined that the jackpot start waiting time has not elapsed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer becomes 0 (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132 and subsequent processes.

Next, the number of execution rounds is set (S1132). In the present embodiment, the number of execution rounds (number of continuous operations) to be set is three types of "3 rounds", "7 rounds", and "16 rounds", and it is a big hit as to which number of execution rounds to set. The number of execution rounds can be set by checking the type status (checking the type of V flag 203x2).

However, as described above, the first opening (small hit operation) of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 corresponds to the first round. Therefore, here, the remaining "2 rounds", "6 rounds", or "15 rounds" are set as the number of execution rounds. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 203 as a corresponding value on the program.

Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S1133), the jackpot start command is set (S1134), and this process ends.

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the effect control to start the jackpot.

The jackpot accessory device opening process S1104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot time accessory device opening process S1104. It should be noted that this process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 as an operation during the big hit game (special game).

First, the main control device 110 determines whether or not it is the timing for opening the large winning opening switch 190b (S1141). In the process of S1141, when it is determined that it is the timing to open the big winning opening switch 190b (S1141: Yes), the big winning opening switch 190b is opened (S1142). Specifically, the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is output. As a result, the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates, and the large winning opening switch 190b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Next, the jackpot release timer is set (S1143). The value of the timer set here is the opening time per time when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In the present embodiment, the total opening time for one round (for example, about 30 seconds) is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer. With this degree of opening time, a sufficient number (for example, about 10) of game balls can be won in the large winning opening during that period.

Next, a jackpot interval timer (big winning opening closing time timer) is set (S1144). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between the rounds during the big hit or the waiting time at the end of the final round. The value of the timer is set to, for example, about 3 seconds (a value longer than the set value of the remaining ball timer).

On the other hand, in the process of S1141, when it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the large winning opening switch 190b (S1141: No), then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145).

In the process of S1145, when it is determined that the large winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145: Yes), the open timer countdown process is executed (S1146). In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process of S1102 is executed. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (S1147: No), then the number of winning balls The count process is executed (S1149). In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the value of the count number is incremented based on the winning detection signal input from the large winning opening switch 190b within the opening time.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current count number is less than the predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (1 round during a big hit, 1 time during a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (S1150: Yes), this process ends.

When it is determined in S1147 above that the opening time has ended (S1147: Yes), or in S1150 it is determined that the count number has reached a predetermined number (S1150: No), then S1148 is executed.

In S1148, the main control device 110 closes the grand prize opening switch 190b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is stopped. As a result, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1151). Next, the interval standby process (S1152) is executed. In this process, the countdown of the interval timer set in the process of S1102 is executed. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the value of the release count counter is then incremented (S1153), and this process is terminated. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

On the other hand, in the process of S1145, when it is determined that the large winning opening 190b is not open (S1145: No), this process is terminated.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1118). In the abnormality processing (S1118), a processing for monitoring whether or not the large winning opening switch 190b is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 123, S1118), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1261). If it is outside the round validity period (S1261: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1265) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), it is determined whether the number of discharges (total value of the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (value of the number of prize counters 203j) match (S1267). ..

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulently leaving the game ball in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and passing the game ball through the fixed region hole 340 after the jackpot game is completed.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j and the discharging number counter 203s are reset to the initial values (S1271), and then this process ends.

The small hit control process (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). This small hit control process (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the big hit can be executed and the movable ball can be entered. This is a process for opening or closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the accessory device 190.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is started (S1301). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 111), it is determined that the small hit is started. In the process of S1301, when the small hit is started (S1301: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to off (S1302), the opening scenario is set (S1303), and the small hit start command is set. (S1304), this process is terminated.

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect of starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the small hit is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1305). Specifically, the determination during the small hit is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S1305, if it is not a small hit (S1305: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if it is in the middle of a small hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the next opening (S1306). If it is the next opening timing (S1306: Yes), the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened (S1307), and a command indicating the number of newly started opening is set (S1308). This process ends. The command indicating the number of times of release set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command indicating the number of times of opening, the voice lamp control device 113 starts the effect according to the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is not the timing of the next opening (S1306: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after opening the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, it is determined that the closing timing is reached.

In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the timing of closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S1309: Yes), the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is determined. Is closed (S1310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is not satisfied (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit period has elapsed (S1311).

Specifically, for each small hit opening scenario, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the small hit, it is determined that the small hit period has passed. That is, in the small hit control 1, when 7.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit (see FIG. 107), in the small hit control 2, when 10 seconds have passed from the small hit (see FIG. 108), the small hit It is determined that the period of

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the small hit period has elapsed (S1311: Yes), the small hit end process is executed (S1312), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, if it is determined that the small hit period has not elapsed (S1311: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S1312) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S1312). This small hit end process (S1312) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321). In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321: Yes), it is a case where the game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 during the small hit game (specific region hole 440). Since it has passed through any of the specific area switches 441a, 442a, 443a), a process for starting the execution of the jackpot game is performed. First, the residence counter 203l is updated (S1322).

In the process of S1322, the retention counter 203l is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the residence counter 203l is determined to be 0 or less (S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to S1324.

Next, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324). In the process of S1324, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324: Yes), the opening scenario of the big winning opening switch 190b is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1325). ), The start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1326). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to on (S1327), the V inlet passing flag 203x1 is set to off (S1328), the V flag 203x2 is set to off (S1329), and S1330. Move to processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the retention counter 203l is larger than 0 in the processing of S1323 (S1323: No), or in the processing of S1324, the V flag 203x2 is not set to on (that is, the V flag 203x2 is off). (S1324: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is not on (S1321: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the fixed area switch 340a during the small hit game, so a big hit is given. In order to end without doing so, a small hit end command is set (S1331), and the process proceeds to S1330.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the small hit end effect based on the winning information stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223, and selects the small hit end effect. To start.

After shifting to the processing of S1330, the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to off (S1330), the opening scenario is cleared (S1332), and this processing is terminated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1512 (see FIG. 127) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1511 in FIG. 127), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1512. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1512 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1512. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1514 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1514, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1514 is executed (see S1513 in FIG. 127). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1514 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1514 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1408 is performed via the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached via the processing of S1404 to S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1510 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1509. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1509 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1510 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1510 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1510 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, a setting is made such that the output of the indicator lamp 34 is switched to a low power setting when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the gaming state. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the gaming state, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. The details of this lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

After the processing of S1509, a command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1510). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Then, when the command determination process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1511). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1513), and the power-off process is executed (S1514). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1515), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1512), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1512: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1512: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed. Therefore, after that, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like do not change depending on the game state. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Here, the lamp editing process (S1508) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lamp editing process (S1508). This lamp editing process (S1508) is a process executed at 1 ms intervals in the main process (see FIG. 127).

In the lamp editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S1601). In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit is a small hit (S1602).

In the process of S1602, when it is determined that the player is not in the small hit (S1602: No), the current game state is the normal game state in which the game ball is launched with the aim of advancing to the small hit game state. be. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern (S1603), the wing entrance passage counter 223i is set to 0 (S1604), and the V entrance passage counter 223j is set to 0. (S1605), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1602, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (S1602: Yes), a game ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened. As a result, the game ball can flow into the movable ball entry accessory device 190a, and the lamp output of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern so that the player can grasp this. (S1606). In the present embodiment, in the A1 pattern, the illuminated portions 29 to 33 emit blue light.

The A1 pattern is one of the outputs of the lamp for the small hit game. In the present embodiment, the output patterns of A1 to A3 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

For example, in the A1 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit blue light, in the A2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit green light, and in the A3 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 turn red. By emitting light, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of a big hit. The output pattern is not limited to three, and can be configured by any number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the orientation of.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607). In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608). In the present embodiment, in the A2 pattern, the illumination units 29 to 33 emit green light with a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609). When it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A3 pattern (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. In the present embodiment, in the A3 pattern, the illumination units 29 to 33 emit red light with a higher expectation of a jackpot than green.

That is, the color of the light emitted from the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 during the small hit game can be changed according to how many balls the game ball has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b. As described above in the first embodiment, when a plurality of game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the special route hole 323 where the game balls easily flow down into the fixed region hole 340. Therefore, the number of game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 190b can be directly associated with the change in the expectation of the big hit. It can be done as it changes in response to profits. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the wing inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 or more in the processing of S1607 (S1607: No), or when the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is smaller than 2 in the processing of S1609. If it is determined (S1609: No), the process proceeds to S1611.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611). In the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611: Yes), the current state is the state in which the transition to the jackpot game is confirmed and the jackpot type is determined from now on. Is. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the hit acquisition effect pattern (S1612), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is smaller than 1 (0) (S1611: No), the transition to the jackpot game is undecided, so that the electric power is transmitted. The state of the lamp output of the decorative portions 29 to 33 is maintained, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is 1 (S1620).

In the process of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is 1 (S1620: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is undecided.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621). In the process of S1621, when the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is determined to be 1 (S1621: Yes), the current state is that one game ball passes through any specific region hole 440. The number of jackpot rounds is determined based on the above, and there is still a possibility of winning a jackpot of 3 rounds. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B1 pattern, and this process ends (S1622). In the present embodiment, in the B1 pattern, the illuminated portions 29 to 33 emit gold light.

The B1 pattern is one of the outputs of the lamp for producing the jackpot game, which is the output for producing the first round. In the present embodiment, the output patterns of B1 and B2 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

For example, in the B1 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit gold, and in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit rainbow colors, so that the profit of the jackpot increases for the player. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of. The output pattern is not limited to two, and can be configured by any number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the orientation of.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 (S1621: No), the current state is that two or more game balls pass through any specific region hole 440. The number of jackpot rounds is determined based on the passing. For example, in the first embodiment, in the process in which two or more game balls pass through the fixed region hole 340 and flow down inside the second flow-down device 400, at least one game ball goes to the third branch guide flow path R3. It is supposed to be heading.

The game ball flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 will pass through either the first specific region hole 441 (giving a 16-round jackpot) or the second specific region hole 442 (giving a 7-round jackpot). The passing timing is configured to be earlier than the passing timing when another game ball passes through the third specific region hole 443 (giving a jackpot for 3 rounds).

Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443, it is confirmed that the passage is invalid, so that the current state may win a jackpot of three rounds. It is in an excluded state. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B2 pattern, and this process ends (S1623). In the present embodiment, in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated units 29 to 33 emit light in rainbow colors, which have a higher degree of expectation of profits that can be obtained than gold.

In the process of S1620, if it is determined that the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is not 1 (S1620: No), the current state is that the number of jackpot rounds is fixed, and the game proceeds to the jackpot game of transition to 2 rounds. It is in a state of being. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the effect pattern for the jackpot game (S1624), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state before proceeding to the small hit game, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern, and the small hit game state. When the transition from the jackpot game state to the jackpot game state, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set as the hit acquisition effect pattern, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is fixed, and the remaining jackpot game is executed. The output of the lamps of units 29 to 33 is set in the jackpot game effect pattern.

In the state described here, the profit given to each player is fixed, so even if the color difference is provided, the player's interest is not improved, but rather the change in the emission color stimulates the eyes. It leads to fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being tired meaninglessly, in the normal game effect pattern, the hit acquisition effect pattern, and the jackpot game effect pattern, light of a similar color (for example, white light) is used. The lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 are made to emit light. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing of determining the profit.

It should be noted that the moment of winning the jackpot is the moment when the interest of the player is most improved. It is configured to be stronger than the emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 according to the pattern and the effect pattern for the jackpot game.

In FIG. 128, it has been described that the light emission of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is controlled, but in the processing of S1509, the sound effect output from the audio output device (speaker, etc., which is not shown) 226 is also controlled in the same manner. Will be done. That is, the sound changes based on the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player. For example, when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608) than when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern (S1606). , The tempo of the output music is increased or the volume is increased.

Next, the command determination process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1510). This command determination process (S1510) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (FIG. 129, S1510), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (S1701). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702).

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28, or a lottery of a special symbol. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the above is performed, so that every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by S1702. The values of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1702 is executed, the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are visibly arranged by the player as a substitute for the liquid crystal display device. A display hold ball number command for notifying the 7-segment display (not shown) is set. As a result, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the 7-segment display.

On the other hand, when the hold ball number command is not received (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command is received (S1703). When a hit-related command is received (S1703: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S1704), and then this process ends.

In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1705). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1705: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (for example, "striking a ball at the top") is selected, and the notification command is set (S1706). ..

Next, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the broadcast command has not been received (S1705: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1707), this process is terminated. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the 7-segment display, the command is stored on the 7-segment display. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

Here, the hit-related processing (S1704) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S1704). This hit-related process (S1704) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 129) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S1721: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S1722), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on a 7-segment display (not shown).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S1721: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1723). In the process of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1724). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1725), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1723 that the round number command has not been received (S1723: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S1726). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S1726 (S1726: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S1727), the round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S1728), and this process is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S1726 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S1726: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S1729).

If it is determined in the process of S1729 that the small hit start command has been received (S1729: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S1730), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1729 that the small hit start command has not been received (S1729: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S1731).

If it is determined in the process of S1731 that a small hit end command has been received (S1731: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S1732). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733).

In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733: Yes), 1 is added to the wing entrance passage counter 223i (S1734). The wing entrance passage counter 223i added here is referred to in the ramp editing process described in FIG. 128 3 for determining the number of game balls entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small hit game. NS.

When the processing of S1734 is completed, a display wing entrance passage command is set (S1735) in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 128) based on the ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small hit game. ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1733, if it is determined that the wing entrance passage command has not been received (S1733: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736).

In the process of S1736, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S1737). The V inlet passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG. 128 in order to determine the number of balls entering the fixed area switch 340a during the jackpot game (first round).

When the process of S1737 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set (S1738) in order to execute an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1736, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S1736: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect is determined by how many game balls have passed through the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and how many game balls have passed through the fixed area switch 340a. (See FIG. 128). As a result, even when the player is not paying attention to the game ball, it is possible to notify that the player is in an advantageous state depending on the production mode, and the player misses the moment of the big hit. Can be prevented.

Further, by this, it is possible to link the characteristic of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (the characteristic that the size of the profit that can be expected to be acquired changes depending on how many game balls are inserted) and the effect. That is, the change in the production can be configured not as a mere change in liveliness but as a change in the production based on the change in the profit that can be expected to be acquired. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the production.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the game ball that has entered the second branch region 420 of the second flow-down device 400 falls immediately after reaching the first delay preparation hole 423 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, a blocking member is provided inside the first delay preparation hole 423 by the driving force of a driving device such as a solenoid to prevent the game ball from falling, and the blocking member acts to reach the third branch region 430. The fall of the game ball may be stopped until the other game ball headed for passes through the specific region hole 440. In this case, the length of the second delay induction flow path R6 can be shortened, and the space occupied by the flow path formed by the second flow-down device 400 can be saved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution body 322 is arranged separately from the driving means has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a locking member that projects toward the distribution body 322 at predetermined periods may be provided, and the distribution body 322 may be fixed at predetermined periods by the action of the locking member. In this case, when only one game ball reaches the distribution body 322 and comes into contact with the distribution body 322 when the distribution body 322 is fixed in the equilibrium state, the distribution body 322 does not rotate and the game ball goes to the special route hole 323. Flow down. That is, even if only one game ball enters the first flow-down device 300 every predetermined period, a period during which the game ball enters the special route hole 323 can be generated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution body 322 operates in rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution body 322 may slide left and right.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the frictional resistance generated between the shaft support rod 322f of the distribution body 322 and the resistance extending portion 322d changes according to the rotation angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, it rotates coaxially with the distribution body 322 and does not engage until the distribution body 322 changes from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, and the distribution body 322 changes from the first angle state to the second angle state. May include an engaging member that engages and rotates in synchronization with the distribution body 322. In this case, only the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is applied from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, while in addition to the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 from the first angle state to the second angle state, the engaging member Since the resistance of the engaging member due to the weight of the distribution body 322 is applied to the distribution body 322, the ease of rotation of the distribution body 322 can be changed. The mode of engagement is not particularly limited, and may be engaged from the inside of the fan-shaped portion 322a or from the outside of the fan-shaped portion 322a, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area hole 340, which specific area switch 441a to 443a the game ball passing through the specific area later passes through is the previous game ball. Although the case where the selection is randomly selected regardless of whether or not the switch passes through the specific area switches 441a to 443a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the later game ball may pass through the specific area switches 442a, 443a, which are more profitable to the player than the specific area switches 441a to 443a through which the earlier game ball has passed. In this case, the interest can be continuously improved while the player watches the flow mode of the game ball.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the large winning opening switch 190b is normally closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the large winning opening switch 190b may be always open. In this case, since the player is always in a state where he / she can aim for a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the determination values of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 are all set as the same small hit determination value has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set as different small hit determination values. In this case, for example, half of the determination values may correspond to the determination values in which the time reduction is attached after the big hit, and the remaining determination values may correspond to the determination values in which the time reduction is not attached after the big hit. As a result, it is possible to sort out whether or not the time reduction is applied after the big hit without requiring the time reduction switch 209d.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the corresponding drive device (for example, the residence solenoid 413) operates for a predetermined period after passing through the fixed region switch 340a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform a constant operation based on the operation timing of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. In this case, the drive maintenance period of the drive device (for example, the retention solenoid 413) is set to be longer than the longest period required for the game ball to pass through the first flow device 300 and reach the flow prevention plate 412.

In the third embodiment, the case where the pair of guide rails 3321 on which the game ball rolls is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of guide rails 3321 are formed from a linear shape that intersects at one point, and a large special route hole 3323 that allows a game ball to fall is formed outside the intersecting position, so that the guide rail 3321 can be formed. When the flowing game balls collide at the intersection position, the game balls are blown outward by the collision, reach the special route hole 3323, and fall, but when they do not collide, the end of the guide rail 3321. The game ball may fall into the normal route hole 3324 arranged near the end of the guide rail 3321. In this case, since the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 at the point where the game ball is thrown outward due to the collision of the game ball, the game ball can be dropped into the special route hole 3323 without waiting for the deceleration of the game ball. can. Therefore, when the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323, the flow speed of the game ball can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the case where the central rail portion 3321a is also used by the pair of guide rails 3321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the central rail portion 3321a may be individually provided for each pair of guide rails 3321, and the distance between the central rail portions 3321a may be set as the distance at which the rolling game balls interfere with each other. In this case, for example, one central rail portion 3321a is formed from a meandering rail shape, and the other central rail portion 3321a is formed from a straight rail shape. The degree of interference between the game balls (projected area in the traveling direction of the game balls) is different, and the flow mode of the game balls after the collision can be changed.

As a result, the period until the ball falls into the special route hole 3323 after the collision can be changed for each collision position (after the game ball enters the movable accessory device 90, the game ball enters the second flow-down device 400. The period until the ball is entered can be changed), and the timing of launching the game ball can be suppressed by observing the state of the movable plate 421a that automatically operates in the second flow-down device 400.

In the sixth embodiment, when the inlet opening 6440i of the specific region hole 6440 is configured to have a shape corresponding to the three specific region holes 6441 to 6443, and the profit increasing device 6450 is composed of two rotating members. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific region hole is composed of four holes having different profits (for example, the number of jackpot rounds is 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 7 rounds, and 3 rounds with different specific region holes), and the entrance opening 6440i corresponds to this. It is composed of a shape (four-pronged hole shape), so that the profit increasing device 6450 is composed of three rotating members arranged at the entrances of the three specific region holes excluding the specific region hole of the maximum profit. Is also good. In this case, it is possible to further complicate the game characteristics when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410.

Here, each of the three rotating members allows the game ball to enter the specific region hole, which has a lower profit than the specific region hole directly below (the position where the game ball that rotates the rotating member flows down as it is). It is configured to be closed according to the state after operation. In this case, for example, on the premise that only one game ball is accommodated in each specific area hole, if four or more game balls flow into the timed branching area 6410, the game ball will be in all the specific areas. Since the game ball passes through the hole, the player can obtain the maximum profit because the game ball has passed through the specific area hole where the maximum profit can be obtained, but four or more game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410. It is difficult to make it.

Here, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific region hole, the rotating member operated by the action of the previous game ball closes the specific region hole that gives the third and fourth benefits. The game ball can be guided to a specific area hole that gives the maximum profit.

Further, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). A slide delay device that overhangs for a short period of time and causes a game ball that has flowed down to a specific region hole that gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit) to flow down to the specific region hole that has a higher profit. May be provided. In this case, on the premise that two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 and the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit, the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole. In the case where the later game ball flows down the specific region hole that gives the second highest profit within a short time after flowing into the later game ball, the slide delay device acts on the later game ball to move the later game ball. It can flow down to the side of the hole in the specific region where the profit is highest.

The slide delay device, for example, extends for a short time when the game ball flows into a specific region hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit). It may be an embodiment in which the game ball that has flowed down to the specific region hole or the specific region hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit) is allowed to flow down to the specific region hole side with the higher profit. In this case, if the previous game ball flows into the specific region hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and then the later game ball reaches the entrance opening of the specific region hole within a short time, the slide delay. By the action of the device, the later game ball can flow down to the specific area side where the profit is higher.

Further, when three game balls flow into the timed branching area 6410, the profit obtained by entering the specific area hole where the profit obtained by the first game ball is the third highest and operating the rotating member is obtained. Since the lowest specific region hole is closed, one of the remaining two game balls will pass through the specific region hole that maximizes the profit obtained.

Therefore, for example, when three game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific region hole, it is possible to guide one of the later game balls to the specific region hole that gives the maximum profit.

The same can be said for the case where two game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410. This also applies when the number of holes in the specific region is 5 or more. That is, when the specific region hole 6440 is composed of n holes (n is a natural number) that give different benefits, and m (m is a natural number, m <n) of game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410. If the first game ball flows down to the specific area hole that gives the m-th highest profit from the top, the subsequent game ball is prevented from flowing into the specific area hole that gives the lower profit, so that the rest One of the game balls will flow down the most profitable specific area hole. Therefore, the player can obtain the maximum profit (16 round jackpot).

Therefore, the number of game balls flowing into the timed branching region 6410 (m) and the order of profits of the specific region hole in which the first game ball is housed (n1) are detected, and they have a predetermined relationship (m ≧). If n1) is satisfied, one of the later game balls will pass through a specific region hole to which the maximum profit is given. Therefore, when the relationship is satisfied, the maximum profit acquisition effect is performed. Is also good. As a result, the player can watch the game ball flowing down the timed branching area 6410 with peace of mind.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the screw member 7453 is constantly driven has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive mode may be such that each time the vehicle is driven for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds), it is stopped for several seconds (for example, 1 second). In this case, the posture of the screw member 7453 can be determined and the timing of launching the game ball can be suppressed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an array pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points where two balls enter the sorting means and both go to an advantageous route>
A movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means pass through a specific area provided in the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for sorting whether the ball is discharged after being allowed to be discharged or the ball is discharged without passing through the specific area, a game in which the ball is inserted into the movable ball entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval. The gaming machine A1 is provided with a multi-ball guiding means configured so as to easily guide all the balls to a specific region.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to the open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that can be a big hit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), the game ball is accommodated in the movable ball entry device in most cases when the game ball is entered into the movable ball entry device during the game. Although the number of game balls is one, in rare cases, two game balls may be accommodated in the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, the player's expectation is significantly improved when two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry device. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the route through which the game ball can pass when one game ball flows down to the movable ball entry device and the game ball pass when two game balls flow down into the movable ball entry device. Since the route to be obtained is the same, even if two game balls flow down to the movable ball entry device together, when two game balls flow down to the movable ball entry device at different timings. In comparison, the probability that the game ball passes through a specific area was not improved. In this case, there is a problem that the player is discouraged because the actual game result is not accompanied by the degree of improvement of the player's expectation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movable ball guiding means is provided with a compound ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all the gaming balls entered at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region. The probability that a game ball will pass through a specific area when a plurality of game balls flow down into the ball entry means can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the game balls are accommodated one by one in the movable ball entry means. .. As a result, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation can be balanced with the actual game result, and the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the double-ball guiding means is configured such that a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the gaming ball by coming into contact with the gaming ball and a gaming ball that is in contact with the movable means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels provide a game ball in the specific area as compared with the advantageous side flow path for guiding the game ball to the specific area and the advantageous side flow path. The advantageous side flow path is provided with a disadvantageous side flow path having a low probability of passing, and the advantageous side flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is thrown when the movable means is in a throwing state that can be configured by an operation. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the throwing state is configured when one gaming ball is in contact with the movable means while another gaming ball is in contact with the movable means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when a plurality of gaming balls come into contact with the movable means of the multi-ball guiding means at the same time, the movable means constitutes a throwing state by the operation, and the plurality of them The game ball can be sent to the advantageous side flow path. Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the driving means for separating the case where the game ball passes through the advantageous side flow path and the case where the game ball passes through the disadvantageous side flow path, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A2, the operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, one game ball comes into contact with the movable means from one direction of the operation direction of the reciprocating operation, and another game ball comes into contact with the movable means. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movable means constitutes the throwing state by abutting on the movable means from another direction of the operation direction of the operation.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the gaming ball applies a load to the movable means from both directions of the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means, and the movable means constitutes a throwing state by balancing these loads. It is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the movable means is in a throwing state when only one game ball is in contact with the movable means.

The mode of reciprocating movement of the movable means is not limited. For example, it may be a rotation operation or a slide operation.

In the gaming machine A3, the movable means constitutes the throwing state in an initial state in which the gaming ball is non-contacting and the force is balanced, and in the initial state, the gaming ball is movable from one direction of the reciprocating motion. After abutting on the means and before the game ball separates from the movable means, a first state and a second state having a movement resistance different from that of the first state are sequentially configured, and the second state is described. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the movement resistance is increased as compared with the first state, and the movable means constitutes the throwing state when the gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means in the second state. ..

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the throwing state can be configured as an initial state in which the forces applied to the movable means are balanced, and when the gaming ball starts to come into contact with the movable means. Since the first state has a lower resistance than the second state, when one game ball comes into contact with the movable means in the initial state, the movable means is immediately moved, so that the game ball is erroneously moved to the advantageous side flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown into the ball, and then the movable means changes to the second state, which has higher resistance than the first state, so that the period until the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means is gained. Can be done. As a result, even when two game balls reach the movable means at intervals, it is possible to easily configure a state in which the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means in the second state of the movable means. Since the movable means constitutes a throwing state when the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means, the game ball can be thrown to the advantageous side flow path.

The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a bridging means that operates as the movable means operates, and the bridging means hits the movable means from one direction in which one game ball operates in the reciprocating motion. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that another gaming ball that comes into contact with the movable means after being brought into contact with the movable means is allowed to flow down to a position where the movable means comes into contact with the movable means from another direction.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the bridging means includes another gaming ball that abuts on the movable means after one game ball abuts on the movable means from one direction. Since it flows down to a position where it comes into contact with the movable means from another direction, even if one game ball and another game ball flow down toward the movable means from the same direction, one game ball and another game Instead of moving the ball to one side, it is possible to direct the ball one by one in both directions in the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means.

In the game machine A1, the double ball guiding means is configured such that a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball and a game ball that is in contact with the movable means can flow down. The movable means is provided with a plurality of distribution flow paths, and when the first game ball and the later game ball come into contact with the movable means, after the contacted destination game balls flow into the distribution flow path. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the movable means constitutes the throwing state when the later gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movable means is brought into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period after the previous gaming ball has flowed into the distribution flow path. Since the throwing state is configured, the movable means can be put into the throwing state not only when a plurality of balls come into contact with the movable means together, and in that case, only the later game balls flow into the advantageous side flow path. be able to.

As a result, for example, when the movable ball entering means is opened twice by one operation trigger, one game ball enters the movable ball entering means each time the movable ball is opened, and as a result, the movable ball enters the movable ball. When two game balls are accommodated in the means (when the timing at which the game balls come into contact with the movable means becomes longer) and when the movable ball entering means is opened once, the movable ball entering means has two game balls. The number of game balls flowing into the advantageous side flow path can be changed depending on the case where two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry means by inserting individual balls, and the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine A1, the double-ball guiding means includes a driving means having an operating unit that applies a driving force to the gaming ball to eject the ball, and a stopping means for fastening the gaming ball to the front side in the operating direction of the operating unit. A plurality of distribution channels, which are configured to allow the game balls ejected by the driving force given by the means to flow down, are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side flows that guide the game balls to the specific region. The road is provided with a disadvantageous flow path having a lower probability of passing the game ball through the specific area as compared with the advantageous side flow path, and the advantageous side flow path has a plurality of game balls fastened to the stopping means. The flow path on the disadvantaged side is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is thrown when one game ball is fastened to the stopping means. Characteristic gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movement of the moving part of the driving means causes the moving part to be ejected depending on whether one or more gaming balls fastened to the stopping means are ejected. By utilizing the fact that the resistances are different, it is possible to change whether the gaming ball flows down the advantageous side flow path or the disadvantage side flow path while causing the moving portion of the driving means to perform the same operation.

The mode of the driving means is not limited to a specific mode. For example, it may be composed of a solenoid member that operates electromagnetically by energization, or may be composed of a spring member that applies a driving force by a return operation after elastic deformation.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the operation of the moving unit by the driving means is performed after waiting for the gaming ball that has entered the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating unit of the driving means is operated after waiting for the gaming ball that has entered the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means, for example. In a state where two game balls are inserted into the movable ball entry means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls ejected by the driving force of the drive means collide with the game balls on the way to the stopping means.

As a result, when there are two game balls that have entered the movable ball entry means, the mode in which the two game balls are ejected by the drive means is described in the case where both of the two game balls are of the moving unit of the drive means. It can be limited to a general mode of ejecting while being arranged on the front side.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry means, the operation mode of the game balls can be made uniform.

In the game machine A1, the double ball guiding means includes a plurality of distribution channels configured so that the game ball can flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side channels for guiding the game ball to the specific region. And a disadvantageous side flow path having a lower probability of passing the game ball through the specific area than the advantageous side flow path, and a plurality of game balls housed in the movable ball entry means collide with each other. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured so as to easily pass through the advantageous side flow path.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, whether or not the game ball easily passes through the advantageous side flow path changes depending on whether or not the game ball collides in the distribution flow path, so that it is movable. Even after the game ball enters the ball entry means, the player's attention can be continued to be attracted to the game ball. In addition, the probability that the game ball passes through the flow path on the advantageous side is merely changed by utilizing the fact that the flow-down mode changes due to the collision between the game balls, and the operation is performed by the contact with the game ball. Since no moving body is required, the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A9, the double ball guiding means includes a guiding region for guiding the game ball to each of the plurality of distribution channels, and the guiding region is formed from a shape in which the bottom plate is tapered downward. The advantageous side opening that guides the game ball to the distribution flow path through the opening provided in the bottom plate and guides the game ball to the advantageous side flow path guides the game ball to the disadvantage side flow path. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that it is arranged at a lower position than the opening on the disadvantageous side to be guided.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the advantageous side opening that guides the game ball from the guiding region to the advantageous side flow path is located at a lower position than the disadvantage side opening that guides the game ball to the disadvantage side flow path. Since it is arranged in, it is possible to easily introduce the game ball whose speed has decreased due to the collision into the advantageous side flow path.

<If you get two in V, at least one of them will be the better lottery. ＞
When an operation trigger occurs during a game, a movable ball-entry means that changes from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the winning opening for a predetermined opening time to an open state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. , A fixed area where it is determined that the game ball entered in the winning opening of the movable ball entering means is guided to a specific area provided in the movable ball entering means, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in the movable ball entering means. Comparison between the first specific area in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player by passing the game ball in the specific area and the profit given to the player by passing the game ball through the first specific area. In a gaming machine including a second specific area in which the profit given to the player by passing the game ball is small, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the first The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a first means for making it easier to obtain a profit from passing a game ball through a specific area as compared with a profit from passing a game ball through the second specific area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that enables a player to make a profit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), in most cases when the game ball enters the movable ball entry device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entry device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may be inserted into the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device, the player's expectation is significantly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two gaming balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of the two gaming balls pass through the fixed region, one of the gaming balls enters the second specific region. After passing through, even if another game ball passes through the first specific area, the player cannot obtain the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific area. In this case, there is a problem that the player is discouraged because the actual game result is not accompanied by the degree of improvement of the player's expectation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first means provides the benefit of the gaming ball passing through the first specific area when the plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period. 2 Since it is easier for the player to obtain the profit compared to the profit obtained by passing the game ball through the specific area, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period and the degree of improvement of the player's expectation. It can be balanced with the actual game result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine B1, the first means includes a first passing flow path that connects the fixed region and the first specific region so that the game ball can pass through, and the fixed region and the second specific region. A second passing flow path that allows the game ball to pass between them is provided, and the period during which the game ball passes through the second passing flow path is compared with the period during which the game ball passes through the first passing flow path. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the period during which the gaming ball passes through the first passing flow path is shorter than the period during which the gaming ball passes through the second passing flow path. When a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area substantially at the same time and the plurality of game balls are separated into the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path, the game balls preferentially pass through the first specific flow path. It is possible to give the player the benefit of doing so.

The method for differentiating the period during which the game ball passes through the first passing flow path and the period during which the game ball passes through the second passing flow path is not particularly limited. For example, the length of the second passing flow path is set to the first passing flow path so that the flow velocity of the game ball is the same between the case of passing through the first passing flow path and the case of flowing down the second passing flow path. It may be longer than the first passing flow path, or the speed at which the game ball flows down the first passing flow path may be the same as the length of the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path. It may be made larger than the flow speed (for example, the descending inclination angle of the first passing flow path is made larger than the descending inclination angle of the second passing flow path), or the second passing flow path may be increased. The game ball may be stopped for a predetermined period of time inside the second passing flow path by providing a passage preventing means for preventing the game ball from passing by protruding inside the second passage for a predetermined period of time.

In the gaming machine B2, the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path are composed of the same flow path in a predetermined section from the determined region, and the first passing flow path or the second passing flow path. The flow path is branched by bending at least one of the two in a predetermined branch region, the branch region is configured to decelerate the reached gaming ball, and in the first means, a plurality of gaming balls are grouped in the branch region. The gaming machine B3 is provided with a contact inflow means for allowing at least one gaming ball to flow into the first passing flow path.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area, the earlier gaming ball is decelerated in the branching region to cause the later gaming ball and the earlier gaming ball. And can be collectively reached in the branch region, and in that case, the contact inflow means causes at least one gaming ball to flow into the first passing flow path, so that the benefit of the gaming ball passing through the first specific region is obtained. Can be easily obtained by the player.

The mode of the contact inflow means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured as a wall portion that can shield the progress of the game ball, or may be configured as an operating portion that operates as the game ball reaches the branch region, and is constant from the time the power is turned on. It may be configured as an electric unit that operates electrically depending on the operation mode.

In the gaming machine B3, the specific area includes an advantageous specific area that gives a greater benefit to the player than the first specific area, and the first means moves from the second passage flow path to the first passage flow path. The bridging flow path that enables bridging and the game ball that is connected to the advantageous specific area and passes through the first passing flow path are configured to be able to flow in and are connected to the advantageous specific area. With an advantageous passage flow path, the gaming ball that has passed through the bridging flow path and the game ball that passes through the first passage flow path merge with each other, so that the game ball easily flows into the advantageous passage flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being composed of modes.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball flowing into the bridging flow path from the second passing flow path joins the gaming ball flowing down the first passing flow path. Is likely to flow into the advantageous passing flow path connected to the advantageous specific region, so that after the plurality of gaming balls have passed through the fixed region, the gaming balls head toward the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path, respectively. In this case, it is possible to leave the possibility that the gaming ball flowing down the second passing flow path assists the gaming ball passing through the first passing flow path toward the advantageous passing flow path, and the second passing flow path can be used. The presence of the inflowing game balls can be increased.

The method for facilitating the flow of the game ball flowing down the first passing flow path into the advantageous side flow path is not particularly limited. For example, it may be performed by changing the flow direction of the game balls by abutting between the game balls, or by reaching (retaining) a plurality of game balls at the entrance of the advantageous passage flow path, the game is played in the advantageous passage flow path. This may be done by disposing an introduction means that facilitates the introduction of the sphere.

In the gaming machine B4, the first means includes a flow-down mode changing means that affects the flow-down mode of the passing game ball depending on the operating state, and the flow-down mode changing means has an influence on the flow-down mode of the passing game ball. It is configured in a mode in which the state changes at predetermined intervals between a passing state that is reduced and a resistance state in which the influence on the flowing mode of the passing game ball is greater than the passing state, and the gaming ball is the flow mode. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that whether or not the gaming ball is likely to flow into the advantageous passing flow path is changed depending on the state of the flow mode changing means when passing through the changing means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the state of the flow-down mode changing means changes between the passing state and the resistance state at predetermined intervals, and it depends on the timing of passing through the flowing-down mode changing means. Since it changes whether or not the game ball easily flows into the advantageous passing flow path, another game ball flows from the bridging flow path to the first passing flow path while the game ball flows down the first passing flow path. It is possible to generate a plurality of patterns to be played, and it is possible to make the player play a fresh game each time.

In the gaming machines B3 to B5, the contact inflow means is configured so that the state can be changed between a normal state and a special state different from the normal state, and in the normal state, a plurality of gaming balls that have reached the branch region. Among them, one game ball is made to flow into the first passing flow path, and in the special state, all of the plurality of game balls that have reached the branch region are made to flow into the first passing flow path. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the state of the contact inflow means, and the attention of the contact inflow means can be improved. can.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the first means extends at least inward of the second passing flow path and stops the gaming ball flowing down the second passing flow path, and the second passing state. A passage preventing means constituting an immersive state of sinking to the outside of the passing flow path is provided, and the overhanging state is maintained at least at the time when the gaming ball flowing down the movable entering means reaches the passing preventing means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the passing prevention means maintains the overhanging state at least when the gaming ball reaches the passing preventing means and stops the gaming ball. 2. The period until the game ball passing through the passing flow path reaches the second specific region can be extended by the period during which the passage preventing means maintains the overhanging state.

The operation mode of the passage prevention means is, for example, a predetermined period (a period sufficiently longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the passage prevention means) after the operation trigger for opening the movable ball entry means is generated. An example is an operation mode in which the passage prevention means is maintained in an overhanging state and then changed to an immersive state.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a blocking member that is movably arranged in the inflow portion of the second specific region so as to constitute a state in which the gaming ball cannot flow in is provided, and the gaming ball has the inflow of the second specific region. It is characterized in that the blocking member prevents at least one of the plurality of gaming balls from flowing down into the second specific region. Game machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the gaming ball is arranged at a position where it can flow down to the second specific area, the flow-down is blocked by a blocking member. Since the game balls are in a fixed arrangement, it is possible to eliminate the premise that the game balls flow into the second specific area, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game balls.

In the game machine B8, the blocking member constitutes a first state in which a load is applied to the game ball to affect the flow-down mode and a second state in which the game ball does not affect the flow-down mode. It is possible, and depending on whether the first state or the second state is reached, the game ball flows down to the first specific area, or the profit given to the player is larger than that of the first specific area. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the probability of whether or not the gaming ball flows down to an advantageous specific region changes.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, after the gaming ball has passed through the blocking member, the mode of flow of the gaming ball can be made different between the first state and the second state. The difference can be linked to the profits that the player can expect. Therefore, the attention of the game ball can be improved even after passing through the blocking member.

<If two pieces are entered in V, the round distribution of the later game balls will be more than the previous game balls>
A first specific area in which a game ball can pass and a predetermined benefit is given to the player by passing the game ball, and a first specific area in which the game ball can pass and the player is given a predetermined benefit by passing the game ball. It includes a second specific region that gives a profit less than the profit obtained by passing, a composite specific region having a plurality of specific regions including the profit, and a definite region in which it is determined to guide the game ball to the composite specific region. In the gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the later gaming balls passing through the composite specific area is given to the earlier gaming balls. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second means for making a profit given to a player or more when passing through the composite specific area alone.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that enables a player to make a profit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), in most cases when the game ball enters the movable ball entry device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entry device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may be inserted into the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device, the player's expectation is significantly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of these two game balls pass through the fixed area, where in the specific area each game ball passes. There is a problem that it is left to randomness and it cannot be said that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through a fixed area within a predetermined period, the benefit given to the player by passing the later gaming balls through a specific area of 1 is obtained. Since the second means is provided to make the profit given to the player by the game ball that has passed through the other specific area first, the previous ball passes when the game ball passes through the specific area. Profit is promised more than the profit obtained by a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to keep the attention until the later ball passes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The mode of profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through the composite specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a profit given to the player when the later game ball passes through the specific area, or the specific area through which the earlier game ball passes as a result of the later game ball passing through the specific area is the first. 2 The profit may be given to the player when the game ball changes (increases) from the specific area to the first specific area and the previous game ball passes through the first specific area (after the change).

In the game machine C1, the second means includes a movable means operated by a game ball, and the profit given by the movement of the movable means caused the game ball on which the movable means is operated to pass through the specific area. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the passage of the gaming ball to another specific area that gives a profit of less than is impossible.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is limited by the movable means operated by the gaming ball, so that the shape of the flow path through which the gaming ball flows is special. It is possible to limit a specific area through which the game ball passes, without making it a problem.

The mode in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the flow path through which the game ball flows down toward the specific area may be blocked, or the opening in which the game ball is guided to the specific area may be closed.

Further, the mode of operating by the game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a means operated by an actuator that operates when the game ball passes through the detection sensor, or it may be a means that operates by being pushed by the game ball when the game ball comes into contact with it.

In the game machine C2, the movable means operates after the specific area through which the previous game ball passes is determined.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, after the state in which the specific area through which the gaming ball passes can be changed (after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is determined, that is, in the specific area Since the movable means operates after the state where there is a possibility of bouncing from the opening), it is possible to prevent inadvertently limiting the specific area through which the game ball passes, and the profit obtained by the player is disturbed. Can be prevented.

For example, if the movable means operates before the specific area to be passed is determined, the game ball itself bounces off the specific area after the operation of the movable means, gains the benefit of the movable means, and obtains a specific area having a larger profit. A situation occurs in which it passes. In this case, even when there is only one game ball, the profit of the movable means can be obtained, and the profit given to the player may become too large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the movable means is operated after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is determined, so that two gaming balls have reached the specific area. It is possible to ensure the playability in which the movable means exerts its effect on the condition that.

In the gaming machines C2 or C3, the movable means operates in a manner in which the gaming ball narrows the entrance openings arranged in the vicinity of the specific regions as well as the entrances to the specific regions so that the gaming balls cannot pass through. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and operates in a manner of narrowing the entrance opening which is the entrance to each specific area. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the movable means before the later gaming ball enters the specific area.

As a result, even when the distance between the earlier game ball and the later game ball is narrow, it is possible to facilitate the operation of the movable means before the later game ball enters the specific area, so that the movable means can be easily operated from the fixed area to the specific area. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow path through which the game ball flows.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the movable means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down along one surface of the movable means in the post-operation state, and the gaming ball is transmitted along one surface of the movable means to specify the other gaming ball. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is configured in a manner of directing to an area.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, in the state after the operation of the movable means, the gaming ball is configured to travel along one surface of the movable means toward the other entrance opening. In addition to the role of preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area, it is possible to have the role of preventing the subsequent game ball from staying.

The mode in which the game ball is directed toward the entrance opening is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a plate is projected from one surface of the flow path, and the surface of the plate facing the game ball is inclined with respect to the extending direction of the flow path to guide the game ball in a predetermined direction. The movable member operates in a manner of closing the hole with respect to the entrance opening which is an entrance to a specific area and an opening directed in the vertical direction, and is movable when the upper surface thereof is formed to be inclined. The game ball on the upper surface of the member may be configured to flow along an inclination.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means narrows the entrance of the specific area where the gaming ball is determined to pass by the operation, and makes the gaming ball impassable.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means is configured in such a manner that only one gaming ball can pass before passing through the specific area. When two balls have passed through the fixed area, each game ball can be passed through a different specific area, so that the second means can easily operate.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, each entrance opening that is an entrance to each specific area and is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area, and a step at which the previous game ball begins to enter the entrance opening of 1. The gaming machine C7, which is operated by the pachinko / pachislot machine C7, comprises a delayed movable means for extending the period required for the later gaming ball to enter the other entrance opening in the post-operating state.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the delayed movable means is operated at the stage when the previous gaming ball starts to enter the entrance opening of 1, and in the post-operating state, the later. Since the period required for the gaming ball to enter the other entrance opening is extended, it is possible to prevent the later gaming ball from passing through the entrance opening early due to the operation of the delayed movable means.

As a result, when the earlier game ball and the later game ball reach each entrance opening at short intervals, even if the later game ball is likely to pass through a specific area where profit is low, the player enters another entrance opening. It is possible to extend the period of time to change (profit increase) the specific area through which the later game ball passes by the movable means.

A gaming machine Z1 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
190 Movable ball entry accessory device (movable ball entry means)
190b Grand prize opening switch (winning opening)
320, 3320, 4320 Route distribution section (part of distribution means)
322b Plate-shaped part (bridging means)
330 Sorting slope (part of sorting means)
322 Distributor (part of compound ball guiding means, movable means)
325 Special route guide path (part of taxiing channel, advantageous side channel)
326, 3326 Normal route guidance (part of distribution flow path, disadvantageous side flow path)
340 Determining area hole (part of definite area)
410, 5410 1st branch area (branch area)
411 Contact wall (part of the first means, contact inflow means)
421a Movable plate (means for changing the flow mode)
431 distribution protrusion (part of the first means)
441 First specific region hole (part of advantageous passage flow path)
441a, 2441a First specific area switch (part of the first specific area, part of the advantageous specific area, part of the first passage flow path)
442a, 2442a 2nd specific area switch (a part of the 1st specific area, a part of the 2nd specific area, a part of the 1st passage flow path, a part of the 2nd passage flow path)
443a, 2443a 3rd specific area switch (part of the 2nd specific area, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
2411 Timed blocking plate (part of passage prevention means)
2420 Electromagnetic solenoid (part of the first means, part of the passage prevention means)
3321 Guide rail (part of compound ball guiding means, part of guiding area)
3323 Special route hole (advantageous opening)
3324 Normal route hole (disadvantageous opening)
4322 Retention flow path (part of double ball guiding means, stopping means)
4323 Solenoid for injection (part of compound ball guiding means, driving means)
5411 Operating wall (part of the first means, contact inflow means)
6440 Specific region hole (part of composite specific region)
6440i entrance opening (entrance opening)
6450 Profit-increasing device (part of second means)
6451 First rotating member (part of movable means)
6452 Second rotating member (part of movable means)
6460 Slide delay device (part of delay movable means)
7420 Rotational sorting device (part of first means, part of blocking member)
7422 2nd annulus member (part of blocking member)
7440 Specific area hole (part of specific area)
7441 First specific area hole (part of advantageous specific area)
7442 Second specific area hole (part of the first specific area)
7443 Third specific area hole (part of the second specific area)
7453 Screw member (part of contact inflow means)
R1 1st branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R2 2nd branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R3 3rd branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R4 special induction flow path (part of the first passage flow path, part of the second passage flow path, bridging flow path)
R5 1st delay induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R6 2nd delay induction flow path (part of the 2nd passage flow path)
RS1 Arc side (one side where the game ball is transmitted)
RS2 Arc side (one side where the game ball is transmitted)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that has a winning opening in the game area and can win a game ball in the winning opening (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-61177

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the game ball after it has flowed down to the winning opening.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a gaming ball that has flowed down to a winning opening can flow down satisfactorily.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game that enters the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for sorting whether a ball is discharged after passing through a specific area provided in the movable ball entry means or is discharged without passing through the specific area. The movable ball-entry means is provided with a double-ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all the gaming balls that have entered the movable ball-entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the winning opening.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the 1st flow device. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down device. It is a side view of the 1st flow-down device in the direction view of arrow VII of FIG. FIG. 7 is a top view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 7. It is a partial rear perspective view of the 1st flow device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution body. (A) to (c) are front views of the distribution body. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the 1st flow-down device. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). .. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) and (b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. It is a partial front view of the 2nd flow down device. (A) is a front view of the second flow-down device in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device in the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 40 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the second flow-down device. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device. It is a front view of the 1st flow-down device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 43 is a side view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow XLIV in FIG. 43. FIG. 4 is a top view of the first flow-down device in the direction of arrow XLV in FIG. 44. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the introduction passage. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device in line XLVIIa-XLVIIa of FIG. 43, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device in line XLVIIb-XLVIIb of FIG. 47 (a). .. FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device on the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47 (b). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the route distribution part in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LX-LX of FIG. 59 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 59 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXV-LXV of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down device in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the rolling floor device. (A) is a front view of the second flow-down device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annulus member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first ring member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd ring member in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85, and (c) is the second annulus member in the direction of arrow XCIc of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial internal view. FIG. 8 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). It is a partial top view of the 2nd flow-down device in the direction view of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXVc of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device in the CIa-CIa line of FIG. 85 (b). It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a small hit determination in the first random number counter and the first special symbol in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship with the value, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter in the first control example and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a game flow diagram which shows the flow of the game by the pachinko machine of this embodiment as an example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the left start winning opening or the right starting winning opening to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the middle start winning opening to the occurrence of the big hit game in this control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process which is executed in the special symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance passage process which is executed in the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot time accessory device operation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot time accessory device opening process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the content of the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed in the main process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp editing process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) or changing the effect content of the super reach. ..

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and two rails 61, 62. General winning opening 63, relatively large movable ball-entry accessory device 190, left-starting winning opening 26 arranged at the lower left position of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190, and middle-starting winning award arranged at the center position. The opening 28 and the right starting winning opening 27 arranged at the lower right position are provided, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The game ball thrown into the game area randomly enters the normal winning opening 63 in the process of its flow, or enters the left starting winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27. Or, it enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when it is activated (when it is open).

The game balls that have entered each winning opening are collected on the back side of the game board 13 through the through holes formed in the game board 13.

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is discharged after being sorted through processes such as flowing down, rolling, and rising inside the movable ball, and is collected on the back side of the game board 13. NS. The sorting operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The movable ball entry accessory device 190 is predetermined when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27). (When the special symbol of is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit), and enables the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 has a movable piece 190a (so-called blade member) provided at an upper position of the game area, and the movable piece 190a is, for example, a large opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 4). By the action of the link mechanism using the above, it reciprocates by a predetermined angle along the board surface.

As shown in the figure, the movable piece 190a is in a state in which the large winning opening switch 190b is closed in a substantially upright state, and therefore, the inflow of the game ball into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is always impossible. When the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated, the movable piece 190a is displaced so as to tilt in the left-right direction in the game area around the base end portion thereof, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened to perform the movable ball entry role. Allows the inflow of the game ball into the object device 190 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening switch 190b). Since the movable piece 190a and the large winning opening switch 190b are located at the upper position in the game area, particularly near the position where the game ball is first driven, they were driven into the game area when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 was operated. The game ball is guided by the nail at the upper position and easily reaches the movable piece 190a, and is guided by the movable piece 190a as it is and flows into the large winning opening switch 190b.

The movable ball entry accessory device 190 also operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball entry accessory device 190). , Allows entry into the grand prize opening switch 190b. The specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be described later.

In the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a first flow-down device 300 for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the above-mentioned large winning opening switch 190b, and a game that has passed through a fixed region arranged in the first flow-in device 300. A second flow-down device 400, which allows the sphere to flow down and distributes which specific region to pass through, is provided.

All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through the large winning opening switch 190b are guided to the inside of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through the introduction passage 310 of the first flow device 300. All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are detected by the large winning opening switch 190b.

Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a route distribution unit 320 is arranged following the introduction passage 310. The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of guiding the game ball to the normal route or the special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, it will be a big hit after that compared to the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. The probability of becoming is high. The details of the route distribution unit 320 will be described later.

Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a distribution inclination portion 350 is arranged following the route distribution portion 320. The distribution inclination portion 350 passes the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through a fixed region that is determined to be guided to a specific region, or is passed through a fixed region. Sort out whether to discharge without any problems.

Here, the "determined area" is an area that always passes before the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball eventually passes through the specific area. Will be done. However, when the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball has not yet passed through the specific area, so it is not a big hit in a strict sense, but from the player's point of view, the game ball may pass through the fixed area. , It will be a de facto big hit.

In any case, the distribution inclination portion 350 distributes whether the game ball passes through the fixed area or is discharged without passing through the fixed area. The details of the distribution inclination portion 350 will be described later.

Further, a second flow-down device 400 is arranged downstream of the first distribution inclination portion 350. The second flow-down device 400 distributes the game ball that has passed through the fixed region after passing through any specific region among the plurality of specific regions.

That is, in the previous distribution inclination portion 350, distribution was performed such as whether or not to pass through the fixed region, but in this second flow-down device 400, the game ball that has passed through the fixed region and the de facto big hit is confirmed. On the other hand, what kind of profit is to be given is sorted. The details of the second flow-down device 400 will be described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the middle starting winning opening 28, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, or stop symbols. The number of balls on hold is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery as to whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 passes through a specific area) is performed when a prize is given to the large winning opening switch 190b. .. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot are prepared. In the case of a jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B show symbols according to the jackpot type.

Here, the "16R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the "7R jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the "3R jackpot" is a jackpot. The maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls in a big hit. In the present embodiment, during one round, the movable piece 190a is tilted, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened, and the process ends when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b. Since there are 10 prize balls by passing one game ball through the large prize opening switch 190b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained in each round.

In the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340 (the fixed area switch 340a in the back, see FIG. 5), so that the prize ball is in the first round. There is no. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained in the 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be obtained in the 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be obtained in the 16R jackpot.

The time saving state (time saving medium) is a state of the game in which the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, and the ball easily wins the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which the time is not shortened (a state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is not increased).

In the present embodiment, a time saving switch 190d (on the front side of the discharge detection switch 190c) through which the game ball passes after passing through the specific area hole 440 is arranged, and the time saving state is caused by the game ball passing through the time saving switch 190d. Move to.

During the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. .. When the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 28a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the middle start winning opening 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b can be easily opened.

The time saving switch 190d is arranged so that only the game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the left end of the plurality of specific area holes 440 passes through. As will be described later, in the third specific area hole 443, a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) in which the player acquires the jackpot with the smallest profit (three round jackpot) among the specific area holes 440 is arranged. It is a hole.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball flowing down the second flow-down device 400 results in a jackpot with the smallest profit (three-round jackpot), the player is provided with an auxiliary benefit by giving a time reduction. Can be granted. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a larger profit than the 3-round jackpot, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessively large by not giving the time reduction.

In addition, during the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 28a is hit once. You may make a change to increase the number of times that is released than during normal times. Further, during the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time when the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 28a is opened per hit. One may be changed. In addition, during the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened at one time are not changed, only the probability of winning the second symbol. May be changed so as to increase compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In addition, a movable ball entry accessory device 190 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The movable ball-entry accessory device 190 is triggered by winning (starting winning) to the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A movable piece 190a that opens and closes, and a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 are provided. Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 28a of the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28.

It should be noted that, during the time reduction, the ball can easily win the middle start winning opening 28 during the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 28a for each hit. In the case of, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 28a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and is configured to allow a part of the ball launched on the game board to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the movable on. It may be performed by using a part of the ball accessory device 190. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembling position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and may be, for example, above the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 where a ball can win are arranged below the left and right of the movable ball winning accessory device 190. When the ball wins the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening are turned on. A lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the opening of the mouth switch 210b, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A, and the movable piece 190a is displayed a predetermined number of times (this). It opens once (once in the embodiment) and closes after a predetermined period (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 in the front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28, the middle starting winning opening switch 210c provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (FIG. 4) is caused by the turning on of the middle starting winning opening switch 210c. The lottery is performed (see), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B, and the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) (opening period). Is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second times is 2 seconds).

Each start winning opening 26, 27, 28 is drawn so as to be a small hit at 1/1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is no big hit lottery due to the game ball passing through each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28. After the lottery, after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds), the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times.

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the middle starting winning opening 28 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls win the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls win the middle starting winning opening 28 are different numbers, for example, the left and right starting winning prizes. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the openings 26 and 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the middle start winning opening 28 may be five.

An electric accessory 28a is attached to the middle start winning opening 28. The electric accessory 28a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 28a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the middle start winning opening 28.

As described above, during the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is short. Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 28a is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the prize in the middle start winning opening 28 than in the normal time.

The probability of becoming a 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is set higher when the ball wins the middle start winning opening 28 than when the ball wins the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27. (It is easy to put a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at once). On the other hand, the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 do not have the electric accessory as in the middle starting winning opening 28, and the ball can always win a prize.

A large winning opening switch 190b is arranged above the movable ball entry accessory device 190. In the pachinko machine 10, the game ball that has entered the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 has passed through the specific region hole 440 after winning the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28. When it becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is movablely turned on. It is displayed on a part of the ball accessory device 190 to indicate the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit, big hit game) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the movable piece 190a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening switch 190b is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening switch 190b can be repeated up to 15 times (16 rounds excluding the first round), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time. , While the large winning opening switch 190b is open, the large opening opening provided separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the large winning opening switch 190b. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the large winning opening switch 190b is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Instead, for example, it may be below the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 26, 27, 28, 63 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. In addition, all the game balls driven into the game area, including the game balls that have entered the movable ball entry accessory device 190, are collected on the back side of the game board 13. The recovered game ball is discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further joins a supply route of an island facility (not shown).

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described. The object of the game of the present embodiment is to pass the game ball through the specific region hole 440, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain the prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball and fires it on the upper surface portion of the center frame 86 so that the game ball slides down. As a result, when the game ball hits a large number of nails and enters each of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, the movable piece 190a is opened. At this time, if the game ball can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at the right time, the game ball passes through the specific region hole 440 depending on the subsequent flow of the game ball, so that the player can use the game ball. You can visually check the flow of the ball and enjoy watching the actual movement of the game ball to see if you can get a big hit or if it is out of the game.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the movable piece 190a, and the second condition is to allow the game ball to enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, the method of hitting the game ball so that it does not reach the center frame 86 (so-called "choro hitting") and the method of hitting it so that it reaches the return rubber 69 (so-called "right hitting") are used in order to obtain a big hit in this embodiment. Is at a disadvantage.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which a jackpot can be easily obtained by simultaneously entering two game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end (triangular apex portion) of the center frame 86 to disperse the game ball to the left and right, and when the movable piece 190b is opened, 1 from the left and right. Aiming to enter two balls in total, one by one, this makes it possible to play a game so that a big hit can be easily obtained.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and drawing the display result on the second symbol display device.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of a movable piece 190a of a large winning opening switch 190b. Various solenoid motors 209 including a large opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing rotation to the left and right, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving the electric accessory 28a, or a motor are connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

The various direct switches 210, which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly related to the profit given to the player, are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input / output port 205.

The various solenoid motors 209 are at least for opening / closing and rotating the large opening solenoid 209a for driving the opening and closing rotation to the left and right around the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the large winning opening switch 190b and the electric accessory 28a. It includes an electric accessory solenoid 209b, a retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) that drives the flow blocking plate 412, and a drive motor 421b (see FIG. 23) that drives the movable plate 421a.

The various direct switches 210 include a left start winning opening switch 210a (see FIG. 2), a right starting winning opening switch 210b (see FIG. 2), a middle starting winning opening switch 210c (see FIG. 2), and a first specific area switch. 441a (see FIG. 23), a second specific area switch 442a (see FIG. 23), and a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) are included.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as various solenoid motors 209, motors, and the like. Voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are set to the required voltage for each control device 110 to 114 and the like. Supply.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

5 to 9 are views showing the details of the configuration of the first flow-down device 300, FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the first flow-down device 300, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the first flow-down device 300. 7A and 7B are side views of the first flow-down device 300 in the arrow VII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a top view of the first flow-down device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. FIG. 9 is a partial rear perspective view of the first flow device 300.

In addition, in FIGS. 5 and 6, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 320 is omitted (that is, the game ball is inside the introduction passage 310). And, it flows down the inside of the route distribution unit 320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (front side in FIG. 5).

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the first flow-down device 300 includes a pair of introduction passages 310 in which a game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) is guided, and the terminal positions of the introduction passages 310. A route distribution unit 320 that is connected to the introduction passage 310 at (center position in the left-right direction) and allows the game ball to flow down, a distribution inclination unit 330 that causes the game ball sent from the route distribution unit 320 to flow forward, and a distribution inclination unit 330 thereof. A fixed area hole 340 and a fixed area hole 340 that are large enough to accommodate one game ball arranged on the front side of the distribution inclined portion 330 at the center of the distribution inclined portion 330 in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an out-of-hole hole 350 that is larger than the fixed region hole 340 at a position deviated from the left and right.

The introduction passage 310 is a passage formed symmetrically with an inner diameter through which the game ball can pass, and is inclined downward toward the route distribution portion 320 arranged in the center, and the terminal position (route distribution) thereof. A first protruding portion 311 and a second protruding portion 312 are provided on the connecting portion with the portion 320).

The first protrusion 311 is a protrusion that protrudes upward in the front-rear width direction of the introduction passage 310. The game ball decelerates by coming into contact with the first protruding portion 311.

The second protruding portion 312 is an inclined surface portion that limits the flow direction of the game ball thrown from the introduction passage 310 toward the route distribution portion 320, and is connected to the bottom surface of the outlet of the introduction passage 310 and descends in the left-right direction. It is extended in an inclined manner.

The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of distributing the approaching game ball to a normal flow path (normal route) or a special flow path (special route). Further, the route distribution unit 320 is a pair of special routes that are opened in the left-right direction of the route distribution unit guide path 321, the distribution body 322 that rotates when the game ball comes into contact with the route distribution unit guide path 321 and the distribution body 322. The special route guide path 325 that allows the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323, the normal route hole 324 that is opened rearward below the distribution body 322, and the special route hole 323 to flow down toward the distribution inclination portion 350. A normal route guide path 326 that allows a game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to flow down toward the taxiing inclined portion 350 is mainly provided.

The route distribution section guide path 321 is a passage extending vertically downward for guiding the game balls from the introduction passage 310 to the distribution body 322, and is formed with a width capable of arranging two game balls side by side side by side. ..

The distribution body 322 is a member that is rotatably supported by the shaft, and is located below the rotation shaft in a balanced state (see FIG. 6). It mainly includes a plate-shaped portion 322b extending from the position in the direction passing through the rotation axis (upper in FIG. 5) and integrally formed with the fan-shaped portion 322a.

As shown in FIG. 6, the fan-shaped portion 322a has a shape for guiding (flowing) the game ball into the special route hole 323 in an equilibrium state (a shape in which the left and right flat portions extend toward the special route hole 323). Will be done.

The plate-shaped portion 322b is the second when the distribution body 322 is placed in a state between the first angle state (see FIG. 11B) and the second angle state (see FIG. 11C), which will be described later. The distance between the two protrusions 312 is extended to a length that is at least equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The special route hole 323 is a through hole formed in the side wall of the route distribution portion 320, and is arranged as a pair of through holes opened in the left-right direction of the distribution body 322. The special route hole 323 guides the game ball that has entered the special route hole 323 to the special route guide path 325. The special route guide path 325 is provided with special route switches 325a1,325b1, and the game ball that has entered the special route hole 323 is detected by the special route switch 325a1,325b1.

The normal route hole 324 is a through hole formed in the back wall portion in the vicinity of the bottom wall portion of the route distribution portion 320. The normal route hole 324 is formed with a ridge portion 324a at the center thereof to reduce the opening height. Since the opening height of the central portion of the normal route hole 324 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball by the ridge portion 324a, the game ball avoids the central portion of the normal route hole 324 and is left and right of the normal route hole 324. Pass through the edge.

The special route guide path 325 includes a left guide path 325a and a right guide path 325b extending from the pair of special route holes 323, respectively, and they are formed symmetrically and asymmetrically in the front-rear direction.

That is, the left guide path 325a is provided with a left detection switch 325a1 that detects the passage of the game ball inside the left guide path 325a, extends toward the front side, and then extends vertically downward, while the right guide path 325b thereof. It is equipped with a right detection switch 325b1 that detects the passage of the game ball inside, and extends vertically downward without extending to the front side. By making the front and rear arrangements different in this way, when the game balls pass through the pair of special route holes 323 at the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls landing on the distribution inclination portion 330 from colliding in the left-right direction. Can be done. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special route guide path 325 can easily pass through the fixed region.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 are sensors that detect the passage of the game ball. By confirming the detection signals of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to determine how many balls the game ball has passed through the special route.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 may be used as an opportunity to execute the effect. For example, when the game balls pass through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds in the present embodiment), a plurality of game balls subsequently pass through the fixed region hole 340, which is more advantageous. Since it is easy to be a big hit, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, the player's interest can be enhanced by performing a violent agitation (violent light emission, sound effect). ..

On the other hand, when the game ball is detected only by one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 due to the irregular flow of the game ball, even if the game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340, which jackpot will be subsequently received. Since it is unclear whether it will be (whether it will be a big hit on the side with a large number of prize balls), it is possible to slightly enhance the interest of the player by performing a modest fanning (modest light emission, sound effect).

Further, for example, when it is repeatedly detected that a game ball enters one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 (for example, it is detected three times in a row), an error of fixing the distribution body 322 in some way is performed. It is possible to suppress the player's fraud by determining that the game is being performed and issuing an error.

Since the exit of the special route guide path 325 is arranged near the front end of the taxiing slope 330, the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 hits the protrusion 331 of the taxiing slope 330. It flows down toward the center of the front without touching.

The normal route guide path 326 extends rearward from the left and right end portions of the normal route hole 324 while inclining outward in the left-right direction, and extends vertically downward at the rear end portion thereof. Since the exit of the normal route guide path 326 is located near the rear end of the taxiing slope 330, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 hits the protrusion 331 of the taxiing slope 330. While touching, it flows down toward the front side.

The distribution inclined portion 330 is an inclined surface portion in which the cross section of the plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction is formed from the sunken curved shape of the central portion, and a plurality of protrusions 331 are scattered and convexly provided on the middle portion.

A plurality of the protrusions 331 are arranged so as to be inclined toward the left and right ends toward the front side, and have a gap about the diameter of the game ball in the intermediate portion. Therefore, most of the game balls discharged from the normal route guide path 326 are flown toward the left and right ends by the protrusions 331, while some game balls pass through the gap and head toward the fixed region hole 340.

The protrusion 331 is arranged behind the position where the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 abuts on the distribution inclination portion 330 (upstream side of the distribution inclination portion 330). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the special route guide path 325 can flow down to the front side while heading toward the center along the curved shape of the taxiing inclined portion 330 without colliding with the protrusion 331. It becomes easy to pass through the region hole 340.

On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 flows down the distribution inclined portion 330 while colliding with the protrusion 331, so whether or not it passes through the fixed region hole 340 is random in the flow of the game ball. It is left to sex. In the present embodiment, since the gap holes 350 arranged on the left and right of the fixed region hole 340 are opened larger than the fixed region hole 340, the game ball discharged from the normal route guide path 326 can easily pass through the gap hole 350. Become.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special route guide path 325 can easily pass through the fixed region hole 340 as compared with the game ball passing through the normal route guide path 326. ..

The game ball that has entered the fixed area hole 340 will then pass through the fixed area, and the game ball that has entered the outlier hole 350 will be discharged without passing through the specific area thereafter. Become.

Here, the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the fixed area, and the game ball passing through the fixed area is detected by the fixed area switch 340a. Further, an out passage (not shown) is formed at the lower edge of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the outlier hole 350 without entering the fixed area hole 340 is guided to the out passage and is discharged from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the fixed area or the specific area. NS. Then, the game ball flowing down the out passage is configured to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c, and the game ball passing through the out passage is detected by the discharge detection switch 190c. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 also joins the out passage and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c.

The discharge detection switch 190c detects the difference in the number of detected balls from the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b, and the difference disappears within a predetermined period (for example, within 15 seconds), so that the game can be played stably. It is a switch to confirm that it has been damaged. For example, when the game balls are deposited on the protrusions 331 of the distribution inclination portion 330 and the discharge of the game balls is delayed, it is possible to determine that the discharge error of the game balls has occurred and issue an alarm.

The distribution body 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution body 322, and FIGS. 11A to 11C are front views of the distribution body 322. In addition, in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11A, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and in FIG. 11B, the first distribution body 322 is rotated clockwise by the first angle θ1 from the equilibrium state. The angular state is illustrated, and FIG. 11C shows a second angle state in which the distribution body 322 is rotated clockwise by a second angle θ2 from the first angle state. Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c), a partial cross-sectional view at an intermediate position in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 11) of the distribution body 322 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution body 322 is a pair of annular connecting rings that connect the above-mentioned fan-shaped portion 322a, the plate-shaped portion 322b, and the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b at the front and rear ends. It has an inner circumference of the portion 322c and the inner circumference of the connecting ring portion 322c and an inner circumference serving as a surface position, and is extended in the front-rear direction (axial direction of the distribution body 322) between the pair of connecting ring portions 322c. A resistance extension portion 322d whose cross section perpendicular to the extension direction is formed from a split ring shape in which the ring is divided in half and a pair of connection ring portions 322c are connected in a phase range in which the resistance extension portion 322d is not formed. A rod-shaped member that communicates with a pair of connecting ring portions 322c and a separation center portion 322e that is recessed outward in the radial direction from the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 322c, and is formed on the back side wall of the root distribution portion 320. It mainly includes a shaft support rod 322f to be fixed.

The shaft support rod 322f is a member that is adhesively fixed to the back side wall of the root distribution portion 320 and extends to the vicinity of the front side wall (not shown), and is composed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting ring portion 322c. It is provided with a pair of shaft support cylinders 322f1 and a connecting rod portion 322f2 which is a rod-shaped member connecting the shaft support cylinders 322f1 and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the cross-sectional shape of the shaft support cylinders 322f1.

The pair of axial support column portions 322f1 are arranged coaxially, and the separation interval in the axial direction is the same as the separation interval of the connecting ring portion 322c. As a result, since the pair of connecting ring portions 322c can be supported by the pair of axial support cylindrical portions 322f1, the axial support state can be stabilized, and the rotational state of the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b is stabilized. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod portion 322f2 has a lower substantially half-circumferential portion at the outer circumference and a surface position of the shaft support columnar portion 322f1, and an upper substantially half-circumferential portion is recessed inward in the radial direction. The purpose will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b), the state in which the distribution body 322 is between the equilibrium state (see FIG. 11 (a)) and the first angle state (see FIG. 11 (b)). In this case, since the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d are separated from each other, frictional resistance is generated between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d even if the distribution body 322 starts to rotate. No. Therefore, in the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the distribution body 322 can be easily rotated (rotational resistance can be suppressed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11 (b) and 11 (c), the distribution body 322 is in the first angle state (see FIG. 11 (b)) and the second angle state (see FIG. 11 (c)). In the case of a state between The resulting frictional resistance can be increased. Therefore, the distribution body 322 can be made harder to rotate (rotational resistance can be increased) as compared with the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state.

Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 can be quickly rotated at the start of contact, and the distribution body 322 can be rotated in a manner in which the momentum of rotation gradually weakens.

The distribution operation of the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 22. First, a case where one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 (a), 12 (b) and 13 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. The equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 12A, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 12B, and the second angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. At the same time, the flow of the game ball A1 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 flowing down the introduction passage 310 gets over the first protrusion 311 while abutting on the first protrusion 311 to reduce the speed in the left-right direction, and the second protrusion 311. It flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the portion 312. Therefore, the game ball A1 is prevented from being swiftly thrown to the left from the introduction passage 310 and overcoming the distribution body 322, and landing on the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (position close to the special route hole 323). Is prevented.

When the game ball A1 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 12A, the game ball A1 flows down along the arrow A1x shown in FIG. 12B, and then flows down. It rolls along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322a and reaches the position shown in FIG. 12B (the position close to the special route hole 323).

Here, since the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is reduced from the equilibrium state shown in FIG. 12A to the first angle state shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 becomes the distribution body 322. By landing, the distribution body 322 rotates by the weight of the game ball A1. Therefore, the game ball A1 is suppressed (absorbed) from bouncing from the distribution body 322 and flows down in a manner of pushing the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a until the distribution body 322 is in the first angle state (about 0.5 seconds in the present embodiment). Then, it flows down to the lower right and reaches the front side (left side of FIG. 12B) of the special route hole 323. In this state, since the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game ball A1 is mounted) is sunk below the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323, the game ball A1 passes through the special route hole 323. Is prevented from doing.

After that, the distribution body 322 is further rotated by the load given from the game ball A1 to reach the second angle state shown in FIG. 13 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), so that the game ball A1 is moved from the distribution body 322. It falls down and heads for the normal route hole 324.

That is, when one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution unit 320, the game ball A1 passes through the normal route hole 324.

Next, a case where two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution unit 320 from the left and right at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. 14 (a), 14 (b) and 15 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. In addition, in FIG. 14A, FIG. 14B and FIG. 15, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and the flow of the game balls A2 and A3 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the game balls A2 and A3 flowing down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A2 and A3 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

When the game balls A2 and A3 roll on the upper surface of the second protrusion 312a and flow down from the state shown in FIG. 14 (a), the game balls A2 and A3 become the arrows A1x and A2x shown in FIG. 14 (b). After flowing down along the line, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. The arrow A2x is an arrow in the direction in which the arrow A1x is horizontally inverted.

Here, since the load in the rotation direction about the shaft support rod 322f given to the distribution body 322 is balanced, the rotation of the distribution body 322 is suppressed, and the distribution body 322 maintains an equilibrium state. While the game balls A2 and A3 flow down to the left and right along the inclination of the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, the game balls A2 and A3 have the same flow mode, so that the distribution body 322 is maintained in an equilibrium state. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game balls A2 and A3 are mounted) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game ball. A2 and A3 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at the same time, the game balls A2 and A3 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, a case where the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing slightly deviated from the left and right (for example, a timing deviated by 0.5 seconds) will be described. do. 16 (a), 16 (b), 17 (a), 17 (b) and 18 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. In addition, in FIG. 16A, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, in FIG. 16B, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and in FIG. 17A, the distribution body 322 is the first. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 17B, the distribution body 322 is a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, and in FIG. 18, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown. However, the flow of the game balls A4 and A5 is shown in chronological order.

In the present embodiment, since the opening period of the movable piece 190b is 0.5 seconds, the game ball that enters with one opening does not have a time delay of 0.5 seconds or more. Is an example in which the game balls are displaced by the maximum deviation width (for example, one game ball A4 enters immediately after the opening of the movable piece 190b, and the other game ball A5 enters immediately before the movable piece 190b is closed. It is an example of a ball).

As shown in FIG. 16A, the game balls A4 and A5 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A4 and A5 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

When the game ball A4 rolls down on the upper surface of the second protruding portion 312a from the state shown in FIG. 16A, it flows down along the arrow A1x and then lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Then, the distribution body 322 rotates clockwise to enter the first angle state shown in FIG. 16 (b).

From the state shown in FIG. 16B until the game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A4. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed slows down, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period of can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A4 from falling out of the distribution body 322 because the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state before the later game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the game ball A5 lands on the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation directions are balanced (cancelled). , As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the distribution body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, as the loads applied from the game balls A4 and A5 to the distribution body 322 are balanced, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state as shown in FIG. 18, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (game ball). The surface on which A2 and A3 are placed) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without steps), and the game balls A4 and A5 flow into the special route hole 323. NS.

That is, when the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route distribution portion 320 at a timing slightly deviated, the game balls A4 and A5 pass through the special route hole 323. As described above, even if the plurality of game balls arrive with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, which is the opening period of the movable piece 190a, the distribution body 322 in the phone embodiment absorbs the deviation and absorbs the deviation to form the special route hole. It is configured in such a manner that a game ball can be thrown to 323.

Next, a case where two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 in succession from one side will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19 (a), 19 (b), 20 (a) and 20 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. Note that the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 19A, the first angle state of the distribution body 322 is shown in FIG. 19B, and the distribution body 322 is the first in FIG. 20A. As a state between the angle state and the second angle state, in FIG. 20B, the distribution body 322 is illustrated as a state between the first angle state and the equilibrium state, respectively, and the game balls A6, respectively. The flow of A7 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the game balls A6 and A7 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 get over the first protrusion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by abutting on the first protrusion 311. 2 Flows downward (toward the shaft support rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the protrusion 312.

Therefore, the game balls A6 and A7 are prevented from being vigorously thrown from the introduction passage 310 in the left-right direction and overcoming the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). It is prevented from landing on.

Further, when the game balls A6 and A7 flow down the introduction passage 310 in a row, the game balls A6 come into contact with the first protruding portion 311 and are decelerated, behind the game balls A6 (right side in FIG. 19A). The game ball A7 is decelerated while abutting on the game ball A6, and after the game ball A6 passes over the first protruding portion 311 and flows down again, the game ball A7 abuts on the first protruding portion 311 and is decelerated. As a result, a space is provided between the first game ball A6 and the second game ball A7 (in the present embodiment, about 1 second).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19B, after the game ball A6 flows down along the arrow A1x, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, and after rotating the distribution body 322 to the first angle state, It is said that the state is in the process of getting over the first protruding portion 311.

From the state shown in FIG. 19B until the game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 further rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A6. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotation resistance of the distribution body 322 increases and the rotation speed slows down, so that the distribution body 322 reaches the second angle state. The period of can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A6 from falling off from the distribution body 322 because the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state before the later game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the distribution body 322 is further rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball A6, so that the tip of the plate-shaped portion 322b approaches the second protruding portion 312 on the right side. .. In this state, the game ball A7 rolls down on the inclined surface of the second protrusion 312 along the arrow A1x, thereby rolling on the upper surface of the plate-shaped portion 322b, and the game ball A7 of the distribution body 322. Land on the left side. That is, the plate-shaped portion 322b can distribute the game balls A6 and A7 to the left and right of the distribution body 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball A7 flows down by the second protruding portion 312 at a speed toward the rotation center of the distribution body 311, the rotation angle of the plate-shaped portion 322b is insufficient (for example, FIG. 19 (FIG. 19). Even if the game ball A7 flows downward from the second protruding portion 312 in the state shown in b)), the game ball A7 is supported by the tip portion (between the second protruding portion 312) of the plate-shaped portion 322b. Then, by further rotating the distribution body 322 clockwise, the game ball A7 can be surely flowed down to the left of the distribution body 322.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the game ball A7 lands on the left side portion of the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation directions are balanced (cancelled). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the distribution body 322 approaches the equilibrium state. Further, the loads applied to the distribution bodies 322 such as the game balls A6 and A57 are balanced, so that the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state. The surface) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game balls A6 and A7 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution unit 320 in succession from one side, the game balls A6 and A7 pass through the special route hole 323.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a case where the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing (in the present embodiment, about 2 seconds) that is significantly deviated will be described. In such a state, for example, the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice by one operation trigger, and one game ball is opened each time the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened. ) Is formed when the ball is entered.

21 (a), 21 (b) and 22 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. Note that FIG. 21A shows the second angle state of the distribution body 322, and FIG. 21B shows the distribution body 322 as a state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Then, the equilibrium state of the distribution body 322 is shown, and the flow of the game balls A8 and A9 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the distribution body 322 is in the second angle state due to the load of the game ball A8, and after the game ball A8 is dropped off, the distribution body 322 starts to rotate toward the equilibrium state. However, since the rotation resistance is increased between the second angle state and the first angle state, the distribution body 322 rotates slowly.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in the state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Here, since the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is large, the operation of the game ball A9 pushing the distribution body 322 as in the case of landing on the distribution body 322 in the equilibrium state does not occur, but the game ball A9 Bounces on the inclined surface of the distribution body 322, and an operation in which the angular state of the distribution body 322 is maintained between the first angle state and the second angle state occurs.

Therefore, as soon as the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 does not pass the equilibrium state and the distribution body 322 faces the opposite side to the left and right, and the distribution body 322 rotates slowly. Therefore, after arranging the game ball A9 on the side close to the special route hole 323 (the left and right end sides of the fan-shaped portion 322a) along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322b, the distribution body 322 is brought to an equilibrium state. Can be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22B, the game ball A9 can flow into the special route hole 323 at the same time when the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state.

That is, when the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution unit 320 at a timing (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the previous game ball A8 passes through the normal route hole 324. , The later game ball A9 passes through the special route hole 323.

In order to achieve this, in the present embodiment, the game ball abuts on the distribution body 322 to change the state of the distribution body 322 from the equilibrium state to the second angle state, and then returns to the first angle state. The period (about 4 seconds) is set to be equal to or longer than the interval (2 seconds in the present embodiment) from closing to opening when the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice.

In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds to 5 for the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to reach the fixed region hole 340 through the normal route guide path 326 and the taxiing inclined portion 330. Designed to fit in a second. Further, the period required for the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323 to reach the fixed region hole 340 after passing through the special route guide path 325 and the taxiing inclined portion 330 is set to 2 to 3 seconds. Designed.

That is, for example, in FIG. 21 (a), when both the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340, the game ball A8 has a fixed region about 4 to 5 seconds after the state of FIG. 21 (a). After reaching the hole 340, the game ball A9 is about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), and about 2 to 3 seconds after the state of FIG. 21 (b) (FIG. From the state of 21 (a), the confirmed region hole 340 is reached in 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds (after about 1 second, the equilibrium state is reached, and then 1.5 to 2.5 seconds after that, the confirmed region hole is confirmed. Reach the region hole 340). Therefore, the game balls A8 and A9 reach the fixed region hole 340 with a deviation of at most 2.5 seconds.

In this way, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 by one small hit lottery, the maximum deviation interval when those game balls reach the fixed area hole 340 is It is set to about 2.5 seconds. Based on this, the extension period of the residence solenoid 413 of the second flow-down device 400, which will be described later, is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reliably carry out that a plurality of game balls are retained by the flow-down blocking plate 412 and then flowed down again.

Next, the second flow-down device 400 in which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) of the first flow-down device 300 flows down will be described.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 400, and FIG. 24 is a front view of the second flow-down device 400. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the second flow-down device 400 is a device composed of a plurality of branched flow paths and allowing a game ball that has passed through a fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) to flow down, and the flow path is a device. The first branch region 410 that branches into two and the region where the game ball that has flowed down the second branch guide flow path R2, which is the upper flow path branched in the first branch region 410, reaches, and the flow path is The game ball that has flowed down the second branch region 420 that branches into two and the third branch guide flow path R3 that is the lower flow path branched in the first branch region 410 arrives and the second branch flow path 420. A third branch area 430, which is a region reached by a game ball flowing down a special induction flow path R4, which is a flow path on the front side branched in, and the flow path branches into two, and a plurality of game balls are discharged. The specific basin holes 440 and the guide flow paths R1 to R6 for guiding the game ball are connected to the branch regions 410 to 430.

The first branch guide flow path R1 is a flow path in which the game ball that has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is guided, and after extending downward to the right, the direction slightly deviates from the vertical direction to the right (see FIG. 5). It is a flow path that extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the lower right) and is connected to the first branch region 410 from above. That is, the game ball flows into the first branch region 410 along a direction slightly deviating to the right from the vertical direction (diagonally lower right direction). In the present embodiment, the first branch guide flow path R1 is configured to discharge the inflowing game ball to the first branch region 410 in a maximum of 3 seconds.

The second branch guide flow path R2 is an upper flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and is connected to the second branch region 420 from the right side after extending to the lower left.

The third branch guide flow path R3 is a lower flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side and then descends and inclines to the left. After extending vertically and further downward, it is connected to the third branch region 430 from above.

The special guide flow path R4 is a flow path on the front side branched from the second branch region 420, and after extending vertically downward, joins the portion of the third branch guide flow path R3 extending in the vertical direction from above. do. After the game ball flows into the special induction flow path R4, it takes 1 second to reach the distribution protrusion 431 and the game ball flows to either the left or right flow path.

The first delay induction flow path R5 is a flow path on the right side branched from the third branch area 430, extends downward to the lower right, and a second specific area hole 442 is arranged at the lower end portion.

The second delay induction flow path R6 is a flow path on the back surface side branched from the second branch region 420, extends downward to the left, and a third specific region hole 443 is arranged at the left end portion.

As shown in FIG. 24, the third branch guide flow path R3 has a longer path than the second branch guide flow path R2, while the inclination angle is increased. Therefore, the flow-down position (left-right position) of the game ball flowing down the respective induction flow paths R2 and R3 can be made uniform. In the present embodiment, two game balls that are simultaneously sent from the first branch region 410 to the second branch guidance flow path R2 and the third branch guidance flow path R3 are stopped at the second branch guidance flow path R2. The shape of the flow path is designed so that the ball comes into contact with the special guide flow path R4 in the vertical direction at the confluence position.

As shown in FIG. 24, the first delay guidance flow path R5 has a larger inclination angle and a shorter extension length than the second delay guidance flow path R6. That is, compared to the case where the game ball passes through the first delay guidance flow path R5 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), the case where the game ball passes through the second delay guidance flow path R6 (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment). (5 seconds), the staying time of the game ball is longer. A plurality of deceleration protrusions for decelerating the game ball are provided on the bottom surface of each of the guide flow paths R5 and R6.

The specific region hole 440 is a first specific region hole 441 arranged in the left flow path branched from the third branch region 430 and a second specific region hole 441 arranged in the lower end portion of the first delay induction flow path R5. It mainly includes a region hole 442 and a third specific region hole 443 arranged at the left end of the second delay induction flow path R6.

The first specific area hole 441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 441a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 441a.

The second specific area hole 442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 442a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the second specific area hole 442 and the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 442a.

The third specific area hole 443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 443a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the third specific area hole 443 and the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 443a.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area and the game ball passes through the first specific area while the effect of the three-round jackpot is being executed. , The game ball is invalid (since the 3R jackpot process is already running, it does not interrupt), and the 16-round jackpot production is not executed. Therefore, it was a cause of dissatisfaction of the player. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball can pass through a plurality of specific areas, the game ball first passes through the specific area having the greatest benefit to the player. NS. The details will be described later.

The configuration of the first branch region 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 25, the first branch region 410 comes into contact with the game ball flowing down the first branch guide flow path R1 from the right side, and the contact wall 411 reflects the game ball toward the second branch flow path R2. The flow prevention is configured so that it can appear and disappear in a mode of switching between the overhanging state of the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 and the retracted state of sinking to the outside. It includes a plate 412 and a retention solenoid 413 that drives the flow-down prevention plate 412 and is arranged on the back surface side of the second branch guide flow path R2.

The contact wall 411 is a side wall having a length equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball and extending vertically upward. As a result, the distribution of the game balls can be changed depending on whether the number of game balls approaching the contact wall 411 is one or two or more. A state in which the contact wall 411 distributes the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

In the overhanging state, the flow blocking plate 412 narrows the size of the opening inside the second branch guide flow path R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3 to the diameter of the game ball or less, and stops the game ball. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the flow blocking plate 412 sinks to the outside of the second branch guide flow path R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3, so that the game ball is released from stopping.

That is, by keeping the flow-down blocking plate 412 in the overhanging state, the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 and has reached the left side of the contact wall 411 can be temporarily stopped, and then the game ball can be temporarily stopped. By switching the driving state of the staying solenoid 413 to put the flow blocking plate 412 in the retracted state, the game ball can be thrown to the left. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball is thrown downward from the vicinity of the contact wall 411 can be arbitrarily specified depending on the control of the staying solenoid 413.

26 (a) to 26 (c) are partial front views of the second flow device 400 in the range XXV of FIG. 24. It should be noted that in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first specific area 410 in chronological order, and in FIG. 26 (a), the appearance is shown first. The state immediately before the entered game ball B1 abuts on the contact wall 411 is illustrated, and in FIG. 26B, the later entered game ball B2 abuts on the game ball B1 and is pushed to the right. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 26C, the game balls B1 and B2 are separated, the game ball B1 flows into the second branch guide flow path R2, and the game ball B2 flows into the third branch guide flow path R3, respectively. Is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the flow prevention plate 412 is shown in an overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the above-mentioned game ball B1 flows down the first branch guide flow path R1 toward the lower right along the extending direction thereof, and collides with the contact wall 411 on the right side surface. After landing on the bottom plate of the second branch guide flow path R2, the second branch guide flow path R2 flows down to the left.

At this time, the game ball B1 starts to flow down from the state where the speed in the left-right direction is suppressed (the state where it lands) to the second branch guide flow path R2 toward the left. Then, at the position where it bounces to the left from the contact wall 411 (see FIG. 26B), the flow is blocked by the flow blocking plate 412 and stays there for a while.

Since the later game ball B2 flows into the first branch region 410 while the game ball B1 is staying, the game ball B2 comes into contact with the game ball B1 before it comes into contact with the contact wall 411. At the time of this contact, the game ball B1 is arranged at a position slightly shifted to the left from the position where it abuts on the contact wall 411, and the game ball B2 hits the game ball B1 from above on the right side of the center of the game ball B1. Touch. Therefore, a load is applied from the game ball B1 to the game ball B2 in the right direction due to the contact.

Further, since the game ball B2 has a velocity component in the lower right direction along the extending direction of the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball B2 moves to the right after coming into contact with the game ball B1. Here, since the extended height of the contact wall 411 is shorter than the diameter of the game balls B1 and B2, the game ball B2 can be moved to the right while overcoming the contact wall 411. As a result, the game ball B2 flows down the third branch guide flow path R3, is prevented from flowing down by the flow-down blocking plate 412 below the game ball B1, and stays there for a while.

The retention solenoid 413 is a period required from when the game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guide flow path R1 until the game ball B2 reaches the flow blocking plate 412 of the third branch guide flow path R3 (this). In the embodiment, when a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) sufficiently longer than (3 seconds) elapses, the drive state is switched and the evacuation state is set. Therefore, even if the intervals at which the two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guidance flow path R1 are different, the flow start timing when the game balls B1 and B2 stop once and then start flowing down again. And the flow start position can be fixed.

When the two game balls B1 and B2 are collectively entered into the first branch region 410, the later game balls B2 are entered into the third branch guide flow path R3, which is more advantageous than the second branch guide flow path R2. be able to. On the other hand, when the game balls enter the first branch region 410 one by one, the game balls enter the third branch guidance flow path R3 by being blocked by the contact wall 411 no matter how many times the ball enters the first branch region 410. Inflow is prevented.

Therefore, the way in which the game balls are branched can be changed depending on the number of game balls that collectively enter the first branch area 410, and when two game balls collectively enter the first branch area 410. Both of them can be prevented from flowing into the second branch induction flow path R2.

As described above in FIGS. 12 to 20, when two game balls enter the first flow-down device 300 as a stage before the game balls flow into the first branch region 410, the two game balls Is thrown into the special route hole 323 at almost the same timing and flows down to the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 5). This is a situation that occurs with a high probability if two game balls enter the one flow device 300 together.

27 (a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXVIIa of FIG. 24, and FIG. 27 (b) is a second flow-down device 400 in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of. In addition, in FIG. 27 (a) and FIG. 27 (b), the region corresponding to the second branch region 420 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (b), the second branch region 420 is arranged at a position where the game ball passing through the second branch guide flow path R2 comes into contact with the second branch region 420, and performs a constant reciprocating swing operation. The distribution operation device 421, the special area hole 422 through which the game balls distributed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27 (a)) by the distribution operation device 421 pass, and the back side (FIG. 27) by the distribution operation device 421. The first delay preparation hole 423 through which the game balls distributed to 27 (a) upper side pass, and the prevention wall portion 424 that prevents the game balls distributed by the distribution operation device 421 from going to the opposite side. Mainly prepare.

The distribution operation device 421 generates a movable plate 421a rotatably supported near the outlet position of the first branch guide flow path R2 and a driving force for driving the movable plate 421a, and generates a driving force to drive the movable plate 421a, and generates a flange of the second flow-down device 400. It mainly includes a drive motor 421b fixed to a portion (not shown).

The movable plate 421a is provided with a rotation shaft that is in contact with the right side of the prevention wall portion 424 and extends in the vertical direction at a position that is tangent to the central axis of the second branch guide flow path R2, and the extension direction of the movable plate 421a is the second branch guide. A mode in which a predetermined angle (45 ° in this embodiment) is swung back and forth (up and down in FIG. 27 (a)) with reference to a state along the central axis of the flow path R2 (a state shown by a solid line in FIG. 27 (a)). Rotate back and forth with. The rotation operation is an operation that is continued from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (except when the power is turned off or other power failure) to when the power is cut off, and it reciprocates once in 2 seconds (rotation of 90 ° one way). The speed mode is about 1 second).

In the present embodiment, the movable plate 421a is placed between the pair of reference straight lines L1 with the pair of reference straight lines L1 connecting the rotation axis of the movable plate 421a and the front and rear side wall ends of the second branch guide flow path R2 as a boundary. The state in which the movable plates 421a are arranged is referred to as a retention state of the movable plates 421a, and a state in which the movable plates 421a are arranged outside the pair of reference straight lines L1 including a state in which the pair of reference straight lines L1 and the longitudinal directions of the movable plates 421a coincide with each other. It is referred to as a passable state of the movable plate 421a.

The special region hole 422 guides the passing game ball to the special guide flow path R4. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27 (a)) by the movable plate 421a falls vertically downward while flowing from the special guidance flow path R4 into the third branch guidance flow path R3. It flows into the third branch region 430.

On the other hand, the special region hole 423 guides the passing game ball to the second delay guidance flow path R6. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 27A) by the movable plate 421a passes through the second delay guidance flow path R6 and passes through the third specific region hole 443.

FIG. 28 is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24. In FIG. 28, the region corresponding to the third branch region 430 is shown. As shown in FIG. 28, the third branch region 430 is a region in which the game ball that has passed through the third branch guidance flow path R3 enters from above, and is the third region from the exit position of the third branch guidance flow path R3. A distribution protrusion 431 is provided which is projected vertically upward at a position where the central axis of the branch guide flow path R3 is extended.

The distribution protrusion 431 is formed from a mountain shape that is symmetrical with respect to a line extending the central axis of the third branch guide flow path R3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 has a center vertically above the center of the distribution protrusion 431 at the start of contact with the distribution protrusion 431. Therefore, the probability of distributing the game ball to the left and right is 50% (50% each).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 39, some aspects in which the game balls B1 and B2 pass through the second branch region 420 and the third branch region 430 will be described separately for each case. First, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, a case where the game ball B1a flows down in the second branch region 420 without staying and passes through the special region hole 422 will be described.

29 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 29 (b) is a portion of the second flow device 400 in the direction of arrow XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a). Top view, FIG. 30 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 30 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, and FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24. In addition, in FIG. 29 (a), FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 30 (a), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31 (b), two pieces are collectively included in the first branch region 410. The state in which the balled game balls B1a and B2a flow down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), when the movable plate 421a opens the special area hole 422 side when the game ball B1a reaches the second branch region 420, the passage is allowed to pass. As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the game ball B1a reaches the special region hole 422 and falls into the special region hole 422 without decelerating in particular.

Here, the flow of the game balls B1a and B2a from the first branch region 410 to the left occurs because the velocity to the left starts from the first branch region 410, so that the mode of the second branch guide flow path R2 ( By setting the extension length and inclination angle) and the third branch guide flow path R3 (extension length and inclination angle), it is possible to aim at the positions of the flowing game balls B1a and B2a.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31A, when the game ball B1a falls into the special region hole 422 without being decelerated by the movable plate 421a in the second branch region 420, the third branch guide flow path R3 is used. The flow path shape is designed so that it falls on the upper surface of the passing game ball B2a.

For example, the game ball flows down from the second branch guide flow path R2 to the special region hole 422 in 2 seconds, and falls from the special guide flow path R4 to the third branch region 430 in 1 second, while the third branch guide flow flows. It is configured such that the game ball flows down the road R3 in about 2.5 seconds.

Here, when the game ball B2a moves from the state shown in FIG. 30A to the state shown in FIG. 31A, it collides with the left side wall of the third branch guidance flow path R3 to move to the left. The speed of the ball is killed and it falls vertically downward. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the speed in the left-right direction and the speed in the up-down direction of the game ball B2a are greatly reduced. By dropping the game ball B1a toward a position where the speed is greatly reduced, the game ball B1a and the game ball B2a can be stably brought into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), from the state where the game balls B1a and B2a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the game balls B1a and B2a are continuously connected and fall vertically downward, and then the lower game ball B2a is a distribution protrusion. Collide with 431. In that case, the ratio of the game ball B2a being distributed to the distribution protrusions 431 is half left and right (50%), but when the game ball B2a is distributed to either the left or right, it collides with the game ball B1a above it. By doing so, the game ball B1a can be easily distributed to the left and right opposite sides of the game ball B2a. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the two game balls B1a and B2a one by one in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431.

In the present embodiment, after the game balls B1a and B2a are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the second specific area switch 442a is compared with the period required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area switch 441a. The time it takes for the game ball to pass through is greatly increased.

Therefore, by causing the two game balls B1a and B2a to flow down one by one in both directions of the distribution protrusion 431, the game balls B1a and B2a pass through the second specific area switch 442a. B2a can be passed through the first specific area switch 441a. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability that the player will win a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot that is more profitable than a 7-round jackpot) as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the third branch region 430.

A case where the game ball B1b temporarily stays in the second branch region 420 and then passes through the special region hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35.

32 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 32 (b) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). It is a top view, FIG. 33 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 33 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, FIG. 34 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 34 (b) is an arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). It is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 400 in the directional view, and FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24.

In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), FIG. 32 (b), FIG. 33 (a), FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 34 (b) and FIG. The appearance of the two game balls B1b and B2b flowing down is shown in the figure series.

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when the game ball B1b reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a is in a staying state while rotating in the direction approaching the first delay preparation hole 423. In the case of, the game ball B1b is hindered by the tip of the movable plate 421a, and temporarily (about 1 second) at the position shown in FIG. 32 (b) (the exit position of the second branch guide flow path R2). After staying, the movable plate 421a further rotates and flows down toward the special region hole 422 as the passage is allowed to pass (see FIG. 33 (b)). Here, since the game ball B2b continues to flow down while the game ball B1b stays, the game ball B1b reaches the special region hole 422 at a timing deviated from the timing at which the game balls B1b and B2b come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), at the timing when the game ball B1b starts flowing into the special induction flow path R4, the game ball B2b has already reached the distribution protrusion 431 and the distribution in the third branch region 430 is executed. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B1b reaches the distribution protrusion 431. Here, when the game balls B1b and B2b are distributed by the distribution protrusions 431, the game balls B1b and B2b do not interfere with each other, so that the distribution ratio for each of the game balls B1b and B2b is half (50%). ..

That is, since the player has two chances to flow the game balls B1b and B2b into the first special area hole 441, when only one game ball enters the second flow-down device 400. In comparison, it can be easier for the player to improve the profits obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B2b that first reached the distribution protrusion 431 by disposing the first delay flow path R5 between the distribution protrusion 431 and the second specific region hole 442. Is distributed to the second specific region hole 442 side, while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay induction flow path R5 (about 2 seconds), the later game ball B1b is in the first specific region. Passing through the hole 441 (one second after the state shown in FIG. 34A, that is, while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay induction flow path R5), the first specific area switch 441a is reached. A state of being detected (a state in which the player has won a 16-round jackpot) can be configured. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits that can be obtained.

A case where the game ball B1c passes through the first delay preparation hole 423 without staying in the second branch region 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39.

36 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 36 (b) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). Top view, FIG. 37 (a) is a partial front view of the second flow device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 37 (b) is a second view in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). It is a partial top view of the flow-down device 400, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400.

In addition, in FIG. 36 (a), FIG. 36 (b), FIG. 37 (a), FIG. 37 (b), FIG. The state in which B2c flows down is illustrated in a diagram series.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b), when the game ball B1c reaches the second branch region 420, the movable plate 421a opens the first delay preparation hole 423 side to allow passage. In this case, the game ball B1c reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 and falls into the first delay preparation hole 423 as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) without decelerating in particular.

The game ball B1c that has fallen into the first delay preparation hole 423 flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 and heads for the third specific region hole 441. Here, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the game ball B2c flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 is distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431, but the first side has a long distance to the specific region. The period during which the game ball B2c flows down the delayed induction flow path R5 (about 2 seconds) is shorter than the period during which the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 (about 5 seconds). ..

That is, regardless of whether the game ball B2c is distributed to the left or right by the distribution protrusion 431, before the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction flow path R6 and passes through the third specific area switch 443a, The game ball B2c can be made to flow into the first specific area switch 441a or the second specific area switch 442a. This makes it easier for the player to improve the profits that can be obtained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the route distribution unit 320 and the distribution unit can easily allow the game balls to enter the fixed region hole 340 by collectively entering the game balls into the first flow-down device 300. The inclined portion 330 is arranged, and the player can easily obtain the profit by playing a game in which two game balls are put together into the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and both of them enter the fixed area hole 340, one second flow-down device 400 follows. The structure is such that it is easier to obtain a jackpot with a larger profit than when the game ball of the game flows down. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second delay induction flow path R6 is configured as a long and gently sloping flow path to increase the period until the game ball passes through the third specific region switch 443a has been described. The second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment projects for a predetermined period when the game ball enters each of the starting winning openings 26 to 28 (see FIG. 2), and causes the game ball to fall into the specific area hole 2440. A timed blocking plate 2411 for blocking is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

40 (a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are the second flow-down on the XLb-XLb line of FIG. 40 (a). It is sectional drawing of the apparatus 2400. In addition, in FIG. 40A, the illustration of the lid member arranged on the front side is omitted, and the inner side surface of the specific region hole 2440 is shown, which is the same in FIGS. 41 and 42. Further, FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is projected, and FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is retracted.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the second flow-down device 2400 has a first branch guide flow path R1, a timed branch region 2410 connected to the first branch guide flow path R1, and a timed period of the timed branch region 2410. It mainly includes an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411.

The timed branching region 2410 is a region for sending the game ball flowing down the first branch guide flow path R1 to any specific region, and the game is played in the specific region hole 2440 which is an inlet for the game ball to flow into the specific region. It includes a timed blocking plate 2411 that prevents the ball from passing in a timely manner, and some (three in this embodiment) specific region holes 2440 into which the game ball is thrown.

The time blocking plate 2411 overhangs inside the specific region hole 2440 (overhangs downward in FIG. 40 (b)) and sinks outside the specific region hole (submerges upward in FIG. 40 (b)). The immersive state can be configured by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, and the upper surface of the plate in the overhanging state is arranged at a position where it is sunk downward by the radius of the game ball from the entrance (upper surface) of each specific area hole 2440. ..

The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is energized when the game ball passes through the fixed region switch 340a (see FIG. 5) to form an overhanging state. The overhanging state is longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the first branch guide flow path R1 and for the game ball to be arranged inside each specific region hole 2440 (up to 10 seconds in the present embodiment). It is maintained for a sufficiently long period (12 seconds). As a result, it is possible to align the fall timings of the game balls falling from each specific region hole 2440.

Each specific region hole 2440 is a hole having a size large enough for one game ball to pass through, and the first specific region hole 2441 in which the game ball flowing down to the first branch guide flow path R1 falls with an equal probability. And a second specific area hole 2442 and a third specific area hole 2443 are mainly provided.

The first specific area hole 2441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 2441a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 2441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 2442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 2442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a.

The third specific area hole 2443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged directly below the hole. As a result, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 2443 and passing through the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40A, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 2441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 2443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 2442 to the second specific area switch 2442a. H1 <distance H2 <distance H3). Since the flow resistance of each specific region hole 2441 to 2443 is configured to be the same, a profit that can be obtained by a player when a plurality of game balls fall into each specific region hole 2441 to 2443 in a manner in which the fall timings are aligned. Can be the maximum benefit in the specific region holes 2441 to 2443 through which the game ball passes. In this embodiment, the flow resistance is the same, but the effect may be achieved by changing the flow resistance and making the distances H1 to H3 equivalent.

An example of the flow-down mode of the game balls B10 and B11 when two game balls B10 and B11 flow into the second flow-down device 2400 together will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

41 (a), 41 (b) and 42 are front views of the second flow-down device 2400. In addition, in FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 42, the appearance of two game balls B10 and B11 entering the third flow-down device 2400 is shown in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the previous game ball B10 enters the third specific area hole 2443 with an equal probability, the game ball B10 becomes a lid, and the latter game ball B11 becomes the third specific area. It is impossible to enter the hole 2443. As a result, when two game balls enter the second flow-down device 2440, it is possible to prevent the two game balls from entering the same specific area hole 2440 (for example, the third specific area hole 2443). Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the later game ball B11 enters the second specific region hole 2442 or the first specific region hole 2441 with equal probability. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), the case where the game ball B11 enters the first specific area hole 2441 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is turned off and the timed blocking plate 2411 is immersed, the game balls B10 and B11 fall at the same time. At this time, since the distance H1 is shorter than the distance H3, the game ball B10 passes through the third specific area switch 2443a after the game ball B11 passes through the first specific area switch 2441a and is detected. Therefore, it is invalid that the game ball B10 has passed the third specific area switch 2443a, and the player can win a 16-round jackpot.

Thereby, in the present embodiment, when the two game balls B10 and B11 are entered into the second flow-down device 2440, it is possible to prevent both of them from entering the same specific region holes 2441 to 2443. It is possible to effectively detect the game ball that has entered the specific area holes 2441 to 2443, which is more advantageous for the player, with the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a. This makes it possible for the player to obtain a more profitable jackpot as compared with the case where one game ball flows into the second flow-down device 2400.

Next, the first flow-down device 3300 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the game ball changes when the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322 has been described, but the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow device 3300 in the third embodiment has a route distribution unit 3320. By colliding the game balls with each other, the flow path of the game balls is changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

43 is a front view of the first flow-down device 3300 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow-down device 3300 in the direction of arrow XLIV of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 is a side view of FIG. 44. It is a top view of the first flow-down device 3300 in the direction view of arrow XLV. In FIG. 43, the front side wall of the introduction passage 3310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 3320 are not shown for ease of understanding (that is, the game ball is inside the introduction passage 3310 and the route swing). It flows down the inside of the branch portion 3320, and is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (front side in FIG. 43).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the first flow-down device 3300 has an introduction passage 3310 for guiding the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) to the route distribution unit 3320, and an introduction passage thereof. It mainly includes a route distribution portion 3320 into which a game ball that has passed through 3310 enters, a distribution inclination portion 330 having a protrusion 331, a fixed region hole 340, and an outlier hole 350.

The introduction passage 3310 is a branch region 3311 arranged in the central portion of the front view, is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the branch region 3311, and is a flow path through which the game ball flows down and is connected to the branch region 3311. The upper passage 3312 and the lower passage which is formed so as to be inclined downward from the branch region 3311 in both the left and right directions in the front view and allows the game ball to flow down and is connected to the connecting passages 3314 and 3315 at the left and right ends. The side flow path 3313, the right side connecting flow path 3314 extending downward from the right end of the lower flow path 3313 toward the back side without any left-right component, and the left end of the lower flow path 3313. The left side connecting passage 3315 extending downward from the portion toward the front side without any component in the left-right direction, and the left and right inner positions of the lower bottom plates of the connecting flow passages 3314 and 3315 are projected upward. Mainly includes a protruding portion 3316 to be formed.

The branching region 3311 includes a partition wall portion 3311a which is a wall portion for flowing the game ball sent from the upper flow path 3312 into the lower flow path 3313 on the same side on the left and right sides in a state where the game ball is not accommodated.

The partition wall portion 3311a is a position separated by one game ball (one game ball in the left-right direction) from the position where the bottom plate of the upper flow path 3312 is interrupted, and extends the bottom plate of the lower flow path 3313 in the left-right direction. It is a wall portion that extends upward from the installed position at a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The function of the partition wall portion 3311a will be described with reference to FIG. 46. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partial front views of the introduction passage 3310. In addition, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the flow of the game balls B20 and B21 when the game balls B20 and B21 enter from one entrance of the introduction passage 3310 in chronological order is shown. Will be done.

When the game ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, it enters the branch area 3311 from the upper passage 3312 and falls in the vertical direction, and the partition wall portion 3311a restricts the movement to the left, and then the lower flow. Enter the road 3313.

That is, if there is one game ball flowing down the introduction passage 3310, or even if there are two game balls, one is divided into left and right, the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 3312 from one of the left and right sides is a branch region 3311. The ball is entered into the lower passage 3313 in a manner of being bounced back to the same side. The introduction passage 3310 has a symmetrical shape, and this is the same even if the game ball enters from the left side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46A, when the two game balls B20 and B21 flow down the introduction passage 3310 together from the right side, the previous game ball B20 enters the branch region 3311 from the upper flow path 3312. In the state of falling in the vertical direction, the rear game ball B21 can get over the previous game ball B20 before turning left and right. Since the protrusion 3316 has a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, in this case, the game ball B21 gets over the protrusion 3316 and enters the lower flow path 3313 on the left side of the protrusion 3316.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the introduction passage 3310 together, one ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from both the left and right sides, or two balls enter the introduction passage 3310 together from the left and right sides, from the introduction passage 3310. A game ball can be inserted into the route distribution unit 3320 in a manner of one on each side.

It will be described back to FIG. 43 to FIG. 45. The game ball that has passed through the lower flow path 3313 falls downward along the extending direction (direction without the left-right direction component) of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315. Each of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 is configured such that the lower bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) is inclined downward toward the center. Therefore, the game ball sent from the lower flow path 3313 to the respective connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 has almost no velocity in the left-right direction when it lands on the lower bottom plate of each connecting flow path 3314 and 3315, and the lower bottom plate has almost no velocity. It rolls toward the center of the left and right according to the inclination.

After that, the game ball comes into contact with the protruding portion 3316, is decelerated, and then flows into the route distribution portion 3320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the route distribution unit 3320 from jumping out in the left-right direction, and it is possible to roll the game ball along the shape of the inner surface of the route distribution unit 3320. Since the extending directions of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 are different in the front-rear direction, the front-rear position of the game ball entering the route distribution portion 3320 is slightly shifted.

Next, the route distribution unit 3320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the description of the route distribution unit 3320, FIGS. 43 to 45 will be referred to as appropriate. 47 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow device 3300 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43, and FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow device 3300 in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device 3300 on the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47 (b).

In the route distribution unit 3320, a pair of guide rails 3321 for guiding the rolling of the game ball entered from the introduction passage 3310 and a region in which the game ball can move at the left and right center positions of the guide rail 3321 are located in the front-rear direction (FIG. An expansion area 3322 that is expanded in the 47 (a) vertical direction), a special route hole 3323 that is configured as a hole through which a game ball can fall at the center position in the front-rear direction of the expansion area 3322, and a terminal portion of each guide rail 3321. The normal route hole 3324, which is configured as a hole through which the game ball can fall, and the normal route hole 3324, which has passed through the normal route hole 3324, are caused to flow backward and fall to the rear end of the distribution inclined portion 330. It mainly includes a route guide path 3326.

The guide rail 3321 is curved downward in a front view in which the game ball is supported by two rails arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction and the flow path thereof is regulated. Since the pair of guide rails 3321 are rotationally symmetric with respect to the center point on the left and right in the top view, the guide rail 3321 that guides the game ball flowing in from the left side will be described, and the guide rail 3321 on the opposite side will be described. Is omitted.

The guide rail 3321 is a central rail portion 3321a extending along the curved shape of the bottom plate (lower plate of FIG. 43) of the route distribution portion 3320 near the center position in the front-rear direction of the route distribution portion 3320, and the center thereof. An auxiliary rail portion 3321b provided in parallel with the rail portion 3321a is provided.

The central rail portion 3321a and the auxiliary rail portion 3321b have the same overhang height (overhang height toward the curved center side) in the cross-sectional shape. The formation of the central rail portion 3321a is omitted in the central portion in the left-right direction corresponding to the special route hole 3323. Further, the formation of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is omitted from the position shifted outward to the left and right from the portion where the central rail portion 3321a is omitted, and is omitted from the position to the central portion, and the terminal position of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (route distribution portion 3320). A normal route hole 3324 is bored downward at a position where the speed in the left-right direction of the game ball that has entered the ball and did not collide with another game ball is substantially eliminated). The central rail portion 3321a is also used in the pair of guide rails 3321.

The enlarged area 3322 is provided with a special route hole 3323 in the lower portion (the portion on the back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface) at the center position in the front-rear direction (FIG. 47 (a) vertical direction), and is used for the special route. It includes an inclined surface 3322a arranged at a front-rear position of the hole 3323, and a curved receiving wall 3322b arranged as a wall portion that is convexly curved toward the front-rear direction of the inclined surface 3322a.

The inclined surface 3322a is connected to the central end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b (the end in the portion where the formation is omitted) and has a downwardly convex curved shape with the end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b as an end point (FIG. It includes a curved side wall 3322a1 composed of (see 48). The inclined surface 3322a is configured to be gently ascended from the curved side wall 3322a1 so as to approach the curved receiving wall 3322b.

The special route hole 3323 is a hole for dropping the game ball near the center position on the left and right of the front end portion of the distribution inclination portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped the special route hole 3323 has a higher probability of entering the fixed region hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped the normal route hole 3324.

The hole for the normal route 3324 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the normal route guide path 3326 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 passes through the normal route guide path 3326 and falls near the rear end of the taxiing inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped the normal route hole 3324 has a lower probability of entering the fixed region hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped the special route hole 3323.

With reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, a flow mode of the game ball B22 when one game ball B22 flows into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 49 (a), 49 (b), 50 (a) and 50 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 49A, FIG. 49B, FIG. 50A, and FIG. 50B, the flow-down mode of the game ball B22 flowing down the route distribution unit 3320 is illustrated in chronological order. NS.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the game ball B22 decelerated by flowing down the left side connecting flow path 3315 and abutting on the protrusion 3316 is supported by the guide rail 3321 and rolls in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 49B, when the game ball B22 approaches the enlarged region 3322, the state in which the game ball B22 is supported by the auxiliary rail portion 3321b shifts to the state in which the curved side wall 3322a1 supports the game ball B22.

In this state, since the curved side wall 3322a1 is sunk downward from the central rail portion 3321a, the center of gravity of the game ball B22 moves toward the inclined surface 3322a (the game ball B22 leans against the inclined surface 3322a).

As shown in FIG. 50A, the game ball B22 passes above the special route hole 3323 while leaning against the inclined surface 3322a. In this state, since the speed of the game ball B22 in the left-right direction is high, it is unlikely that the ball B22 will fall into the special route hole 3323. It is possible to prevent the game ball B22 from colliding with the open end of the special route hole 3323 and decelerating.

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), the game ball B22 that has passed above the special route hole 3323 reaches the rightmost normal route hole 3323 and falls. Therefore, when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320, the game ball B22 is preferentially entered into the normal route hole 3324. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B22 passes through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is left to the randomness when it collides with the protrusion 331 of the distribution inclination portion 330, changes its direction at random, and flows down. Be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, a flow mode of the game balls B23 and B24 when two game balls B23 and B24 flow into the route distribution unit 3320 will be described. 51 (a), 51 (b), 52 (a) and 52 (b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 in the XLVIIa-XLVIIa line of FIG. 43. In addition, in FIG. 51 (a), FIG. 51 (b), FIG. 52 (a) and FIG. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the game balls B23 and B24 decelerated by flowing down the right side connecting flow path 3314 and the left side connecting flow path 3315 and abutting on the protrusion 3316 are supported by the guide rails 3321 and left and right. Roll in the direction.

Here, since the pair of guide rails 3321 also serve (share) the central rail portion 3321a, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the game balls B23 and B24 flow into the enlarged region 3322, the game balls B23 and B24 Collide.

Since the game balls B23 and B24 are displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)) and flow down, a velocity in the front-rear direction is generated due to the collision. That is, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the game balls B23 and B24 flow down in the direction close to the curved side wall 3322a1 and collide with the curved side wall 3322a1.

Since the curved side wall 3322a1 is formed from a curved shape that is convex in the front-rear direction, a load is applied to the game balls B23 and B24 in the direction of pushing back in the left-right direction, whereby the game balls B23 and B24 increase the velocity in the left-right direction. be killed.

Therefore, neither of the game balls B23 and B24 can reach the hole 3324 for the normal route, and as shown in FIG. It falls into the route hole 3323.

Therefore, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls B23 and B24 are preferentially entered into the special route hole 3323. Therefore, the probability that the game balls B23 and B24 pass through the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is dramatically improved.

That is, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution unit 3320, the game balls are larger than when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution unit 3320. The probability of passing through the fixed region hole 340 can be dramatically improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter, the game balls collide with each other in the route distribution unit 3320 of the first flow-down device 3300, so that the game balls have a special route hole 3323. It is possible to improve the probability of flowing into.

Next, the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322 and the flow path of the game ball changes depending on whether or not the distribution body 322 is balanced depending on how the weight of the game ball is applied has been described. The route distribution unit 4320 of the first flow-down device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment is configured in a manner in which the path after ejection of the game ball is changed depending on how many game balls are retained on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323. NS. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

53 (a) and 53 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 53 (a) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and overhangs.

As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the first flow-down device 4300 uses the introduction passage 310 (the first protrusion 311 is omitted) and the game ball thrown from the introduction passage 310. It mainly includes a route distribution portion 4320 for distribution, a distribution inclination portion 330, a fixed region hole 340, and an outlier hole 350 (see FIG. 5).

The route distribution section 4320 has a route distribution section guide path 4321 that causes the taxiing ball to flow down and guides the ball into the drop hole 4321a, and a stay extending vertically below the drop hole 4321a in a downwardly inclined direction to the right. The flow path 4322 and the injection solenoid 4323 fixed to the first flow device 4300 so that the movable portion can be pulled inward of the retention flow path 4322 along the extension direction of the retention flow path 4322. , A special route hole 4324 for causing the taxiing ball to flow down to the special route guidance path 325 (left side guidance path 325a) of the first embodiment, and a normal route hole for allowing the game ball to flow down to the normal route guidance path 326 (see FIG. 5). Mainly equipped with 4325.

The retention flow path 4322 is formed so that the distance from the position where the game ball falling through the drop hole 4321a lands to the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is longer than that of one game ball. As a result, when two game balls B31 and B32 (see FIG. 55 (a)) enter the first flow-down device 4300, the retention flow path is placed in the retention flow path 4322 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323. Two game balls B31 and B32 can be arranged along the extension direction of 4322.

The injection solenoid 4323 operates when the game ball passes through the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 (see FIG. 2). That is, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2), which is opened when the game ball has passed through the starting winning opening 26, 27, 28, reaches the retention flow path 4322. The state is maintained in the retracted state for a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds according to the present embodiment), and then the state is vigorously changed so as to be in the overhanging state (the movable part is overhanging). As a result, the game ball is ejected toward the left side of the retention flow path 4322.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. Note that FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which the game ball B30 reaches the retention flow path 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and a movable portion. The overhanging state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when one game ball B30 is inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, one game ball B30 reaches the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 (injection solenoid). One game ball B30 leans against 4323).

When the injection solenoid 4323 changes to the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B30 vigorously pops out toward the hole 4325 for the normal route, and the game ball B30 falls into the hole 4325 for the normal route (for the normal route to the game ball B30). The injection solenoid 4323 is projected in a manner that gives an initial velocity to reach the hole 4325).

The game ball that has fallen into the hole 4325 for the normal route is guided to the normal route guide path 326 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, when one game ball B30 enters the first flow-down device 4300, as described above. Whether or not the game ball B30 enters the fixed region hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is left to the randomness when the game ball B30 flows down the taxiing inclined portion 330 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, when two game balls are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the situation changes.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. Note that FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the two game balls B31 and B32 reach the retention flow path 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 55 (b) shows the injection solenoid 4323. The state in which the moving part is overhanging is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when two game balls B31 and B32 are inserted into the first flow-down device 4300, the injection solenoid 4323 is on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state. Two game balls B31 and B32 are lined up along the overhanging direction (along the extending direction of the staying flow path 4322).

When the injection solenoid 4323 is in the overhanging state as shown in FIG. 55 (b) with the two game balls B31 and B32 side by side, the target to be pushed out is the game as compared with the case where there is only one game ball. Since the two balls are heavy, the game balls B31 and B32 do not reach the hole 4325 for the normal route, and the two game balls B31 and B32 fall into the hole 4324 for the special route in front of the hole 4325.

Since the game ball that has fallen into the special route hole 4324 is guided to the special route guide path 325, when two game balls B31 and B32 enter the first flow-down device 4300, it is confirmed as described above. A situation is formed in which the game balls B31 and B32 can easily enter the region hole 340 (see FIG. 5).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game balls entering the first flow-down device 4300 is different, the distance by which the electric operating device (injection solenoid 4323) that operates in the mode of moving the game balls moves the game balls. By making the (flying distance) different, the flow path of the subsequent game ball can be made different.

According to this, as in the case where the two game balls are brought into contact with the movable member (for example, the distribution body 322 (see FIG. 5) in the second embodiment) from both sides in the moving direction to bring the movable member into a balanced state. Since it is not necessary to divide the two game balls into the left and right sides of the taxiing body 322, the structure of the route distribution section guide path 4321 should be simplified (a hole structure having a size that allows only one taxiing ball to pass through). Can be done.

In addition, since the operation of the injection solenoid 4323 is highly durable and accurate, malfunctions such as entering the special route hole 4324 even though only one game ball is in the retention flow path 4322 may occur. Can be suppressed.

Next, the second flow-down device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. In the first embodiment, the contact wall 411 is configured as a fixed portion, and when two game balls are entered in the first branch region 410, one game ball enters the third branch guide flow path R3. Although the case of being sphered has been described, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow-down device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment includes an operation wall 5411 that continuously operates at regular intervals from the time when the power is turned on. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 56, the first branch region 5410 of the second flow device 5400 is provided with a rotation shaft at the bottom plate portion of the second branch guidance flow path R2, and has a cross section L that rotates and reciprocates at predetermined intervals from the time the power is turned on. It is provided with a character-shaped operating wall 5411.

The operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) that guides the game ball arriving from above to the right by the electric operation of the drive motor (not shown), and the contact wall 411 in the first embodiment. At the same position as (see FIG. 24), the wall reciprocates at predetermined intervals from the vertical state (shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 56) in which the wall portion extends vertically upward.

Therefore, in the vertical state, the flow-down mode of the game balls when the two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 is the same as that described above in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure a case where two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 in an inclined state. Hereinafter, the flow mode will be described.

57 (a) to 57 (c) are partial front views of the second flow device 5400 in the range corresponding to the range XXV of FIG. 24. In addition, in FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), the inclined state of the operation wall 5411 is shown, and the flow mode of the two game balls B40 and B41 flowing into the first branch region 5410 is shown in chronological order. NS.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c), when the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the gap between the extending tip and the second branch guide flow path R2 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. The position and cross-sectional shape of the rotating shaft are determined. Therefore, in the inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are both guided to the third branch guidance flow path R3.

Therefore, the two game balls B40 and B41 can be reliably guided to the third branch region 430 (see FIG. 31), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are distributed one by one to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since it can be easily made, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific region hole 441. As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31). When the game balls B40 and B41 of the above have entered the first branch area, the player can watch the flow of the game balls with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in the vertical state, as described above in the first embodiment, the game balls are introduced one by one into the second branch guide flow path. The flow mode is divided into R2 and the third branch guide flow path R3 (see FIG. 26), which is a slightly disadvantageous flow mode as compared with the case where the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state, but the second branch guide flow path is The game ball flowing down the second branch guidance flow path R2 passes through the special guidance flow path R4 without being stopped at the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27), so that the game ball flows down the R2. It joins the third branch induction flow path R3 (see FIGS. 29 to 31). That is, similarly to the case where the two game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch region 5410 when the operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are moved to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431. Since the pieces can be easily sorted, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific region hole 441. As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31).

As a result, the locations where the flow mode of the game ball differs depending on the state of the operating member (moving wall 5411, movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27)) are located in the first branch region 5410 and the second branch region 420 (see FIG. 24). It can be configured in multiple locations. When two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the player can watch the subsequent flow of the game balls with confidence. On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch region 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the player pays attention to the subsequent flow mode of the game balls in the second branch region 420. It will be.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the flowing game ball, increase the variation of the flowing game ball, and provide a fresh game.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the operating wall 5411 is maintained in the inclined state is set to be shorter than the period during which the operating wall 5411 is maintained in the vertical state, thereby preventing the player from becoming too advantageous. There is. That is, in the present embodiment, the operating wall 5411 maintains the vertical state for the first period (for example, 4 seconds), then maintains the inclined state for the second period (for example, 1 second), and then the vertical state is maintained. The state change is repeated from the time when the power is turned on, in such a manner that it is maintained only for the first period. That is, the probability that the operating wall 5411 is in an inclined state when the game ball enters the first branch region can be set to a predetermined ratio (20%), and the two game balls B40 and B41 are 2. It is possible to reduce the probability that each of them will be guided to the third branch guidance flow path R3.

Next, the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82. In the second embodiment, when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch region 2410 and fall into the specific region hole 2440, there is a difference between the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls first and the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls later. Although the case where the above does not occur has been described, the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment includes a profit increasing device 6450 in which the profit expected from the game ball that falls later is equal to or greater than the profit expected from the game ball that falls first. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the second flow-down device 6400 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 59 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 59 (b). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 58, the cover member arranged on the front side is not shown, and the inner side surface of the specific region hole 6440 is partially shown.

As shown in FIGS. 58, 59 (a) and 59 (b), the second flow-down device 6400 has a first branch guide flow path R1 and a timed branch region connected to the first branch guide flow path R1. The 6410, the specific area hole 6440 where the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 falls, the profit increasing device 6450 operated by the game ball that has fallen into the specific area hole 6440 (the fall and the bounce are settled), and the game. It mainly includes a slide delay device 6460 that is operated by the game ball in the process of the ball falling into the specific region hole 6440, and a limiting device 6470 that limits the flow path of the game ball by partitioning the inside of the timed branching region 6410 by the operation.

The timed branching region 6410 is a region in which the game ball that has flowed down the first branch induction flow path R1 is sent to any specific region, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface to flow down toward the specific region hole 6440. A plate-shaped rolling plate 6412 that is configured to be possible, a timed blocking plate 2411 that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area hole 6440, which is an entrance for the game ball to flow into a specific area, and a timed period thereof. It includes an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411. Unlike the second embodiment, the timed blocking plate 2411 is arranged diagonally according to the shape of the specific region hole 6440.

The rolling plate 6412 includes a recessed portion 6412a that is recessed rearward in a shape that includes the movement locus of the moving block surface 6451d of the profit increasing device 6450 in a top view, and is provided on the front side (front side of FIG. 58). It is installed in a downwardly inclined posture toward, a plurality of protrusions are arranged on the upper surface thereof, and is assembled so as to cover a slide delay device 6460 arranged below the protrusions.

The specific region hole 6440 mainly includes a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) specific region holes, that is, a first specific region hole 6441, a second specific region hole 6442, and a third specific region hole 6443, and each specific region hole 6440 is specified. The region holes 6441 to 6443 are formed from a shape that operably accommodates the profit increasing device 6450 in the entrance opening 6440i that receives the game ball.

In the present embodiment, since the profit increasing device 6450 is configured as a device that rotates around a rotation axis extending to the left and right, it is outside the operation locus of the profit increasing device 6450 so as not to interfere when the profit increasing device 6450 rotates. A wall portion forming the specific region hole 6440 is arranged on the side.

The specific region hole 6440 is a hole having a size large enough for one game ball to pass through, and when a single game ball flows down to the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball has an equal probability of being divided. It mainly includes a first specific region hole 6441, a second specific region hole 6442, and a third specific region hole 6443 that fall.

The first specific area hole 6441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to the first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and a vertical flow path extending in the vertical direction from the entrance opening and a game ball at the lower end of the flow path. A diagonal flow path that allows the flow to flow diagonally downward is provided, and a first specific region switch 2441a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first specific area hole 6441 and the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The timed blocking plate 2411 is projected above the first specific area switch 2441a in an overhanging state (see FIG. 60), and prevents the game ball from flowing down the first specific area hole 6441 in the overhanging state. ..

The second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 6441, and the second specific area hole 6442 puts a game ball in the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and is different in that the third specific area hole 6443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot.

That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the diagonal flow path of the third specific area hole 6443. ..

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 6442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 6443, and passes through the third specific area. The game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 60, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific area holes 6441 to 6443 to the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H1) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the first specific area hole 6441 to the first specific area switch 2441a is compared with the distance (distance H1) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 to the second specific area switch. The distance to 2442a (distance H2) is increased, and the distance (distance H2) from the entrance of the diagonal flow path of the second specific area hole 6442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is increased and the third specific area hole 6443 is oblique. The distance (distance H3) from the inlet of the flow path to the third specific region switch 2443a is lengthened (distance H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

As a result, when the game ball falls at the same timing from the entrance of the oblique flow path of each specific area hole 6441 to 6443, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having the distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. , The player can win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds.

The slide delay device 6460 is a member that is operably arranged below the rolling plate 6412 and projects inside the second specific region hole 6442 and the inside of the third special region hole 6443, and is below the rolling plate 6412. A long plate-shaped rotating plate 6461 that rotates about a shaft fixed in the above, and the rotating plate 6461 connected at one end in the long direction (right side in FIG. 59 (a)) and slides in the front-rear direction. The right side slide plate 6462R that is operably supported, the left side slide plate 6462L that is connected at the other end of the rotating plate 6461 in the long direction and is supported so that it can slide in the front-rear direction, and each of these slide plates 6462R, It mainly includes urging springs 6436R and 6436L that urge the 6462L forward.

In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) (a state in which no load is generated by an external force), the slide delay device 6460 is in a balanced state. In this balanced state, the inward protrusions of the right slide plate 6462R and the left slide plate 6462L in the specific region holes 6442 and 6443 are substantially the same.

When the game ball starts to fall into each specific area hole 6442, 6443 from this balanced state, a load is applied from the game ball to the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L, and the slide plates 6462R, 6462L slide in the front-rear direction. do. At this time, since the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are connected to both ends of the rotating plate 6461, the slide plates 6462R and 6462L operate in opposite directions. That is, when one slide plate (for example, the right side slide plate 6462R) slides backward, the other slide plate (for example, the left side slide plate 6462L) slides forward.

The slide plates 6462R and 6462L are formed to have the same length in the elongated direction, but have different tip shapes. That is, the right slide plate 6462R is formed from a shape in which the tip is inclined downward as the tip is directed toward the front side, and the left slide plate 6462L is formed from a shape in which the tip is flat (extending horizontally).

Therefore, for example, when the game ball flows into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the left slide plate 6462L preferentially slides backward (the right slide plate 6462R projects forward). Therefore, the fall of the game ball into the third specific region hole 6443 is delayed. The action and effect at that time will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

Each of the urging springs 6463R and 6436L is formed of the same spring member and has a natural length in a balanced state. In the present embodiment, the elastic spring (loose spring) in which each slide plate 6462R, 6462L has a period of 1 second or more from the retracted state to the balanced state due to the action of the game ball is the urging spring 6464R. , 6463L.

The profit increasing device 6450 mainly includes a first rotating member 6451 arranged inside the first specific area hole 6441 and a second rotating member 6452 arranged inside the second specific area hole 6442. .. Next, the detailed configuration of the profit increasing device 6450 will be described.

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LX-LX line of FIG. 59 (a). As shown in FIG. 60, the first rotating member 6451 has a main body member 6451a formed from a substantially cylindrical shape whose width dimension in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 60) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and its main body. A recessed portion 6451b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at a substantially 1/4 peripheral portion of the member 6451a, a transmission portion 6451c formed by projecting along the peripheral surface at an obliquely front upper portion of the main body member 6451a, and a transmission portion thereof. A moving closed surface 6451d formed in a plane extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the main body member 6451a on the left side of 6451c (in the back direction of the paper surface of FIG. 60) is mainly provided, and the game ball is recessed in the standby state shown in FIG. By being housed in the portion 6451b, it is configured in a mode (center of gravity balance) in which the game ball backflip to a transmission state (see FIG. 65) depending on the weight of the game ball.

The main body member 6451a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G1 of the first rotation member 6451 is provided on the lower front side of the rotation axis in the standby state shown in FIG. As a result, in the standby state, when the main body member 6451a is about to fall forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 60 by being supported by the lid member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6451b includes a vertical side surface VS1 extending along the vertical direction (vertical direction) and a front-rear side surface HS1 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) in the standby state shown in FIG.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS1 are arranged above the rotation axis of the first rotating member 6451, and the distance V1 between the upper and lower side surfaces of the third specific region hole 6443 on the back surface side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts to fall into the third specific region hole 6443, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the right slide plate 6462R via the game ball. Further, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6451b and the first rotating member 6451 starts to perform a backflip operation, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS1 and the back side surface of the third specific area hole 6443 is a distance. By narrowing the size of the ball from V1 (that is, the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the third specific region hole 6443, or the game ball already contained in the recessed portion 6451b rebounds. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

The transmission portion 6451c includes an arc side surface RS recessed in a circular arc shape in a cross section near the rear end portion and extending in the left-right direction, and the transmission state as the arc side surface RS moves to the left (in the back direction of the paper in FIG. 60). It is formed so as to be inclined in a downwardly inclined manner.

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS1 is equal to the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS1, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS1 guiding the game ball can be improved.

The moving block surface 6451d is formed below the straight line extending along the surface on which the arc side surface RS1 is formed (the side surface at the upper end of FIG. 66). As a result, in the transmission state (see FIG. 65), the moving block surface 6451d is arranged below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 on which the game ball rolls, so that the game ball and the moving block surface 6451d are in the transmission state. It is possible to prevent contact.

Further, the moving block surface 6451d has a mode in which the gap between the moving block surface 6451 and the limiting device 6470 is smaller than the size of the game ball when the limiting device 6470 is in the post-operation state in the standby state of the first rotating member 6451. It is composed.

In the standby state, the front side surface of the moving block surface 6451d comes into contact with the rear side surface of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 (see FIG. 59 (b)).

FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 59 (a). As shown in FIG. 61, the second rotating member 6452 has the same cross-sectional shape as the first rotating member 6451 except that there is no portion corresponding to the moving block surface 6451d. That is, the second rotating member 6452 has a main body member 6452a formed from a substantially cylindrical shape whose width dimension in the axial direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 61) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and substantially 1 of the main body member 6452a. FIG. 61 mainly includes a recessed portion 6452b that is recessed in a substantially fan shape at the / 4 peripheral portion and a transmission portion 6452c that is formed so as to project along the peripheral surface at the diagonally front upper portion of the main body member 6452a. In the standby state shown, the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b, so that the game ball backflip to the transmission state (see FIG. 66) due to the weight of the game ball (center of gravity balance).

Similar to the main body member 6451a of the first rotating member 6451, the main body member 6452a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G2 of the second rotating member 6452 is shown in FIG. In the standby state, it is provided in the lower part on the front side of the rotating shaft. In the standby state, when the main body member 6452a is about to fall forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 61 by being supported by the lid member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6452b includes upper and lower side surfaces VS2 and front and rear side surface HS2, similarly to the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS2 are arranged above the rotation axis of the second rotating member 6452, and the distance V2 between the upper and lower side surfaces of the second specific region hole 6442 on the back surface side is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the left slide plate 6462L via the game ball. Further, after the game ball is housed in the recessed portion 6452b and the second rotating member 6452 starts to perform a backflip operation, the distance between the upper and lower side surface VS and the back surface side surface of the second specific area hole 6442 is a distance. By narrowing the distance from V2 (that is, the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the second specific region hole 6442, or the game ball already contained in the recessed portion 6452b bounces back. It is possible to prevent the backflip.

Similar to the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451, the transmission portion 6452c includes an arc side surface RS2 that is recessed in the vicinity of the rear end portion in a circular arc shape and extends in the left-right direction, and the arc side surface RS2 is on the left side. It is formed so as to be inclined in a downwardly inclined manner in the transmission state toward (the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 61).

Further, the transmission unit 6452c is configured such that the right end portion interferes with the moving block surface 6451d in the moving locus (see FIG. 59 (b)). Therefore, when the second rotating member 6452 backflip, the transmission unit 6452c pushes the moving block surface 6451d, and the first rotating member 6452 also backflip (FIGS. 64A and 64). See (b)).

The radius of curvature of the arc side surface RS2 is equivalent to the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball is arranged on the arc side surface RS2, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of the arc side surface RS2 guiding the game ball can be improved.

Next, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIIb-LXIIb line of FIG. 62 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62 (a). In addition, in FIG. 62A, FIG. 62B and FIG. 63, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 is shown, and in FIG. 63, the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6451b is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 (a), 62 (b), and 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 after the first rotating member 6451 backflip due to the weight of the game ball, the transmission unit 6451c The rear end abuts on the back side of the entrance opening 6440i to stop the rotation in the backflip direction (the back side of the entrance opening 6440i functions as a detent). Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state, the game ball is left on the upper surface of the timed blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front-rear side surface HS1 hit each other in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 6451. Since they are in contact with each other, the first rotating member 6451 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the first rotating member 6451 is stabilized in the transmission state.

Since the game ball on the timed blocking plate 2411 is maintained on the timed blocking plate 2411 until the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the game ball falls, the game ball is in a transmission state depending on the operation control of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420. The maintenance period can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and the other game balls are in the third specific region hole 6443. It can be prevented from falling into.

Since the transmission portion 6451c is arranged below the front end portion (left end portion in FIG. 63) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state, the rolling plate 6412 is rolled to form the third specific region hole 6443. The game ball that reaches the entrance opening 6440i can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c.

As described above, the transmission unit 6451c is configured to incline downward toward the left side (in the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 63) in the transmission state, so that the game ball on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 62 (a), when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6451c, the game ball is directed toward the second specific region hole 6442 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6451c (FIG. 62 (a). ) Can be rolled (to the left).

Therefore, the transmission unit 6451c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down into the third specific area hole 6443, and the flow direction of the game balls that have flowed down toward the third specific area hole 6443. Can be switched in the flow direction toward the second specific region hole 6442 (or the first specific region hole 6441), which has a higher expected profit than the third specific region hole 6443.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the moving blocking surface 6451d slips below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412, so that the game ball does not come into contact with the moving blocking surface 6451d. The game ball can freely move in the left-right direction above the recessed portion 6412a.

From the state shown in FIG. 63, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is activated and the timed blocking plate 2411 is in an immersive state (a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is pulled out of the third specific basin hole 6443), the game ball falls and the first rotating member 6451 Since the load for stopping the forward rotation operation is released, the first rotating member 6451 performs the forward rotation operation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the transmission state of the second rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, and FIG. 64 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIVb-LXIVb line of FIG. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view, FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the LXV-LXV line of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 66 is a second flow-down device in the LXVI-LXVI line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of 6400. It should be noted that FIGS. 64 to 66 show the transmission states of the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452, and FIG. 65 shows the game ball housed in the recessed portion 6452b.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the transmission state after the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation due to the weight of the game ball, the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c hits the side surface on the back surface side of the entrance opening 6440i. By contacting, the rotation in the backflip direction is stopped (the side surface on the back side of the entrance opening 6440i functions as a detent). Further, as shown in FIG. 65, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the timed blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball and the front-rear side surface HS2 hit each other in the rotation direction of the second rotating member 6452. Since they are in contact with each other, the second rotating member 6452 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the second rotating member 6452 is stabilized in the transmitted state.

As shown in FIG. 66, the first rotating member 6451 also performs a backflip operation based on the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation. Here, the game ball is not housed in the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, but the rear end portion of the transmitting portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 is on the front side of the moving blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451. (See FIG. 64 (b)), the first rotating member 6451 also performs a backflip operation based on the backflip operation of the second rotating member 6452, and the forward rotation operation of the first rotating member 6451 is prevented. NS. Therefore, based on the fact that the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmission state, the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the entrance opening 6440i of the second specific region hole 6442 is blocked by the transmission portion 6452c, and the other game balls are second specified. It is possible to prevent it from falling into the region hole 6442. In addition, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission portion 6451c, and other game balls fall into the third specific region hole 6443. It can be prevented from doing so.

Since the transmission unit 6452c is arranged below the front end portion (left end portion in FIG. 65) of the rolling plate 6412 in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the rolling plate 6412 is rolled to the second position. 2 The game ball reaching the entrance opening 6440i of the specific area hole 6442 can be smoothly placed on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c.

As described above, the transmission unit 6452c is configured to incline downward toward the left side (in the direction toward the back of the paper in FIG. 65) in the transmission state, so that the game ball on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c flows down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 65, when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission unit 6452c, the game ball is directed toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the transmission unit 6452c (left side in FIG. 64 (a)). Can be rolled (towards).

Therefore, the transmission unit 6452c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down into the second specific area hole 6442, and the flow direction of the game balls that have flowed down toward the second specific area hole 6442. This has the effect of being able to switch in the flow direction toward the first specific region hole 6441, which has a higher expected profit than the second specific region hole 6442.

Further, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmitting state when the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmitting state, the transmission unit 6452c has flowed down toward the third specific region hole 6443 where the expected profit is the smallest. The effect is that the flow direction of the game ball can be switched to the flow direction toward the first specific region hole 6441 where the expected profit is the largest. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the great reversal, and the interest of the player can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the timed blocking plate 2411 becomes an immersive state (a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is pulled out of the second specific basin hole 6442), the game ball falls and the second rotation occurs. Since the load for stopping the forward rotation of the member 6452 is released, the second rotating member 6452 moves forward, and accordingly, the first rotating member 6451 also performs a forward rotation and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the operation inside the second flow-down device 6400 when two game balls reach the timed branching region 6410 and head toward the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443, respectively, will be described. ..

FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXVIII-LXVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 6400 in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG.

70 and 72 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXVIII-LXVIII line of FIG. 67, and FIGS. 71 and 73 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. It is a figure. In addition, in FIGS. 67 to 69, two game balls B61 and B62 which flow down the timed branching region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 1 second) are shown in FIG. 70. And FIG. 71 shows a state in which the game ball B61 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and FIGS. 72 and 73 show a transmission state between the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, 0.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game ball B61 coming into contact with the left slide plate 6462L (see FIG. 68) until the left slide plate 6462L is pushed in completely, and from there, the second rotating member 6452 Is configured in such a manner that 0.4 seconds elapse before the transmission state is reached. That is, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69 (elapsed time t = 0), the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, and FIGS. 72 and 73 show the timing state. , T = 0.5 second timing state is shown.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, a state in which the game ball B62 flows down the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 and the game ball B61 starts to come into contact with the tip end portion of the left slide plate 6462L is shown.

From this state, when the game ball B61 begins to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed outward by the game ball B61 to the outside of the second specific area hole 6442. Based on this, the right slide plate 6462R is projected inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B62 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the time the load is released until the slide plates return to the balanced state. Therefore, the game ball B61 is shown in FIG. 70. The right slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state even after it is further dropped from the indicated state.

When the game ball B61 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 70 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation and enter the transmission state (see FIG. 72). The state shown in FIG. 72 is a state in which the elapsed time is t = 0.5 seconds, and since the right slide plate 6462R is maintained in the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B62 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. It is placed on the outside.

Then, in the process of the backflip operation until the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B62 comes into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 and is pushed up. , The game ball B62 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission unit 64514c.

After that, the game ball B62 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, the flow path of the game ball B62, which had flowed down in the path likely to flow into the third specific region hole 6443 (the hole with the smallest expected profit) until immediately before, is driven by the action of the game ball B61. , The flow path to the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole with the largest expected profit) can be switched. As a result, the player can get a feeling of a big reversal, and the player's interest can be improved.

In FIGS. 74 to 80, a case where two game balls B63 and B64 start to fall into the second specific area hole 6462 and the third specific area hole 6464 at the same time will be described.

74 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58, FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74, and FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd flow-down apparatus 6400 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74.

77 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 74, and FIGS. 78 and 80 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 on the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 74. It is a figure.

In addition, in FIGS. 74 to 76, two game balls B63 and B64 which flow down the timed branching region 6410 and reach the specific region hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1 = 0 seconds, that is, at the same time) are shown. 77 and 78 show a state in which the game ball B63 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and in FIGS. 79 and 80, the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452 of the profit increasing device 6450 are shown. The transmission state is illustrated.

It should be noted that, based on FIGS. 74 to 76 (elapsed time t = 0), the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, and the timing state of t = 0.1 second is shown in FIGS. 79 and 80. , T = 0.5 second timing state is shown.

FIG. 75 shows a state in which the game ball B63 has begun to come into contact with the tip of the left slide plate 6462L. Due to the difference in the tip shapes of the slide plates 6462L and 6462R, in this state (the state where the elapsed time t = 0), the game ball B64 arranged at the same height as the game ball B63 is different from the right slide plate 6462R. Not in contact (see FIG. 76).

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed outward from the second specific area hole 6442 based on the further drop of the game ball B63 from the state shown in FIG. 74, and the right slide plate 6462R. Projects inward of the third specific region hole 6443.

In this case, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific region hole 6443 is narrowed, so that the game ball B64 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In the present embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the time the load is released until the slide plates return to the balanced state. Therefore, the game ball B63 is shown in FIG. 77. The right slide plate 6462R maintains an overhanging state even after further dropping from the indicated state.

Here, in the process of dropping the game ball B64, the game ball B64 also comes into contact with the tip of the right side slide plate 6462R, but the left side slide plate 6462L and the game ball B63 first come into contact with each other and start to slide, so that the right side slides. Since the tip of the plate 6462R slips under the game ball B64, the load component applied from the game ball B64 to the right slide plate 6462R is larger in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction than in the slide movement direction. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B64 from interfering with the operation of the right slide plate 6462R overhanging.

When the game ball B63 further falls from the state shown in FIG. 77 and time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 backflip operation and enter the transmission state (see FIG. 79). The state shown in FIG. 79 is a state in which the elapsed time is t = 0.5 seconds, and since the right slide plate 6462R is maintained in the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B64 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. It is placed on the outside. Then, when the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) is in the transmission state, the game ball B64 comes into contact with the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 in the process of the backflip operation until the transmission state is reached. The game ball B64 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission unit 64514c by being pushed up.

After that, the game ball B64 flows down toward the first specific region hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surface of the rolling portions 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the two game balls B63 and B64 reach the second specific region hole 6442 and the third specific region hole 6443 at the same time, the third specific region hole 6443 (expected profit) until immediately before. The flow path of the game ball B64, which was flowing down in the path that is likely to flow into the hole (the smallest hole), is changed to the flow path toward the first specific region hole 6441 (the hole with the largest expected profit) by the action of the game ball B63. You can switch. As a result, it is possible to create an opportunity for a game ball flowing down a route that has not been noticed in the past to be noticed, and the corresponding space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used as a production space. Can get a sense of great reversal, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the right side slide plate 6462R is formed by an inclined surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the left slide plate 6462R may be formed on an inclined surface, and the tip of the right slide plate 6462L may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this case, when the game balls B63 and B64 are simultaneously dropped into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B63 that is about to fall into the second specific area hole 6442 is transmitted to the second rotating member 6452. It will be pushed out to the upper surface of the portion 6452c, and the game ball B63 will head toward the first specific region hole 6441. In this case, since the distance for rolling on the upper surface of the game ball B63 transmission unit 6452c can be shortened as compared with the present embodiment, the game ball B63 can reach the first specific region hole 6441 at an early stage, and a big hit. It is possible to shorten the period until.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the tip of the right slide plate 6464R is intentionally tilted in order to direct the game ball B64 toward the third specific area hole 6443 toward the first specific area hole 6441. ing. With the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to change from the situation where the minimum profit can be obtained from the game ball B64 to the situation where the maximum profit can be obtained by the flow of the game ball B64. As a result, the player can be imbued with the feeling that the game ball B64 heading for the third specific area 6443 cannot be ignored, and the attention of the route toward the third specific area 6443, which is usually neglected, is improved. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the entire timed branching region 6410 of the second flow device 6400.

That is, regardless of which tip of the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L is formed on the inclined surface, if two game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410 at short intervals, at least one of the game balls However, it passes through the first special area switch 2441a, which has the greatest profit given to the player. Therefore, the profit given to the player can be maximized while maintaining the effect that the profit given to the player is larger for the later game ball, which improves the interest of the player. It is possible to achieve both the effect (effect that does not get tired, fanning) and the effect that maximizes the substantial profit (number of balls).

81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the second flow device 6400 on the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 58. In addition, in FIGS. 81 and 82, two game balls B65 and B66 flowing down inside the second flow-down device 6400 are shown in chronological order, and the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the limiting device 6470 has a rotation axis at the rear end of the timed branching region 6410, and the game balls B65 and B66 are directed toward the third specific region hole 6443 in the post-operation state. It is provided with a partition rod 6471 to be flowed down.

The partition rod 6471 is arranged so as to come into contact with the game ball at the height of the center position of the games B65 and B66 that roll on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B65 and B66 that are in contact with the partition rod 6471 from overcoming the partition rod 6471 and moving to the left.

The flow-down mode of the game balls B65 and B66 that flow down inside the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the operation of the limiting device 6470 will be described.

In FIG. 81, the first rotating member 6451 is in the standby state. In this case, as described above, the size of the gap between the partition rod 6471 of the limiting device 6470 and the moving block surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451 is set to be equal to or smaller than the size of the game ball. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the game ball B65 does not go to the left side of the partition rod 6471, is fixed to the right side of the partition rod 6471, and flows down toward the third specific region hole 6443.

Therefore, in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, when a single game ball flows down to the second flow-down device 6400, it is possible to form a state in which the ball always falls into the third specific region hole 6443. As a result, for example, in a jackpot state in which a single gaming ball enters the second flow-down device 6400 while improving the probability of entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2) by a time-saving game, a jackpot is achieved. By unifying the ball output to the ball output (minimum ball output) obtained by dropping the game ball into the third specific area hole 6443, it is easy to continue the short-time game, but one big hit ball is released. It is possible to configure a suppressed gaming machine. As a result, it is not necessary to have so many balls, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the player's intention to continue playing a game for a long time after a big hit.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has fallen through the third specific area hole 6443 passes through the time saving switch 190d, the time saving game is promised again by winning the jackpot during the time saving game. It becomes. As a result, the player can continuously enjoy the jackpot game and the time-saving game while suppressing the consumption of the game ball.

On the other hand, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 6400 in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, the first game ball B65 rotates the first rotating member 6451 as shown in FIG. 82. The second game ball B66 rolls the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 toward the second specific region hole 6442 or the first specific region hole 6441. That is, in the state after the limiting device 6470 is operated, by inserting a plurality of game balls into the second flow-down device 6400, a large number of balls can be obtained in the jackpot game, so that the second flow-down device 6400 can be used. There is a real benefit to having multiple game balls enter. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform a game in which the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted in order to allow the player to enter the plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when two game balls are collectively inserted into the second flow-down device 6400, the profit increasing device 6450 operates to acquire the game ball through the specific region hole 6440 into which the game ball has flowed. It is possible to forcibly increase the profit that can be obtained by the specific region hole 6440 into which the later game ball has flowed. As a result, the flow path of the later game ball can be changed by the action of the earlier game ball, so that the attention to the movement of the game ball can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the later game ball does not have a smaller profit than the earlier game ball, it is possible to see which specific area hole 6440 the later game ball flows into with more peace of mind than usual. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first game ball that has flowed into the second flow-down device 6400 can be configured to surely flow down into the third specific region hole 6443, it is combined with another action while suppressing the ball ejection. (In this embodiment, it is combined with the acquisition of a shorter time), so that the range of playability can be expanded.

Next, the second flow-down device 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 101. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball flows down by its own weight and is distributed to the specific region holes 441 to 443 has been described, but the second flow-down device 7440 in the seventh embodiment provides a driving force for moving the game ball. A game ball driving device 7450 that is generated is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the rolling floor device 7410. Note that FIG. 83 shows a game ball that flows down the first branch guidance flow path R1 and starts flowing into the game ball drive device 7450. Further, FIG. 84 corresponds to a state in which the game ball driving device 7450 and the like are removed from FIG. 83.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the second flow-down device 7400 rolls a rolling floor device 7410 that allows a game ball to pass on the upper surface side and extends in the left-right direction, and the rolling floor device 7410. A pair of annular rotary distribution devices 7420 formed from a translucent resin material that distributes game balls, a drive device 7430 that generates rotational driving force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and a rolling floor device 7410. A plurality of specific region holes 7440 in which game balls distributed to the rotary distribution device 7420 can flow down, and the rotary shafts are arranged in such a manner that the axial direction is along the extension direction of the rolling floor device 7410. Mainly includes a game ball driving device 7450 and the like.

The rolling floor device 7410 includes a first branch guide flow path R1, left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R that rotatably support the rotary distribution device 7420, and a tilting floor 7412 that can be tilted by the weight of the game ball. A slanted flow path 7413 in which the game ball that has passed the left support pillar 7411L rolls to the left and inclines downward to the left, a pair of support holes 7414 that support the game ball drive device 7450, and a drive device 7430. A motor support hole 7415 that supports the motor 7431, and an inflow sensor 7416 that is a sensor that detects a game ball immediately before flowing into the screw member 7453 from the first branch guide flow path R1 and is arranged below the support hole 7414. Mainly prepared.

The left support pillar 7411L is composed of a main pillar 7411a extending in the vertical direction and having a T-shaped pillar shape, and a branch pillar 7411b extending in the front-rear direction in a symmetrical shape at the upper end of the main pillar 7411a. Mainly includes a collar 7411c composed of a rotatable ring-shaped member projecting from the upper surface of the branch column 7411b.

The main pillar 7411a is arranged on the side facing the second specific area hole 7442 and the tilted floor 7412, which are bored along the vertical direction, and the tilted floor 7412 supports the tilted floor 7412 so that the tilted floor 7412 can tilt in the vertical direction. Mainly includes a bearing portion 7411a1 and a bearing portion 7411a1.

The upper surface of the branch column 7411b is recessed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the rotation distribution device 7420, and the rotation distribution device 7420 is rotatably supported (fitted) in the recessed portion. A plurality of collars 7411c are arranged near the front and rear ends of the branch column 7411b, and the allowance from the upper surface of the branch column toward the rotation axis side of the rotation distribution device 7420 is constant. As a result, the rotary distribution device 7420 can rotate in a state of being in contact with the plurality of collars 7411c, and it is possible to prevent the rotary distribution device 7420 from rubbing against the branch column 7411b and being worn due to rotation. Durability can be improved.

The right support column 7411R is provided with a third specific area hole 7443 instead of the second specific area hole 7442, and an overhang member 7411h overhanging the inside of the hole by the operation of the tilted floor 7412. Has the same configuration as the left support column 7411L, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The inclined floor 7412 is supported by the bearing portion 7411a1 and can change its state between an upward state in which the game ball is not mounted and a downward state in which the game ball is tilted, and the upper surface is the game ball drive device 7450. It is recessed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of. The distance between the recessed portion on the upper surface and the cylindrical portion 7453a of the game ball driving device 7450 is arranged so as to be longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll on the concave portion on the upper surface while swinging in the front-rear direction (circumferential direction of the arc).

The inclined flow path 7413 is an inclined flow path that guides the game ball that has reached the left side of the left support column 7411L to the first specific area hole 7441, and is a side support column in which the first specific area hole 7441 is bored. 7413a is provided.

In the present embodiment, the side support columns 7413a and the left and right support columns 7411R and 7411L having the specific region holes 7440 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to easily form a configuration in which the timed blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) blocks the flow of the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the time blocking plate 2411 described above in the second embodiment is arranged at a position where the inner diameter of each specific region hole 7440 is narrowed (see FIG. 85 (a)). As a result, the benefit given to the player when a plurality of game balls enter different specific area holes 7440 due to the difference in height of the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a of the present embodiment. The game ball can be passed through the higher switch first. Therefore, since the player can win the jackpot with the higher profit, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

Further, the timed blocking plate 2411 is arranged at a position where only one game ball can be accommodated in the specific area hole 7440 and the second and subsequent game balls are not stored (depth corresponding to the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, since only a single game ball is accommodated in the single specific area hole 7440, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 7400, the player can use the second specific area. It is possible to obtain a jackpot of 7 rounds or more that can be obtained by passing the game ball through the switch 2442a.

The rotary distribution device 7420 is a device composed of a ring-shaped rotating member fitted on the upper surfaces of the left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R, and is a first ring fitted on the upper surface of the left support column 7411L. A member 7421 and a second ring member 7422 fitted to the upper surface of the right support column 7411R are mainly provided.

The first annular member 7421 has a main body portion 7421a formed in a cylindrical shape, a plurality of openings 7421b opened by removing a wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7421a, and an opening portion 7421b thereof. The concave fitting portion 7421c in which the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 7421a is recessed toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction from the central portion in the width direction in which the is opened, and the concave fitting portion 7421c outside the concave fitting portion 7421c in the width direction. 7421d, which is formed over the circumference of the gear, is mainly provided.

In the first annular member 7421, the curved surface of the main body 7421a and the opening of the opening 7421b are alternately arranged at the lower portion by the rotational operation of the driving device 7430. As a result, when the game ball is allowed to flow down into the second specific area hole 7442 opened in the left support pillar 7411L (a part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442), the game ball A part of the case where the opening 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442 and the case where the main body 7421a closes the second specific area hole 7442 when the second specific area hole 7442 does not flow down and passes to the left. If) and can be formed.

The opening 7421b is composed of a pair of opening portions that are opened to a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and openings that are drilled over 90 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 90 degrees. That is, every time the first annular member 7421 rotates 90 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation axis is replaced by the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. The side surface surrounding the opening 7421b is formed so as to face the inner peripheral side (chamfer the corner portion on the outer peripheral side). As a result, the degree of deceleration when the game ball abuts (is caught) on the side surface of the opening 7421b can be reduced.

The recessed fitting portion 7421c is a portion formed according to the arrangement of the collar 7411c of the rolling floor device 7410. Since the first annular member 7421 rotates in a state where the collar 7411c is in contact with the recessed fitting portion 7421c, the collar 7411c is arranged so as to be in contact with the main body portion 7421a in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the collar 7411c and the main body portion 7421a come into contact with each other in the left-right direction (rotational axis direction), the positional deviation of the first annular member 7421 in the axial direction can be suppressed.

The gear 7421d serves as a transmission portion that meshes with the first gear 7432 of the drive device 7430. In the present embodiment, since the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 are rotated by the same drive motor 7431 with the same gear ratio, the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 are rotated. The rotation speed, the timing of the start of rotation, and the timing of the end of rotation are the same.

Similar to the first ring member 7421, the second ring member 7422 is opened by removing the wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7422a formed in a cylindrical shape and the main body portion 7422a. 7422b, a concave fitting portion 7422c in which the outer peripheral surface is recessed in the main body portion 7422a toward the center of rotation on the outer side in the width direction from the central portion in the width direction in which the opening 7422b is opened, and the concave portion thereof. It mainly includes a gear 7422d formed over the circumference on the outer side in the width direction from the fitting portion 7422c, and unlike the first ring member 7421, at the boundary portion between the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. A plurality of convex portions 7422e that are convexly provided on the inner peripheral side are mainly provided.

Since the configurations of the recessed fitting portion 7422c and the gear 7422d are the same as those of the recessed fitting portion 7421c and the gear 7421d of the first annular member 7421, the description thereof will be omitted.

The opening 7422b is composed of three opening portions that are opened to a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and openings that are drilled over 60 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. That is, every time the second ring member 7422 rotates 60 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotation axis is replaced by the main body portion 7422a and the opening portion 7422b. Unlike the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421, the side surface surrounding the opening 7422b is formed perpendicular to the circumference.

The convex portion 7422e is a portion that is projected in a strip shape in the left-right direction to move the game ball in the rotational direction when the game ball rolls on the main body portion 7422a, and is an opening adjacent to the entrance. The opposite side surface of the portion 7422b is formed by an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b. In the present embodiment, of the boundary between the main body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b, the convex portion 7422e is arranged at the boundary between the two openings 7422b and is convex at the boundary with one opening 7422b. The setting portion 7422e is not arranged.

The drive device 7430 is a device that generates a rotational drive force of the rotary distribution device 7420, and is supported by a drive motor 7431 in a state where the rotary shaft is inserted through the motor support hole 7412, and the rotary shaft of the drive motor 7431. The first gear 7432 that is fixed and meshed with the first ring member 7421 and the first gear 7432 are coaxially fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 7431 and meshed with the second ring member 7432. The second gear 7433 and the like are mainly provided.

In the present embodiment, the first gear 7432 and the second gear 7433 are composed of gears having the same shape, and the gears 7421d and 7422d of the rotary distribution device 7420 are composed of gears having the same shape. The gear ratios of the annulus member 7421 and the second annulus member 7422 are the same.

The specific area hole 7440 is formed inside the first specific area hole 7441 arranged inside the side support column 7413a, the second specific area hole 7442 arranged inside the left support column 7411L, and the right support column 7411R. It mainly includes a third specific region hole 7443 to be arranged.

The first specific area hole 7441 is a hole for guiding a game ball to a first specific area for a 16-round jackpot, and a first specific area switch 2441a is arranged inside. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first specific area hole 7441 and the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 7442 and the third specific area hole 7443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 7441, and the second specific area hole 7442 puts a game ball in the second specific area for a 7-round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and is different in that the third specific area hole 7443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for a three-round jackpot. That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the second specific area hole 7442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the third specific area hole 7443.

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 7442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 7443, and passes through the third specific area. The game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

By projecting the time limit blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) above the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch 2442a, and the third specific area switch 2443a in the overhanging state, in the overhanging state. It is possible to prevent (delay) the game ball from flowing down the specific region holes 7441, 7442, 7443.

Here, as shown in FIG. 85, the distances H1 to H3 from the specific region holes 7441 to 7443 to the specific region switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specific area hole 7441 to the first specific area switch 2441a. The distance (distance H3) from the third specific area hole 7443 to the third specific area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specific area hole 7442 to the second specific area switch 2442a. H1 <distance H2 <distance H3).

As a result, when the game ball falls from the vicinity of the upper end of each specific area hole 7441 to 7443 at the same timing, the shorter specific area switches 2441a to 2443a having a distance H1 to H3 are effectively detected. Can win jackpots with more rounds.

The game ball drive device 7450 is rotatably supported by a drive motor 7451 held in a state where a rotation shaft is inserted through a pair of support holes 7414 and a pair of support holes 7414 as a rotation shaft of the drive motor 7451. It mainly includes a cylindrical shaft rod member 7452 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 7451 and a spiral screw member 7453 that is integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452.

The screw member 7453 is a member integrally molded with the shaft rod member 7452, and is formed in a state in which a thin plate is spirally wound along the cylindrical cylindrical portion 7453a and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 7453a. Mainly includes a spiral plate portion 7453b.

The diameter of the cylindrical portion 7453a is formed so that the distance between the rotary distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be passed between the rotary distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 and the cylindrical portion 7453a.

In the spiral plate portion 7453b, the distance between adjacent thin plates in the left-right direction is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is accommodated between adjacent plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b, and can move to the left based on the rotation of the screw member 7453. In this embodiment, the distance between adjacent plates is designed to be 25 mm.

The horizontal width of each of the support columns 7411L and 7411R is 20 mm, and the specific region holes 7442 and 7443 are arranged at the center positions of the support columns 7411L and 7411R in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 101 (a)). ).

Further, the diameter of the spiral plate portion 7453b in the axial direction is set to be equal to or smaller than the inner diameter of the locus of the convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422. This prevents the rotary distribution device 7420 and the screw member 7453 from interfering with each other.

In the present embodiment, the spiral plate portion 7453b is formed as a left-handed screw with the right end portion as a base point. Therefore, the game ball can be moved to the left by rotating the screw member 7453 clockwise while visually recognizing the right end (right side view). In the present embodiment, the screw member 7453 is rotationally driven in a constant driving mode in which the accommodated game ball is moved to the left at a speed of 10 mm (V = 10 mm / s) per second from the time when the power is turned on.

The phase relationship between the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The phase relationship described below is merely an example, and the phase relationship between the first ring member 7421 and the second ring member 7422 is not limited to this.

85 (a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 7400, and FIG. 85 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annulus member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that in FIG. 85A, the drive device 7430 is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to 85 (c), the opening 7421b of the first ring member 7421 is a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the first ring member 7421 in the upper front side (FIG. 85 (b)). The boundary between the main body 7422a and the opening 7422b of the second annulus member 7422 is on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the second annulus member 7422 when it is housed in the area (upper left) of the area separated by the horizon and the horizon. It is composed of the phase relations arranged in. The state shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) will be described as an initial state of the rotary sorting device 7420.

The annulus members 7421 and 7422 are rotationally driven at a speed of 60 degrees per second (10 rpm) counterclockwise in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c). Further, the timing of starting the drive is controlled when the game ball wins the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and is stopped and controlled after being rotationally driven for several seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the drive triggers of the screw member 7453 and the ring members 7421 and 7422 are different, it can be difficult for the player to predict the operation pattern, and each ring member 7421 can be difficult to predict. , 7422 It is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being biased by the so-called timing hitting in which the game ball is launched by determining the posture.

In the present embodiment, the main body portions 7421a and 7421b (excluding the gears 7421b and 7422b) of the ring members 7421 and 7422 have a width dimension of 20 mm, and the openings 7421b and 7422b have a width direction dimension of 12 mm, respectively. It is placed in the center in the width direction. Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, the inside of the openings 7421b and 7422b is at the timing when the game ball pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the openings 7421b and 7422b. If the specific region holes 7442 and 7443 corresponding to the above are not arranged (if they do not fit perfectly), the game ball will pass to the left.

Further, the distance between the main bodies 7421a and 7422a of the ring members 7421 and 7422 (ignoring the gear 7422) is set to 30 mm.

Therefore, after the game ball is arranged at a position where the game ball can fall into the third specific area hole 7443 (center position in the width direction of the first annulus member 7421), the second specific area hole 7442 can fall (second annulus). The moving distance until the member 7422 is arranged at the center position in the width direction) is defined as 50 mm. That is, the game ball reaches the center position of the second specific area hole 7442 about 5 seconds after passing through the center position of the third specific area hole 7443, and during this time, the ring members 7421 and 7422 are 300 degrees ( It is rotated by an angle of (300 degrees counterclockwise) in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) (that is, it is the same as the state of being rotated 60 degrees clockwise).

Next, the operation of the second ring member 7422 will be described. The second annulus member 7422 is a member that distributes whether the game ball is dropped into the third specific region hole 7443 or flows down to the left without dropping into the third specific region hole 7443, and the game ball is left. It is configured so that a plurality of modes of flowing down toward the direction can be formed.

86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 86 (a) shows a state of being rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a state of being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 86 (a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 86 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 86 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball falls into the third specific region hole 7443. do.

87 (a) and 87 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 87 (a) shows a state of being rotated 330 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 87 (b) shows a state of being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 87 (a). Is illustrated. That is, FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 87 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 shown in FIG. 87 (b). The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball has the third specific region hole 7443. It does not fall to, but passes to the left side in FIG. 85 (a) (inward direction in FIG. 87 (b), toward the second specific region hole 7442 side). At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second ring member 7422, the game ball passes in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the second ring member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, the screw member 7453 passes through the tilted floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

88 (a) and 88 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). In addition, in FIG. 88 (a), the state of the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 87 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 88 (b), it is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 88 (a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second ring member 7422 in FIG. 87 (b) reaches the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 88 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 88 (b), since the opening 7421b is arranged below the game ball, the game ball passes through the opening 7421b and falls into the second specific region hole 7442.

A case where the game ball flows into the rotary distribution device 7420 at different timings will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

89 (a) and 89 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 89 (a) shows an initial state, and FIG. 89 (b) shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a). That is, FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the main body portion 7422 a of the second ring member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422. Therefore, the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422 shown in FIG. 89 (b). The center position of the game ball is placed at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second ring member 7422, the end portion of the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so that the game ball is specified as the third. It does not fall into the region hole 7443, but passes to the left side in FIG. 85 (a) (in the back direction in FIG. 87 (b), in the direction toward the second specific region hole 7442). The opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball by rotating the second annulus member 7422 counterclockwise by 30 degrees (0.5 seconds) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (b). , The center position of the game ball is moved by 5 mm from the center position in the width direction of the second annulus member 7422 (the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453), and the game ball and the third specific area hole 7443 Since the position is shifted, the game ball does not fall into the third specific region hole 7443 and moves to the left in FIG. 85 (a).

At this time, since the load for moving the game ball in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second ring member 7422, the game ball passes in a state of being located at the lowermost part of the second ring member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, the screw member 7453 passes through the tilted floor 7412 in a state of being located at the lowermost portion of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and reaches the first annular member 7421. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421.

90 (a) and 90 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 90 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 89 (b), and FIG. 90 (b) shows a state rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 90 (a).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second ring member 7422 to the center position of the first ring member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball that has passed through the second ring member 7422 in FIG. 89 (b) reaches the center position of the first ring member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 90 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 90 (b), since the end of the main body 7421a is arranged below the game ball, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the left side of FIG. 85 (a) (FIG. 90 (b) Downward direction, first specific area hole 7441 side).

In this way, the first annular member 7421 determines whether or not the member falls into the second specific region hole 7442. A slight difference in the timing at which the game ball flows into the rotary distribution device 7420 (for example, a difference of 0.5 seconds) can make it possible to make a difference in which specific region hole 7441 to 7443 the game ball falls into. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game ball passing through the rotary distribution device 7420 can be improved.

Up to this point, the case where the game ball flows down the lowermost portion of the second annulus member 7422 when passing through the second annulus member 7422 has been described. Next, a case where the second ring member 7422 is lifted from the lowermost part and passes through the second ring member 7422 will be described.

91 (a) and 91 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXXVc line of FIG. 85, and FIG. 91 (c) is a direction view of the arrow XCIc of FIG. 91 (a). It is a partial internal view of the 2nd ring member 7422 in the above. Note that FIG. 91 (a) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 91 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 91 (a). Is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 91 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I9 (a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 91 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). From here, the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 91 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the convex portion 7422e is formed in the vicinity of the entrance with the side surface on the opposite side of the adjacent opening 7422b formed by an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b, for example. When the game ball flows into the second ring member 7422 in a state of being in contact with the end of the convex portion 7422e, the game ball is placed on the opposite side of the opening 7422b (the side where the wall portion of the main body 7422a is located). It can be made easier to guide.

As a result, the second annulus member cannot be immediately determined at the timing at which the game ball abuts on the end of the convex portion 7422e (whether the game ball swings at the main body 7422a or the opening 7422b). When the ball flows into the 7422, it is possible to easily roll the game ball in a direction in which the player has a large profit.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the convex portion 7422e is not merely the timing of distribution in which the game ball falls into the third specific region hole 7443 with a probability of 1/2, but the second ring member 7422. Can be produced as a timing of a large chance that the game ball easily passes to the second specific area hole 7442 side. As a result, it is possible to increase the timing for enhancing the interest of the player.

FIG. 92 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 in the direction of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). In FIG. 92, an example of the path of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is shown by a curved line. Further, the period t until the game ball passes is shown with reference to the end portion of the tilted floor 7412 on the second ring member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), the game ball switches the downward direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 in the circumferential direction about every second. It flows down while swaying in the mode (illustrated by the arrow in the figure). Therefore, as shown at the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball and the second specific area hole 7442 are displaced, so that the second specific area hole is formed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling on the 7442.

93 (a) and 93 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), and FIG. 93 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 93 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 91 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in the top view. The game ball can fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged in.

When the game ball passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost always falls into the second specific region hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b). As described above in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swayed in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the game ball does not fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the game ball views the first ring member 7421 in FIG. 85 (b). a) A state of passing to the left side (FIG. 93 (b) in the back direction, in the inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) can be configured (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 93 (b)).

Therefore, if the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased. Power can be improved.

Further, FIG. 92 shows an example of how the game ball flows down. For example, when the game ball is caught on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, and the degree of convergence is increased, the game ball is regarded as a game ball. In some cases, the position with the second specific region hole 7442 is aligned.

Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from the same height of the second annulus member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball is not always the same. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of expectation when the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (the degree of expectation that it may pass through the first annulus member 7421 to the left), the flow of the game ball flows down. It can be made to watch over the aspect to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball flowing down the second flow-down device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second flow-down device 7400 itself can be improved.

94 (a) and 94 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state of being rotated 150 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 94 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Is illustrated, and the game ball P75 rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 94 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 94 (a).

As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 94 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball P75 is lifted (up to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P75 is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P75 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

FIG. 95 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 in the direction of arrow XCII of FIG. 85 (a). In FIG. 95, an example of the path of the game ball P75 flowing down the tilted floor 7412 is shown by a curved line. Further, the period t until the game ball P75 passes is shown with reference to the end portion of the tilted floor 7412 on the second ring member 7422 side.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. 94 (b), the game ball moves downward in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 approximately every 1.2 seconds. It flows down while shaking in the mode of switching to (indicated by the arrow in the figure). Since the swing width is larger than that shown in FIG. 92, the switching interval is long. Also in this example, as shown at the position near the period t = 4, when the game ball P75 passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are displaced. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the second specific area hole 7442.

Here, in FIG. 92, the game ball P75 is arranged at a position where the direction of swing is switched (a position away from the second specific region hole 7442) at a position near the period t = 4, whereas in FIG. 95, it is arranged. At the position of the period t = 4, the game ball P75 is arranged closer to the second specific region hole 7442 than the position where the direction of shaking is switched.

That is, by changing the swinging method of the game ball P75 to the swinging method of the game ball P74, it is possible to increase the types of effects by the movement of the game ball, and the game ball and the second specific area at the position of the period t = 4. By changing the degree of misalignment with the hole 7442, the probability of whether or not the game ball P75 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 can be changed, so that the attention of the game ball can be improved. ..

96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 94 (b), and FIG. 96 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 96 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), and the game ball P75 shown in FIG. 94 (b) is the first ring. The state at the timing when the member 7421 is arranged at the center position in the width direction is shown.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific region hole 7442 is inside the region of the opening 7421b in the top view. The game ball P75 can fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged in.

When the game ball P75 passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost always falls into the second specific region hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 96 (b). As described above in FIG. 95, in the present embodiment, the game ball can be swayed in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412. As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the lowermost part of the first ring member 7421, the game ball can flow down in a manner in which the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421. Even if the first ring member 7421 is in the state shown in FIG. 96 (b), the game ball P75 does not fall into the second specific region hole 7442, and the game ball P75 shows the first ring member 7421. It is possible to configure a state in which the ball passes to the left side of 85 (a) (the back side direction of FIG. 96 (b) and the inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 96 (b)). ..

Therefore, if the game ball P75 sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (if the flow mode of the game ball is different from usual), the probability that it will be beneficial to the player can be increased. You can improve your attention.

Further, FIG. 95 shows an example of how the game ball P75 flows down. For example, when the game ball P75 is caught on a part of the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 and decelerates, and the degree of convergence is increased, the game is played. In some cases, the sphere P75 and the second specific region hole 7442 are aligned with each other.

Therefore, even if the game ball P75 flows down from the same height of the second ring member 7422 to the tilted floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412, the flow path of the game ball P75 is always the same. Since it is not limited, the game ball is maintained while maintaining the expectation that the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilted floor 7412 (the expectation that it may pass through the first annulus member 7421 to the left). It is possible to make the flow of P75 watch over to the end. Thereby, the attention power of the game ball P75 flowing down the second flow-down device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention power of the second flow-down device 7400 itself can be improved.

97 (a) and 97 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state of being rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 97 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 97 (a). Is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 97B corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I15 (a).

As shown in FIG. 97, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 97 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball is lifted (up to half the radius). From here, the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 97 (b), and FIG. 98 (b) shows a counterclockwise rotation of 240 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 98 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 98 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a covers above the second specific region hole 7442. Since it is arranged in the embodiment, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442.

In FIGS. 97 and 98, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97 (b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 91 (b)), the tilted floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as the mode described with reference to FIG. 92.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 93, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state of being arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, the second ring member 7421 is second. It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413.

That is, even if the flow mode of the game ball that flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. Can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 is the most. Even if the game ball has settled down at the bottom, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annulus member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 side until the end ( It can be obscured (until the game ball passes through the first annulus member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the posture of the first ring member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. ..

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the convex portions 7422e of the second ring member 7422 the game ball is lifted, so that the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the posture of the first ring member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the ring member 7421.

In the present embodiment, all three openings 7422b are configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is filled with one color or is the same regardless of the phase. By forming from a striped pattern that can be visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which of the pair of convex portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

99 (a) and 99 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annulus member 7422 in the LXXXVc-LXXXVc line of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 99 (a) shows a state of being rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 99 (b) shows a state of being rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a). Is illustrated, and the game ball P76 that rolls on the inner surface of the second annulus member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 99 (b) corresponds to a state in which about 2 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 99 (a).

As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is arranged at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. 99 (a), and about 2 seconds after that, the game ball is released. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85 (a)) of the second annulus member 7422, and reaches the position shown in FIG. 99 (b) by the convex portion 7422e within about 2 seconds (of the second annulus member 7422). The game ball P76 is lifted (up to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P76 is pushed by the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), and is pushed out from the height position shown in FIG. 99 (b) toward the tilted floor 7412. Therefore, when the game ball P76 rolls on the tilted floor 7412, it flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

100 (a) and 100 (b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). Note that FIG. 100 (a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 99 (b), and FIG. 100 (b) shows a state rotated by 240 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a). The state is illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 100 (b) is shown after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 100 (a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 100 (b) is the first ring member. The state at the timing of being arranged at the center position in the width direction of 7421 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100 (b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a is partially above the second specific region hole 7442. The game ball cannot fall into the second specific region hole 7442 because it is arranged so as to cover the target.

In FIGS. 99 and 100, since the game ball is pushed out to the tilted floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. 94 (b)), the tilted floor 7412 flows down. The flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as the mode described with reference to FIG. 95.

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. 95, even if the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 in a state of being arranged at the lowermost portion of the first annular member 7421, the second ring member 7421 is second. It does not fall into the specific region hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413.

That is, even if the flow mode of the game ball that flows down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. Can be clearly separated.

Therefore, the flow mode of the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc is the same, and the swing converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 is the most. Even if the game ball has settled down at the bottom, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annulus member 7421 falls into the second specific region hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 side until the end ( It can be obscured (until the game ball passes through the first annulus member 7421), and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

Further, the difference in the posture of the first ring member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first ring member 7421 is caused by the difference in the convex portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. ..

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which of the convex portions 7422e of the second ring member 7422 the game ball is lifted, so that the game ball flows down the tilted floor 7412. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the posture of the first ring member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the ring member 7421.

In the present embodiment, all three openings 7422b are configured to have the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is filled with one color or is the same regardless of the phase. By forming from a striped pattern that can be visually recognized in color), it is difficult to grasp which of the pair of convex portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 100, the maximum amplitude of the pattern of the flow mode of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the tilted floor 7412 swings along the circumferential direction of the arc on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412. It can be formed as at least two different types of flow mode, and if the distribution probability of whether or not the first annular member 7421 is passed to the inclined flow path 7413 side is significantly different while maintaining each flow mode. It can be configured in such a manner.

That is, the game ball is the second ring member 7422 without changing the operation control of the rotary distribution device 7420 while maintaining the flow mode of the game ball that sways on the tilted floor 7412 after being lifted by the convex portion 7422e. It is possible to configure a state in which the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side depending on the timing of flowing into the first annular member 7421.

In the present embodiment, the inflow sensor 7416 (see FIG. 84) detects the timing at which the game ball flows into the screw member 7453. Therefore, from the phase of the first annular member 7421 at that timing, which specific region hole the game ball is in. It is possible to recognize whether or not the screw member 7453 has flowed into the screw member 7453 at the timing of falling to the 7441 to 7443, which can be used for the effect control.

For example, when it is the timing when it is confirmed that the game ball falls into the first specific area hole 7441, the game ball is between the spiral plates of the screw member 7453 with a flashy effect indicating that the maximum profit has been obtained. It can be performed as a look-ahead effect from the inside of the house. That is, by pre-reading the difference in profit that will be obtained depending on the flow mode of the game ball by control and giving a difference in the intensity of the effect when the game ball flows down to the second flow device 7400, the effect can be produced. It is not just a lively event, but can be given a role that is directly linked to the interests of the player.

As a result, when the flow mode of the game ball is the same (for example, in the case of the flow mode shown in FIG. 92), whether or not the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined flow path 7413 side from the player's point of view. I don't know, but on the control side, it can be recognized that most of the passage passes to the inclined flow path 7413 side (for example, see the above description in FIG. 98).

Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to prevent the flow-down mode of the game ball and the effect from being linked one-to-one, and when the flow-down mode of the game ball is the same as usual, another effect is performed. However, it is possible to prevent it from being determined to be a lively production (so-called "gase production"). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow mode of the game ball.

101 (a) and 101 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 7400 on the CIa-CIa line of FIG. 85 (b). In addition, in FIG. 101 (a), the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and in FIG. 101 (b), the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state. Further, FIG. 101 (a) shows a game ball P78 located at the left end position OUT of the second annulus member 7422 and a game ball P79 located at the right end position IN, and FIG. 101 (b) shows. The state after about 0.5 seconds from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the game ball P78 is not on the tilted floor 7412, the tilted floor 7412 is in an upward state, and the overhanging member 7411h is arranged outside the inner surface of the third specific region hole 7443. NS. In this state, the game ball P79 can fall into the third specific region hole 7443.

When 0.5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves to the left by about 5 mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the game ball on the left side. P78 rides on the tilted floor 7412, and the tilted floor 7412 is in a downward state due to the weight of the game ball P78.

In this state, since the overhanging member 7411h projects inward of the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443, the opening of the third specific area hole 7443 can be narrowed, so that the game ball P79 is the third specific area hole. It is possible to prevent the 7443 from falling.

Therefore, when the game ball P78 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 first passes through the second ring member 7422 to the left (toward the second specific region hole 7442 side), the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later. However, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling into the third specific region hole 7443, which obtains a profit smaller than the profit obtained by the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. As a result, when two game balls P78 and P79 flow into the second flow-down device 7400, the game ball P79 that has flowed in later can obtain a profit that is greater than the profit that can be obtained by the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. Therefore, after the flow path through which the previous game ball P78 passes is determined, it is possible to further improve the attention to the later game ball P79.

Further, since the game ball P78 stays on the upper surface of the tilted floor 7412 for about 3 seconds, the tilted floor 7412 returns to the upward state before the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later passes through the second annulus member 7422. Can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, in order to achieve the above effect, the distance between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b of the screw member 7453 is set to be 20 mm or more apart (in the present embodiment, the distance is about 25 mm). NS). As a result, it is possible to prevent the later game ball P79 from falling into the third specific region hole 7443 before the overhanging operation of the overhanging member 7411h.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b is about 25 mm, so that when the two game balls reach the third specific region hole 7443, the interval is 2.5 seconds (the second). The two ring members 7422 pass through the center position of the second ring member 7422 at intervals of 150 degrees rotation). Therefore, due to the structure of the second ring member 7422 (because the opening of the opening 7422b is arranged 180 degrees opposite to the wall of the main body 7422a), when one game ball falls into the opening, the other game The ball is easy to get on the wall.

Therefore, even if the timed blocking plate 2411 is not provided, at least one of the game balls can be easily sent to the left of the second ring member 7422.

Further, when the two game balls both ride on the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the arrangement of the convex portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 (arrangement every 120 degrees, one place). (From the omission of arrangement in the above), at least one of the game balls can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422. For example, when the game ball after the spiral plate portion 7453b is sandwiched behind the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) and flows into the second annulus member 7422, FIG. 72 (a) ), When the second ring member 7422 is rotated by 150 degrees (2.5 seconds) (see FIG. 91 (a)), the later game ball flows into the second ring member 7422.

In this case, the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87 (a) does not come into contact with the convex portion 7422e and does not swing in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422, but the game shown in FIG. 91 (a). The sphere P74 comes into contact with the convex portion 7422e and moves between the second ring member 7422 and the first ring member 7421 while swinging in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 92 (b)). Therefore, a plurality of game balls are continuously flowed into the screw member 7453 (driven by the operation of the screw member 7453 with one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b sandwiched between them), so that at least one game ball is used. Can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second ring member 7422, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two game balls are collectively inserted into the second flow-down device 7400, and the game balls are formed by the action of the rotary distribution device 7420 and the game ball drive device 7450 and the game balls. Is configured to pass through the second ring member 7421 to the left. That is, the player can obtain a more profitable jackpot (7-round jackpot, 16-round jackpot).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the process up to the acquisition of the jackpot, a case where the game ball is operated in the circumferential direction of the second annulus member 7422 and a case where the game ball is not operated are randomly formed, depending on which case is used. Since the distribution (probability) of the profits that can be obtained changes, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the flow locus of the game ball is the same, it is possible to form a pattern that can be any jackpot (7 round jackpot, 16 round jackpot) in each flow locus. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow-down mode of the game ball regardless of the flow-down trajectory of the game ball that has passed through the second annulus member 7422 to the left.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 130. In the first control example, since the electrical configuration is configured by the block diagram described above in FIG. 4, FIG. 4 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example, and FIG. 103 (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device in the first control example, FIG. 103. (B) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 104 (a) schematically shows the contents of the first per random counter in the first control example. FIG. 104 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the first special symbol, and is FIG. 104. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol, and FIG. 104 (d) is the first control. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 in the example and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

The main control device 110 performs the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown). Run. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device, and the like. Used in.

For the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the first winning type used for selecting the winning type of the special symbol are used. The counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for the above is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27, which are composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). And a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the middle starting winning opening 28 are provided, and each of these areas has a left starting winning opening 26 and a right starting winning opening 27 or a middle starting winning opening. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the mouth 28. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal start ports (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 102. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches a maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is left-started winning opening 26 and right-starting winning opening 27 or middle-starting winning opening 28. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of winning the prize. The value of the random number that is the hit of the special symbol is set by the first hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the first. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table, it is determined that the hit is a special symbol. The first random number table 202a of the special symbol is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and any of "0 to 399". If so, it is determined that it is a small hit (small hit probability = 1/1).

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a small hit, and one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to be added and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order. However, in the present embodiment, since the small hit probability is 1, it is not displayed in the out-of-order display mode.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the small hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 115), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 104 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for non-time saving time (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), time saving time (period in which the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and period in which the value of the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0). ) Is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the non-time saving time and the time saving time.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 102, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 117) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Special symbol 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, Winning number counter 203j, Operation counter 203k, Stay counter 203l, Notification counter 203m, Remaining ball timer flag 203n, Remaining ball timer 203o, Discharge number counter 203s, It has a time saving medium counter 203t, a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit medium flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit medium flag 203w2, a V inlet passing flag 203x1, a V flag 203x2, and other memory areas 203z.

As shown in FIG. 102, the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has , Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning in the left start winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the prize in the middle start winning opening 28 are stored. Since the configurations of the above are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth). Areas) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of balls (starting winning) to the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. , 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 110).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 110 and FIG. 112 in FIG. 112). See S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the number of balls held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls is stored by winning a prize in the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device up to four times based on the passage of the ball at the normal starting port 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 The value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c). S703: No) in FIG. 114.

The winning number counter 203j is the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball-entry accessory device 190. It is a counter for counting the number). Specifically, it is added and updated one by one based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) provided in the movable ball entry accessory device 190. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of winnings (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of ejected (value of the ejection number counter 203s) of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 match. (S1267 in FIG. 123) is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the large opening solenoid 209a is set to be on (excitation).

The retention counter 203l includes the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. It is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the embodiment is set to be on (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the retention counter 203l is subjected to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, second embodiment and sixth) based on the game ball passing through the fixed region hole switch 340a (see FIG. 5). A counter value corresponding to 12 seconds in the embodiment and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set (S724 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, in the process of S1322 of the small hit end process (FIG. 125, S1312) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one.

Further, based on the fact that the value of the retention counter 203l is determined to be 0 (S1323: Yes in FIG. 125), the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described above in the first embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 40) and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are set to off (see FIG. 23). The retention counter 203l is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the retention counter 203l and controlling the device such as the retention solenoid 413 to prevent the flow of the game balls, the winning of the specific area hole 440 depends on the number of the game balls winning the fixed area hole 340. Can be controlled. That is, it is possible to prevent all the game balls from passing through the third specific region hole 443 (the specific region hole having the specific region switch having the smallest profit given to the player).

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, sound and lighting effects) for attracting the attention of the player. In this embodiment, one second corresponds to the timing at which the game ball passes through each of the starting winning openings 26 to 28 and the end timing of the 15th round (10 balls are won in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is set. The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the notification process of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the above-mentioned processing for outputting the sound and lighting.

With this configuration, the player may be aware that the timing at which the game ball can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is approaching, or that the end of the jackpot game is approaching. Since the movable ball accessory device 190 can be set, the game ball is not fired at the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at the timing when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened, or the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is completed even though the jackpot game is completed. It is possible to reduce wasted balls caused by continuing to fire at.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is set from the open state to the closed state at the timing of the end of one round. .. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1264 in FIG. 123). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the movable piece 190a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for discriminating.

The remaining ball timer 203o wins a prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190a of the movable entry accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round after one of the preset rounds is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game ball to be ejected has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to be discharged is 4 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 5 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (2 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 and the number of ejected balls match. (S1267 in FIG. 123). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the movable ball entry accessory device 190.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. 2) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls winning in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and the number of discharges are determined (S1271 in FIG. 123).

The time-saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. The time saving medium counter 203t is set to 100 when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d (see FIG. 2). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the time saving switch 190d, the game shifts to the time saving game state of 100 times after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used to determine whether or not it is the jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125) (see S1327 in FIG. 125). It is referred to in the control process to determine whether it is the jackpot start timing (see S1101 in FIG. 120), and is set to off when it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the jackpot start timing (see S1101 in FIG. 120). See S1133 in FIG. 121). As a result, it is possible to execute processing according to the jackpot start timing.

The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is being played, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed any of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125), similarly to the jackpot start flag 203h described above. (See S1327 in FIG. 125), and in the jackpot control process, it is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1103 in FIG. 120), and in the jackpot control process, it is the timing of the end of the jackpot. When it is determined, it is set to off (see S1114 in FIG. 120).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. The small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process, which is executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (see S1301 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the start timing of the small hit. Is set to off (see S1302 in FIG. 124).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a small hit is being made, that is, whether or not a small hit game is being executed. The small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process in the same manner as the small hit start flag 203w1 described above (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1305 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the end timing of the small hit, it is turned off. It is set (S1330 in FIG. 125).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 104. (A) to (c) of FIG. 104 are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 104 (d) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the above-mentioned second random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above.

In the first random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is set. The value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a small hit and the first hit random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 is a small hit. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not there is a random number is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is won in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27. It is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) to be judged is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the middle start winning opening 28. Is a set table. In the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

As described above, the first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, the total number of random numbers that are small hits at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is 400, so that the first one. The probability of a small hit of a special symbol is "400/400 (= 1)".

In addition, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the middle start winning opening 28, the total number of random numbers that are the small hits of the second special symbol is 400, so the probability of the second special symbol being a small hit. Is "400/400 (= 1)".

As shown in FIG. 104 (d), in the second hit random number table 202c, there are 24 random number values that can be hit by a normal symbol at non-time saving, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for non-time saving. As described above, when the normal symbol is not time-saving, the total number of random numbers is 24 while the total number of random values is 240, so the probability of becoming a jackpot of the normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-time saving time of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-time saving time of a normal symbol, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the time is shortened, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of ordinary symbols, and the range is "5-204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for shortening the working hours. In this way, when the time is shortened, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of being a big hit of a normal symbol is "5/6".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a short time, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Will be done. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the time is shortened, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability time of the normal symbol, and the release period of the middle start winning opening 28 is "0. Since it becomes very long as "2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27.

A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when it hits a normal symbol, but the opening time and the number of times are arbitrary. You can set it to. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the electric accessory 28a is displayed. Is released for a predetermined time.

Here, the electric accessory 28a in this control example rotates in a double-opening manner with a pair of axes facing the front-rear direction of the game board 13 as rotation axes by the operation of the electric accessory solenoid 209b. The electric accessory 28a rotates in a double-opening manner (opening operation) to guide the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, by rotating (closing) in a mode of closing from both sides toward the center, the game ball is not guided (not entered) to the middle start winning opening 28.

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 28a in this control example is opened for 2 seconds when the time is shortened, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 28a of 0.2 seconds is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, even if the value of the second random number counter C4 is hit when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be won in the middle start winning opening 28. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is attempted to enter the middle start winning opening 28 even though the time reduction is not in progress (the jackpot with the time reduction is not displayed).

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 119).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets the small hit lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol display according to the value of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the display result in the device can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 105A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, an effect counter 223f, and a wing entrance. A pass counter 223i, a V inlet pass counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the above up to 4 times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control device 110, and uses the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. , The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is managed.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, or in the main control device 110, the variation in the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1702 in FIG. 129). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it differs only in that it is performed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by one each time.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The wing entrance passage counter 223i is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. The wing entrance passage counter 223i is incremented by 1 when a wing entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the large winning opening switch 190b is received (S712 in FIG. 115). The wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to when setting a display effect command in the lamp editing process (S1606 and S1609 in FIG. 128), and is set to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. It is initialized (S1604 in FIG. 128).

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting the game balls that have passed through the fixed area switch 340a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. The V-entrance passage counter 223j is incremented by 1 when a V-entrance passage command transmitted when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a is received (S1737 in FIG. 130). This V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to when setting a display effect command in the lamp editing process (S1621 in FIG. 128), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. (S1605 in FIG. 128).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big hit game when the big hit or the small hit continues. The round number accumulation counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S1724 in FIG. 130), and is initialized when a jackpot end command is received (S1724 in FIG. 130). S1728 of FIG. 130).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

FIG. 106 is a game flow diagram showing the flow of the game by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment as an example. The normal game by the pachinko machine 10 is started by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area. Hereinafter, the flow of the game will be described on the premise of launching the game ball. In the description of FIG. 106, FIGS. 1 and 2 are referred to as appropriate.

In the process of the game ball flowing down in the game area, when the ball enters any of the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27, the left starting winning opening switch corresponding to each starting winning opening The passage of the game ball is detected by the 210a, the middle start winning opening switch 210c or the right starting winning opening switch 210b, and a special symbol lottery is performed with this as an opportunity.

The special symbol lottery is a lottery related to whether or not the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In the present embodiment, since any random number in the first random number table 202a is set to be a small hit (small hit probability = 1/1), the special symbol lottery has a confirmatory role. It is a lottery. If no game ball enters any of the starting winning openings, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the starting winning opening (F01).

Further, although not particularly shown, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and then stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the lottery result. .. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be randomly changed by lottery or fixed to a constant fluctuation pattern.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed triggered by the entry into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, while the entry into the middle starting winning opening 28 is performed. The second special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is held as an opportunity.

And since the winning probability (small hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 (= 1/1), when the game ball enters any of the starting winning openings, it corresponds to the small hit as it is. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to acquire the hit determination random number internally in the main control device 110, but in the present embodiment, it is acquired.

In this embodiment, a hit (so-called direct hit, direct hit) in which the big hit game is directly executed when the ball enters each starting winning opening is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The direct hit determination may be performed using the hit determination random number acquired here.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is no display mode of "missing" in the special symbol, and it corresponds to "small hit 1" in the lottery by the first special symbol and corresponds to "small hit 2" in the lottery by the second special symbol. It is supposed to be. The difference between "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" is related to the number of operations of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and when "small hit 1" is applicable, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is 1. It operates twice, and when it corresponds to "small hit 2", the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates twice.

In any case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 operates (opens) with this as an opportunity (F02). The operation of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 changes the movable piece 190a to the open position as described above, but in the present embodiment, the "small hit" is performed over a predetermined opening time (for example, about 0.5 seconds). If it corresponds to "1", the movable piece 190a is opened only once, and if it corresponds to "small hit 2", the movable piece 190a is opened only twice for a short period of time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening switch 190b when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated (F03). Here, when the game ball enters the large winning opening switch 190b, the game flow further proceeds to the distribution operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190. If the game ball does not enter the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is aimed at entering the starting winning opening (F01) again. Will start.

When the game flow progresses into the movable ball entry accessory device 190, it is finally determined whether or not the game ball has passed through any specific area through various game ball distribution operations as described above. It is (F04). As a result, if the game ball is finally ejected from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the specific area, unfortunately the game flow ends there and the ball enters the start winning opening (F01) again. Aiming to start the game flow.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through a specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates again. Specifically, for example, either the large winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, opening once) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 30 seconds), or a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls are won. A special game (big hit game) is executed in which one round is set until the condition is satisfied, and this round is repeated for a predetermined number of continuous operations.

In the present embodiment, the number of continuous operations (number of rounds) is set to 16 times when the game ball passes through the first specific area switch 441a, and 7 times when the game ball passes through the second specific area switch 442a. When the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a, it is set to three times. During such a big hit game (while the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operating), a large number of balls can be entered into the large prize opening switch 190b, which is normally closed, within a short period of time. A player can win many prize balls in a lump.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable ball entry accessory device (F02) is set as the first round. Therefore, the number of rounds in which a player can actually win a large number of prize balls is the number of times (15 times, 6 times) obtained by subtracting 1 from each of the above-mentioned continuous operation times (16 times, 7 times, 3 times). 2 times).

Further, during the special game (during the big hit game), the opening port configured as the entrance of the flow path that allows the game ball to flow directly from the introduction passage 310 to the back side of the game board 13 and passes through the discharge detection switch 190c (FIG. FIG. When (not shown) is opened, the game ball is flowed down from the middle of the introduction passage 310 to the back of the game board 13, and the game ball hits the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400 as in a small hit game. It prevents it from flowing down.

As a result, the game ball is directly flowed down from the opening to the discharge detection switch 190c. Therefore, the special game can be performed without requiring the time to pass through the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400, and the processing time of the abnormal processing (see FIG. 123) described later can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b passes through the opening (not shown) arranged in the middle of the introduction passage 310, the discharge detection switch 190c is turned on in a maximum of 4 seconds. It is configured to pass.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball detected by passing through the specific region (F04) has passed through the time saving switch 444a (F06). Here, when the game ball has passed the time-saving switch 444a, the game flow proceeds to the time-saving game in which the electric accessory 28a operates a predetermined number of times (F07) after the jackpot game ends. At this time, during the short game, the game ball is easily introduced into the middle start winning opening 28, so that the movable piece 190a can be easily opened, and the distribution game in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is frequently performed. Therefore, it is easy to win big hits continuously.

If the game ball has not passed through the time reduction switch 444a, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the ball (F01) into the start winning opening.

FIG. 107 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 1 (also referred to as the small hit game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a for operating the movable piece 190a is turned on (also referred to as the small hit game 1). Open state). In this state, the player fires the game ball aiming at the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and when the game ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the ball is launched. The game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 or the outlier hole 350 and flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the flow of the small hit control 1 by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time of the entire small hit control 1 is set to 7.5 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 1 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens the set time t2 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t3 (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the fixed area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t3 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t2 elapses.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, the main control device 110 ends the small hit control 1 based on the fact that the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). 5 seconds, 12 seconds in the second embodiment, 12 seconds in the sixth embodiment, 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment) The retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described above in the first embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 40) or the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment is driven to allow the game ball to stay, and then, for example, the staying of the first embodiment. By stopping the drive of the solenoid 413 and putting the flow-down blocking plate 412 in the retracted state, the jackpot game control of a different number of rounds is performed based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flowing game ball has passed. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, the differences from FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a time chart illustrating the flow from winning the middle start winning opening 28 to the occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. The details of the operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28, the main control device 110 performs fluctuation control of the second special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a is turned on (also referred to as the small hit game 2). Open state).

Next, the flow of the small hit control 2 by the main control device 110 will be described. Here, the time of the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t4 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 2 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for the set time t5 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Next, when the set time t6 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the large opening solenoid 209a opens the set time t7 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). After that, when the set time t8 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the confirmation area switch 340, the small hit game is ended. The set time t8 is set to a sufficient time for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t7 elapses.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, the main control device 110 ends the small hit game control based on the fact that the game ball passes through the fixed area switch 340a, and the set time t10 (first embodiment). The retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described in the first embodiment for 5 seconds, 8 seconds in the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, and 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment and the drive motor 7451 described above in the seventh embodiment are driven, and for example, the flow prevention plate 412 (see FIG. 23) is set to an overhanging state. By causing the game ball to stay, and then de-energizing the staying solenoid 413 to bring the flow-down blocking plate 412 into the retracted state, it is based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flow-down game ball has passed. Then, the jackpot game control of different number of rounds is performed. The details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 125. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or the middle starting winning opening 28 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 110 and 112.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is caused by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. After the through gate passing process is executed, the wing entrance passing process is executed to produce an effect based on the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S140), and the game ball passes through the fixed area hole 340. Based on the above, the V entrance passage process that controls the subsequent jackpot game is executed (S141), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S108). S109), the timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109) to control the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. It is the processing of.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S201). The jackpot includes during the display indicating the jackpot (including during the jackpot game) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B changes. If it is not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted values in the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol variation start process is a process of determining a small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Get the value of (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211 the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 110. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a small hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability of a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol is 1 (1/1), this lottery has a meaning as a confirmation work.

In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a small hit of a special symbol (S243). In the process of S243, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is a small hit (S243: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S244). On the other hand, in the process of S243, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit, this process ends. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

After the processing of S244 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1, and this process is terminated (S221).

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit probability of the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set to 1, but it is not necessary to be limited to this. For example, the probability of winning a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be 0.01, and the probability of a small hit may be 0.99.

Next, the small hit start setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213).

In the small hit start setting process (S244), first, an opening scenario of the large opening solenoid 209a is set (S301). After that, the small hit start flag 203w1 and the small hit medium flag 203w2 are set to on (S302), and this process ends.

As the opening scenario, different opening modes are set depending on which special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is a small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, an opening scenario of the mode shown in FIG. 107 (opening once) or the mode shown in FIG. 108 (opening twice) is set.

Next, the start winning process (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or the middle starting winning opening 28 (starting winning). This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process (FIG. 112, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1). (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, even if there is no winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the special symbol 1 reserved ball If the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes). , The value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, in the processes S407 to S412, the same process is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28 for the processing of S401 to S406. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the middle start winning opening 28 (S407: No), this process ends after the process of S412.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the middle start winning opening 28 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 28a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (FIGS. 113 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit (S609). The jackpot includes a jackpot game and a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the jackpot is not hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of C4 and the random number table 202c per second symbol for time saving, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 104 (d)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. Based on the second hit random number table 202c of the above, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for non-time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 104 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: Yes), whether or not the current time is a big hit. Is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the middle start winning opening 28 as much as possible during the big hit, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 28a are opened even when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to a period (0.2 seconds) during which it is impossible to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a prize ball due to the game ball entering the middle start winning opening 28 during the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls to be ejected from changing significantly.

In the processing of S615, if the jackpot is not hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is hitting the jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is 0.2 seconds. At the same time, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit, when the time of the normal symbol is shortened, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the non-time reduction of the normal symbol, and the middle start winning opening Since the release period of 28 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the processing of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set.

When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 113, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 28a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), determines whether or not the ball has passed at the normal symbol start port (through gate 67), and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 114 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate 67) (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second area on hold is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third area on hold is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth area on hold is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the wing entrance passage process (S140) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a wing entrance passage process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the wing entrance passing process (S140), when it is detected that the game ball has passed the large winning opening switch 190b, it is first determined whether or not the game ball is in a small hit (S711). In the process of S711, when it is determined that a small hit is being made (S711: Yes), a wing entrance passage command is set (S712), and this process is terminated. If it is not in the small hit (S712: No), it means that the game ball has entered the large winning opening switch 190b even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set (S713) and this process is performed. To finish.

The wing entrance passage command set in the process of S712 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the wing entrance passage command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the large prize opening switch 109b, and at the same time, produces an effect based on the passage of the large winning opening switch 190b to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Send a command to execute. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the entry of the ball into the movable entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 106).

Next, the V inlet passing process (S141) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process (S141). This V inlet passing process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the V entrance passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (S721). In the process of S721, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the fixed region hole 340 (S721: Yes), the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S722), and the V entrance passage command is set (S723). , A counter value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 8 seconds in the second embodiment and the sixth embodiment, 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set in the residence counter 203l (S724). End the process.

While the retention counter 203l maintains a value of 0 or more, the corresponding drive device (retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment), the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the seventh embodiment are set to ON (excitation).

The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S721, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the fixed region hole 340, it is next determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to ON (S725). When it is determined in the process of S725 that the V inlet passage flag 203x is not set on (set to off) (S725: No), this process ends.

In the process of S725, when it is determined that the V inlet passage flag 203x is set to ON (S725: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value corresponds to jackpot C (S726). When it corresponds to the jackpot C (S726: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to on (S727), and the process proceeds to S4604. The jackpot C corresponds to a 16-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S726, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot C (S726: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot D (S729). In the process of S729, if it is determined that the jackpot D is applicable (S729: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S730), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. The jackpot D corresponds to a 7-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S729, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot D (S729: No), then it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot E (S731). If it is determined in the process of S731 that it corresponds to the jackpot E (S731: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot E is set to ON (S732), and the process proceeds to the process of S4604. The jackpot E corresponds to a 3-round jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S731 that it does not correspond to the jackpot E (S731: No), an error command is set (S733), and this process is terminated. In this control example, after the game ball that has entered the movable ball entry accessory device 190 has passed through the fixed region hole 340, the jackpot that can be obtained is limited to jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E. Therefore, when the jackpot type values are not jackpot C, jackpot D, and jackpot E after passing through V, the V entrance passage process (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the fixed area switch 340a is executed. Is considered to be the case where the game ball is illegally won by the fixed area switch 340a. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S731, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected. When the processing of S727, S730 or S732 is completed, the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0 and the main processing is terminated (S728).

By setting the time-saving and medium-time counter 203f to 0 in the process of S728, the time-saving game is configured to end when the jackpot game is started.

When any of the V flags 203x2 is set to on in the processing of S141, the V inlet passing flag 203x1 is set to off in the small hit end processing (see S1324 and S1328 in FIG. 125).

When the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to off, the type of jackpot is not determined in the processing of S141. Therefore, in this control example, during the small hit game, the jackpot type is determined depending on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a the game ball first passes through, and then the game ball. No matter which specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a are passed through, the passage is invalid (not reflected in the control).

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 119, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 119), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), the output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 110) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 112) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, a command such as a round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the jackpot state is reached, the jackpot effect is executed and the movable ball entry combination is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the jackpot switch 190b of the object device 190 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the jackpot switch 190b is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the jackpot switch 190b has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the jackpot switch 190b. .. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening switch 190b is closed. The opening and closing of the large winning opening switch 190b is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

Next, the small hit control process (S1041) that controls the opening and closing of the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is executed. In the small hit control process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process. The variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113). )do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 117 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S901). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a big prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth switch 190b.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the V entrance passage process (see FIG. 116) is executed and then the start of the jackpot is set (see S1327 in FIG. 125), it is determined that the jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the process of the jackpot time accessory device operation start process (S1102) is executed, and this process is terminated. The processing of S1102 will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot is in progress (S1103). The jackpot includes a display indicating a jackpot (including during a jackpot game) and a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), the process of opening the jackpot accessory device (S1104) is executed, and then the process of S1105 is executed. The processing of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter has reached the number of times (for example, once) set in the current round. In the process of S1105, when the value of the open count counter reaches the number of times set in the current round (S1105: Yes), the large winning opening closing time timer countdown process is executed (S1106). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if the value of the open count counter does not reach the number of times set in the current round (S1105: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and this process ends.

In the big winning opening closing time countdown process (S1106), the countdown of the big hit time interval timer (S1149) set in S1104 is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed (S1107). Then, when the closing time has not elapsed (S1107: No), the abnormal process is executed (S1118), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing time has elapsed (S1107: Yes), the round number counter is incremented (S1108). The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

After the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached the number of execution rounds (S1132) set in S1102. At this time, if the value of the round number counter has not yet reached the number of execution rounds (S1109: No), the process proceeds to S1115 and the round number command is set (S1115).

The land number command set in S1115 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119). The voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the current number of rounds based on the received round number command, and reflect the result in the effect control during the jackpot.

Next, a command for designating the closing of the normal round grand prize opening is set (S1116). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closure of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 after each round at the time of a big hit. The command for designating the closing of the large winning opening in the normal round is a command indicating that the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is closed except in the final round. The command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

Next, the process of S1117 is performed, the winning ball count counter counted in this round is reset (S1117), and at the same time, the value of the open count counter is also reset, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1109, when the value of the round number counter reaches the number of execution rounds (S1109: Yes), it means that this round is the final round, and then the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off. It is determined whether or not it is done (S1110). When it is determined in the processing of S1110 that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is not set to off (that is, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to on) (S1110: No), then the abnormal processing is executed. (S1118), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1110 that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1110: Yes), the number of game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and the games that have been discharged. This is the case when the number of spheres matches, and then the round number counter is reset (S1111).

Next, a command for designating the closing of the final round grand prize opening is set (S1112). This command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the closure of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 in the final round at the time of a big hit. Here, the final round corresponds to 3 rounds if it is a 3-round jackpot, 7 rounds if it is a 7-round jackpot, and 16 rounds if it is a 16-round jackpot.

Next, the jackpot end command is set (S1113), the jackpot middle flag is turned off (S1114), the process proceeds to S1117, and the present process is terminated. The final round big winning opening closing designation command and the big hit end command are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

The jackpot time accessory device operation start processing S1102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot time accessory device operation start process S1102.

First, the jackpot start waiting time timer countdown process is executed (S1130). In this process, the main control device 110 sets an initial value in the jackpot start waiting time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time. The initial value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is set as the waiting time (for example, about several seconds) from the end of the operation of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 at the time of a small hit to the operation of the movable ball-entry accessory device 190 again. .. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, for example, the pre-start effect of the big hit game is performed by utilizing this “big hit start waiting time”.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start waiting time has elapsed (S1131). If the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is not yet 0 (S1131: No), it is determined that the jackpot start waiting time has not elapsed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer becomes 0 (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132 and subsequent processes.

Next, the number of execution rounds is set (S1132). In the present embodiment, the number of execution rounds (number of continuous operations) to be set is three types of "3 rounds", "7 rounds", and "16 rounds", and it is a big hit as to which number of execution rounds to set. The number of execution rounds can be set by checking the type status (checking the type of V flag 203x2).

However, as described above, the first opening (small hit operation) of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 corresponds to the first round. Therefore, here, the remaining "2 rounds", "6 rounds", or "15 rounds" are set as the number of execution rounds. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 203 as a corresponding value on the program.

Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S1133), the jackpot start command is set (S1134), and this process ends.

The jackpot start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the effect control to start the jackpot.

The jackpot accessory device opening process S1104 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot time accessory device opening process S1104. It should be noted that this process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 as an operation during the big hit game (special game).

First, the main control device 110 determines whether or not it is the timing for opening the large winning opening switch 190b (S1141). In the process of S1141, when it is determined that it is the timing to open the big winning opening switch 190b (S1141: Yes), the big winning opening switch 190b is opened (S1142). Specifically, the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is output. As a result, the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates, and the large winning opening switch 190b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Next, the jackpot release timer is set (S1143). The value of the timer set here is the opening time per time when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In the present embodiment, the total opening time for one round (for example, about 30 seconds) is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer. With this degree of opening time, a sufficient number (for example, about 10) of game balls can be won in the large winning opening during that period.

Next, a jackpot interval timer (big winning opening closing time timer) is set (S1144). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between the rounds during the big hit or the waiting time at the end of the final round. The value of the timer is set to, for example, about 3 seconds (a value longer than the set value of the remaining ball timer).

On the other hand, in the process of S1141, when it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the large winning opening switch 190b (S1141: No), then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145).

In the process of S1145, when it is determined that the large winning opening switch 190b is being opened (S1145: Yes), the open timer countdown process is executed (S1146). In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process of S1102 is executed. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (S1147: No), then the number of winning balls The count process is executed (S1149). In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the value of the count number is incremented based on the winning detection signal input from the large winning opening switch 190b within the opening time.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current count number is less than the predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (1 round during a big hit, 1 time during a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (S1150: Yes), this process ends.

When it is determined in S1147 above that the opening time has ended (S1147: Yes), or in S1150 it is determined that the count number has reached a predetermined number (S1150: No), then S1148 is executed.

In S1148, the main control device 110 closes the grand prize opening switch 190b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is stopped. As a result, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1151). Next, the interval standby process (S1152) is executed. In this process, the countdown of the interval timer set in the process of S1102 is executed. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the value of the release count counter is then incremented (S1153), and this process is terminated. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

On the other hand, in the process of S1145, when it is determined that the large winning opening 190b is not open (S1145: No), this process is terminated.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1118). In the abnormality processing (S1118), a processing for monitoring whether or not the large winning opening switch 190b is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 123, S1118), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1261). If it is outside the round validity period (S1261: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the process of S1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1264: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1265) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1266). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), it is determined whether the number of discharges (total value of the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (value of the number of prize counters 203j) match (S1267). ..

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulently leaving the game ball in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and passing the game ball through the fixed region hole 340 after the jackpot game is completed.

In the process of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j and the discharging number counter 203s are reset to the initial values (S1271), and then this process ends.

The small hit control process (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). This small hit control process (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the big hit can be executed and the movable ball can be entered. This is a process for opening or closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the accessory device 190.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is started (S1301). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the process of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 111), it is determined that the small hit is started. In the process of S1301, when the small hit is started (S1301: Yes), the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to off (S1302), the opening scenario is set (S1303), and the small hit start command is set. (S1304), this process is terminated.

The small hit start command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect of starting the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the small hit is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether the small hit is in progress (S1305). Specifically, the determination during the small hit is determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is on. In the process of S1305, if it is not a small hit (S1305: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1305, if it is in the middle of a small hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the next opening (S1306). If it is the next opening timing (S1306: Yes), the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened (S1307), and a command indicating the number of newly started opening is set (S1308). This process ends. The command indicating the number of times of release set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command indicating the number of times of opening, the voice lamp control device 113 starts the effect according to the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is not the timing of the next opening (S1306: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after opening the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, it is determined that the closing timing is reached.

In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the timing of closing the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S1309: Yes), the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is determined. Is closed (S1310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is not satisfied (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit period has elapsed (S1311).

Specifically, for each small hit opening scenario, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the small hit, it is determined that the small hit period has passed. That is, in the small hit control 1, when 7.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit (see FIG. 107), in the small hit control 2, when 10 seconds have passed from the small hit (see FIG. 108), the small hit It is determined that the period of

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the small hit period has elapsed (S1311: Yes), the small hit end process is executed (S1312), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1311, if it is determined that the small hit period has not elapsed (S1311: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the small hit end processing (S1312) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (S1312). This small hit end process (S1312) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that the timing is the end of the small hit.

In the small hit end process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the V inlet passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321). In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321: Yes), it is a case where the game ball passes through the fixed region hole 340 during the small hit game (specific region hole 440). Since it has passed through any of the specific area switches 441a, 442a, 443a), a process for starting the execution of the jackpot game is performed. First, the residence counter 203l is updated (S1322).

In the process of S1322, the retention counter 203l is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the residence counter 203l is determined to be 0 or less (S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to S1324.

Next, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324). In the process of S1324, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324: Yes), the opening scenario of the big winning opening switch 190b is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1325). ), The start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1326). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot medium flag 203v2 are set to on (S1327), the V inlet passing flag 203x1 is set to off (S1328), the V flag 203x2 is set to off (S1329), and S1330. Move to processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the retention counter 203l is larger than 0 in the processing of S1323 (S1323: No), or in the processing of S1324, the V flag 203x2 is not set to on (that is, the V flag 203x2 is off). (S1324: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is not on (S1321: No), it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the fixed area switch 340a during the small hit game, so a big hit is given. In order to end without doing so, a small hit end command is set (S1331), and the process proceeds to S1330.

The small hit end command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the small hit end effect based on the winning information stored in the prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223, and selects the small hit end effect. To start.

After shifting to the processing of S1330, the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to off (S1330), the opening scenario is cleared (S1332), and this processing is terminated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1512 (see FIG. 127) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1511 in FIG. 127), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1512. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1512 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1512. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1514 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1514, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1514 is executed (see S1513 in FIG. 127). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1514 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1514 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1408 is performed via the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached via the processing of S1404 to S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1501 this time was executed (S1501), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1510 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1509. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1509 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1510 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1510 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1510 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, a setting is made such that the output of the indicator lamp 34 is switched to a low power setting when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the gaming state. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the gaming state, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. The details of this lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

After the processing of S1509, a command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1510). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Then, when the command determination process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1511). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1513), and the power-off process is executed (S1514). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1515), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1512), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1512: No), the process returns to the process of S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1512: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed. Therefore, after that, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like do not change depending on the game state. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Here, the lamp editing process (S1508) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the lamp editing process (S1508). This lamp editing process (S1508) is a process executed at 1 ms intervals in the main process (see FIG. 127).

In the lamp editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S1601). In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit is a small hit (S1602).

In the process of S1602, when it is determined that the player is not in the small hit (S1602: No), the current game state is the normal game state in which the game ball is launched with the aim of advancing to the small hit game state. be. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern (S1603), the wing entrance passage counter 223i is set to 0 (S1604), and the V entrance passage counter 223j is set to 0. (S1605), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1602, if it is determined that a small hit is being made (S1602: Yes), a game ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened. As a result, the game ball can flow into the movable ball entry accessory device 190a, and the lamp output of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern so that the player can grasp this. (S1606). In the present embodiment, in the A1 pattern, the illuminated portions 29 to 33 emit blue light.

The A1 pattern is one of the outputs of the lamp for the small hit game. In the present embodiment, the output patterns of A1 to A3 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

For example, in the A1 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit blue light, in the A2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit green light, and in the A3 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 turn red. By emitting light, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of a big hit. The output pattern is not limited to three, and can be configured by any number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the orientation of.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607). In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608). In the present embodiment, in the A2 pattern, the illumination units 29 to 33 emit green light with a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609). When it is determined that the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A3 pattern (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. In the present embodiment, in the A3 pattern, the illumination units 29 to 33 emit red light with a higher expectation of a jackpot than green.

That is, the color of the light emitted from the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 during the small hit game can be changed according to how many balls the game ball has passed through the large winning opening switch 190b. As described above in the first embodiment, when a plurality of game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the special route hole 323 where the game balls easily flow down into the fixed region hole 340. Therefore, the number of game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 190b can be directly associated with the change in the expectation of the big hit. It can be done as it changes in response to profits. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the wing inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 or more in the processing of S1607 (S1607: No), or when the value of the wing entrance passage counter 223j is smaller than 2 in the processing of S1609. If it is determined (S1609: No), the process proceeds to S1611.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611). In the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611: Yes), the current state is the state in which the transition to the jackpot game is confirmed and the jackpot type is determined from now on. Is. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the hit acquisition effect pattern (S1612), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is smaller than 1 (0) (S1611: No), the transition to the jackpot game is undecided, so that the electric power is transmitted. The state of the lamp output of the decorative portions 29 to 33 is maintained, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1601, when it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is 1 (S1620).

In the process of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is 1 (S1620: Yes), the number of jackpot rounds is undecided.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621). In the process of S1621, when the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is determined to be 1 (S1621: Yes), the current state is that one game ball passes through any specific region hole 440. The number of jackpot rounds is determined based on the above, and there is still a possibility of winning a jackpot of 3 rounds. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B1 pattern, and this process ends (S1622). In the present embodiment, in the B1 pattern, the illuminated portions 29 to 33 emit gold light.

The B1 pattern is one of the outputs of the lamp for producing the jackpot game, which is the output for producing the first round. In the present embodiment, the output patterns of B1 and B2 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33.

For example, in the B1 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit gold, and in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated parts 29 to 33 emit rainbow colors, so that the profit of the jackpot increases for the player. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of. The output pattern is not limited to two, and can be configured by any number, and is not limited to configuring the difference depending on the color. For example, the blinking speed and the light emission of the lamp. The difference may be configured by changing the orientation of.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V inlet passage counter 223j is not 1 (S1621: No), the current state is that two or more game balls pass through any specific region hole 440. The number of jackpot rounds is determined based on the passing. For example, in the first embodiment, in the process in which two or more game balls pass through the fixed region hole 340 and flow down inside the second flow-down device 400, at least one game ball goes to the third branch guide flow path R3. It is supposed to be heading.

The game ball flowing down the third branch guide flow path R3 will pass through either the first specific region hole 441 (giving a 16-round jackpot) or the second specific region hole 442 (giving a 7-round jackpot). The passing timing is configured to be earlier than the passing timing when another game ball passes through the third specific region hole 443 (giving a jackpot for 3 rounds).

Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443, it is confirmed that the passage is invalid, so that the current state may win a jackpot of three rounds. It is in an excluded state. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B2 pattern, and this process ends (S1623). In the present embodiment, in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illuminated units 29 to 33 emit light in rainbow colors, which have a higher degree of expectation of profits that can be obtained than gold.

In the process of S1620, if it is determined that the value of the round number accumulation counter 223k is not 1 (S1620: No), the current state is that the number of jackpot rounds is fixed, and the game proceeds to the jackpot game of transition to 2 rounds. It is in a state of being. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the effect pattern for the jackpot game (S1624), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state before proceeding to the small hit game, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern, and the small hit game state. When the transition from the jackpot game state to the jackpot game state, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set as the hit acquisition effect pattern, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is fixed, and the remaining jackpot game is executed. The output of the lamps of units 29 to 33 is set in the jackpot game effect pattern.

In the state described here, the profit given to each player is fixed, so even if the color difference is provided, the player's interest is not improved, but rather the change in the emission color stimulates the eyes. It leads to fatigue of the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being tired meaninglessly, in the normal game effect pattern, the hit acquisition effect pattern, and the jackpot game effect pattern, light of a similar color (for example, white light) is used. The lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 are made to emit light. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing of determining the profit.

It should be noted that the moment of winning the jackpot is the moment when the interest of the player is most improved. It is configured to be stronger than the emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 according to the pattern and the effect pattern for the jackpot game.

In FIG. 128, it has been described that the light emission of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is controlled, but in the processing of S1509, the sound effect output from the audio output device (speaker, etc., which is not shown) 226 is also controlled in the same manner. Will be done. That is, the sound changes based on the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player. For example, when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608) than when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern (S1606). , The tempo of the output music is increased or the volume is increased.

Next, the command determination process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1510). This command determination process (S1510) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (FIG. 129, S1510), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (S1701). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the received hold ball number command is the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command. , That is, the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main control device 110 is extracted. The value of the hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1702).

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28, or a lottery of a special symbol. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the above is performed, so that every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by S1702. The values of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the starting prize or drawing the special symbol. Can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1702 is executed, the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are visibly arranged by the player as a substitute for the liquid crystal display device. A display hold ball number command for notifying the 7-segment display (not shown) is set. As a result, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the 7-segment display.

On the other hand, when the hold ball number command is not received (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command is received (S1703). When a hit-related command is received (S1703: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S1704), and then this process ends.

In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1705). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1705: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (for example, "striking a ball at the top") is selected, and the notification command is set (S1706). ..

Next, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the broadcast command has not been received (S1705: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1707), this process is terminated. If the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the 7-segment display, the command is stored on the 7-segment display. It sets the command so that it will be sent to.

Here, the hit-related processing (S1704) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S1704). This hit-related process (S1704) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 129) that a hit-related command has been received.

In the hit-related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S1721: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S1722), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on a 7-segment display (not shown).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S1721: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1723). In the process of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1724). After that, the display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1725), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1723 that the round number command has not been received (S1723: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S1726). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S1726 (S1726: Yes), the jackpot end command for display is set (S1727), the round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S1728), and this process is performed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S1726 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S1726: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S1729).

If it is determined in the process of S1729 that the small hit start command has been received (S1729: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S1730), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1729 that the small hit start command has not been received (S1729: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S1731).

If it is determined in the process of S1731 that a small hit end command has been received (S1731: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game (S1732). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733).

In the process of S1733, when it is determined that the wing entrance passage command has been received (S1733: Yes), 1 is added to the wing entrance passage counter 223i (S1734). The wing entrance passage counter 223i added here is referred to in the ramp editing process described in FIG. 128 3 for determining the number of game balls entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small hit game. NS.

When the processing of S1734 is completed, a display wing entrance passage command is set (S1735) in order to execute an effect (for example, see FIG. 128) based on the ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small hit game. ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1733, if it is determined that the wing entrance passage command has not been received (S1733: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736).

In the process of S1736, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S1737). The V inlet passage counter 223j added here is referred to in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG. 128 in order to determine the number of balls entering the fixed area switch 340a during the jackpot game (first round).

When the process of S1737 is completed, a display V entrance passage command is set (S1738) in order to execute an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1736, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S1736: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect is determined by how many game balls have passed through the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and how many game balls have passed through the fixed area switch 340a. (See FIG. 128). As a result, even when the player is not paying attention to the game ball, it is possible to notify that the player is in an advantageous state depending on the production mode, and the player misses the moment of the big hit. Can be prevented.

Further, by this, it is possible to link the characteristic of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (the characteristic that the size of the profit that can be expected to be acquired changes depending on how many game balls are inserted) and the effect. That is, the change in the production can be configured not as a mere change in liveliness but as a change in the production based on the change in the profit that can be expected to be acquired. This makes it possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the production.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the game ball that has entered the second branch region 420 of the second flow-down device 400 falls immediately after reaching the first delay preparation hole 423 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, a blocking member is provided inside the first delay preparation hole 423 by the driving force of a driving device such as a solenoid to prevent the game ball from falling, and the blocking member acts to reach the third branch region 430. The fall of the game ball may be stopped until the other game ball headed for passes through the specific region hole 440. In this case, the length of the second delay induction flow path R6 can be shortened, and the space occupied by the flow path formed by the second flow-down device 400 can be saved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution body 322 is arranged separately from the driving means has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a locking member that projects toward the distribution body 322 at predetermined periods may be provided, and the distribution body 322 may be fixed at predetermined periods by the action of the locking member. In this case, when only one game ball reaches the distribution body 322 and comes into contact with the distribution body 322 when the distribution body 322 is fixed in the equilibrium state, the distribution body 322 does not rotate and the game ball goes to the special route hole 323. Flow down. That is, even if only one game ball enters the first flow-down device 300 every predetermined period, a period during which the game ball enters the special route hole 323 can be generated.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution body 322 operates in rotation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution body 322 may slide left and right.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the frictional resistance generated between the shaft support rod 322f of the distribution body 322 and the resistance extending portion 322d changes according to the rotation angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, it rotates coaxially with the distribution body 322 and does not engage until the distribution body 322 changes from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, and the distribution body 322 changes from the first angle state to the second angle state. May include an engaging member that engages and rotates in synchronization with the distribution body 322. In this case, only the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is applied from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, while in addition to the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 from the first angle state to the second angle state, the engaging member Since the resistance of the engaging member due to the weight of the distribution body 322 is applied to the distribution body 322, the ease of rotation of the distribution body 322 can be changed. The mode of engagement is not particularly limited, and may be engaged from the inside of the fan-shaped portion 322a or from the outside of the fan-shaped portion 322a, for example.

In each of the above embodiments, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area hole 340, which specific area switch 441a to 443a the game ball passing through the specific area later passes through is the previous game ball. Although the case where the selection is randomly selected regardless of whether or not the switch passes through the specific area switches 441a to 443a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the later game ball may pass through the specific area switches 442a, 443a, which are more profitable to the player than the specific area switches 441a to 443a through which the earlier game ball has passed. In this case, the interest can be continuously improved while the player watches the flow mode of the game ball.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the large winning opening switch 190b is normally closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the large winning opening switch 190b may be always open. In this case, since the player is always in a state where he / she can aim for a big hit, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the determination values of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 are all set as the same small hit determination value has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set as different small hit determination values. In this case, for example, half of the determination values may correspond to the determination values in which the time reduction is attached after the big hit, and the remaining determination values may correspond to the determination values in which the time reduction is not attached after the big hit. As a result, it is possible to sort out whether or not the time reduction is applied after the big hit without requiring the time reduction switch 209d.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the corresponding drive device (for example, the residence solenoid 413) operates for a predetermined period after passing through the fixed region switch 340a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform a constant operation based on the operation timing of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. In this case, the drive maintenance period of the drive device (for example, the retention solenoid 413) is set to be longer than the longest period required for the game ball to pass through the first flow device 300 and reach the flow prevention plate 412.

In the third embodiment, the case where the pair of guide rails 3321 on which the game ball rolls is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of guide rails 3321 are formed from a linear shape that intersects at one point, and a large special route hole 3323 that allows a game ball to fall is formed outside the intersecting position, so that the guide rail 3321 can be formed. When the flowing game balls collide at the intersection position, the game balls are blown outward by the collision, reach the special route hole 3323, and fall, but when they do not collide, the end of the guide rail 3321. The game ball may fall into the normal route hole 3324 arranged near the end of the guide rail 3321. In this case, since the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 at the point where the game ball is thrown outward due to the collision of the game ball, the game ball can be dropped into the special route hole 3323 without waiting for the deceleration of the game ball. can. Therefore, when the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323, the flow speed of the game ball can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the case where the central rail portion 3321a is also used by the pair of guide rails 3321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the central rail portion 3321a may be individually provided for each pair of guide rails 3321, and the distance between the central rail portions 3321a may be set as the distance at which the rolling game balls interfere with each other. In this case, for example, one central rail portion 3321a is formed from a meandering rail shape, and the other central rail portion 3321a is formed from a straight rail shape. The degree of interference between the game balls (projected area in the traveling direction of the game balls) is different, and the flow mode of the game balls after the collision can be changed.

As a result, the period until the ball falls into the special route hole 3323 after the collision can be changed for each collision position (after the game ball enters the movable accessory device 90, the game ball enters the second flow-down device 400. The period until the ball is entered can be changed), and the timing of launching the game ball can be suppressed by observing the state of the movable plate 421a that automatically operates in the second flow-down device 400.

In the sixth embodiment, when the inlet opening 6440i of the specific region hole 6440 is configured to have a shape corresponding to the three specific region holes 6441 to 6443, and the profit increasing device 6450 is composed of two rotating members. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific region hole is composed of four holes having different profits (for example, the number of jackpot rounds is 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 7 rounds, and 3 rounds with different specific region holes), and the entrance opening 6440i corresponds to this. It is composed of a shape (four-pronged hole shape), so that the profit increasing device 6450 is composed of three rotating members arranged at the entrances of the three specific region holes excluding the specific region hole of the maximum profit. Is also good. In this case, it is possible to further complicate the game characteristics when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410.

Here, each of the three rotating members allows the game ball to enter the specific region hole, which has a lower profit than the specific region hole directly below (the position where the game ball that rotates the rotating member flows down as it is). It is configured to be closed according to the state after operation. In this case, for example, on the premise that only one game ball is accommodated in each specific area hole, if four or more game balls flow into the timed branching area 6410, the game ball will be in all the specific areas. Since the game ball passes through the hole, the player can obtain the maximum profit because the game ball has passed through the specific area hole where the maximum profit can be obtained, but four or more game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410. It is difficult to make it.

Here, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific region hole, the rotating member operated by the action of the previous game ball closes the specific region hole that gives the third and fourth benefits. The game ball can be guided to a specific area hole that gives the maximum profit.

Further, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). A slide delay device that overhangs for a short period of time and causes a game ball that has flowed down to a specific region hole that gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit) to flow down to the specific region hole that has a higher profit. May be provided. In this case, on the premise that two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 and the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit, the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole. In the case where the later game ball flows down the specific region hole that gives the second highest profit within a short time after flowing into the later game ball, the slide delay device acts on the later game ball to move the later game ball. It can flow down to the side of the hole in the specific region where the profit is highest.

The slide delay device, for example, extends for a short time when the game ball flows into a specific region hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and gives the second highest profit (one below the maximum profit). It may be an embodiment in which the game ball that has flowed down to the specific region hole or the specific region hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit) is allowed to flow down to the specific region hole side with the higher profit. In this case, if the previous game ball flows into the specific region hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and then the later game ball reaches the entrance opening of the specific region hole within a short time, the slide delay. By the action of the device, the later game ball can flow down to the specific area side where the profit is higher.

Further, when three game balls flow into the timed branching area 6410, the profit obtained by entering the specific area hole where the profit obtained by the first game ball is the third highest and operating the rotating member is obtained. Since the lowest specific region hole is closed, one of the remaining two game balls will pass through the specific region hole that maximizes the profit obtained.

Therefore, for example, when three game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the previous game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific region hole, it is possible to guide one of the later game balls to the specific region hole that gives the maximum profit.

The same can be said for the case where two game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410. This also applies when the number of holes in the specific region is 5 or more. That is, when the specific region hole 6440 is composed of n holes (n is a natural number) that give different benefits, and m (m is a natural number, m <n) of game balls flow into the timed branching region 6410. If the first game ball flows down to the specific area hole that gives the m-th highest profit from the top, the subsequent game ball is prevented from flowing into the specific area hole that gives the lower profit, so that the rest One of the game balls will flow down the most profitable specific area hole. Therefore, the player can obtain the maximum profit (16 round jackpot).

Therefore, the number of game balls flowing into the timed branching region 6410 (m) and the order of profits of the specific region hole in which the first game ball is housed (n1) are detected, and they have a predetermined relationship (m ≧). If n1) is satisfied, one of the later game balls will pass through a specific region hole to which the maximum profit is given. Therefore, when the relationship is satisfied, the maximum profit acquisition effect is performed. Is also good. As a result, the player can watch the game ball flowing down the timed branching area 6410 with peace of mind.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the screw member 7453 is constantly driven has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive mode may be such that each time the vehicle is driven for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds), it is stopped for several seconds (for example, 1 second). In this case, the posture of the screw member 7453 can be determined and the timing of launching the game ball can be suppressed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an array pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Points where two balls enter the sorting means and both go to an advantageous route>
A movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means pass through a specific area provided in the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for sorting whether the ball is discharged after being allowed to be discharged or the ball is discharged without passing through the specific area, a game in which the ball is inserted into the movable ball entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval. The gaming machine A1 is provided with a multi-ball guiding means configured so as to easily guide all the balls to a specific region.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to the open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that can be a big hit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), the game ball is accommodated in the movable ball entry device in most cases when the game ball is entered into the movable ball entry device during the game. Although the number of game balls is one, in rare cases, two game balls may be accommodated in the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, the player's expectation is significantly improved when two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry device. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the route through which the game ball can pass when one game ball flows down to the movable ball entry device and the game ball pass when two game balls flow down into the movable ball entry device. Since the route to be obtained is the same, even if two game balls flow down to the movable ball entry device together, when two game balls flow down to the movable ball entry device at different timings. In comparison, the probability that the game ball passes through a specific area was not improved. In this case, there is a problem that the player is discouraged because the actual game result is not accompanied by the degree of improvement of the player's expectation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movable ball guiding means is provided with a compound ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all the gaming balls entered at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region. The probability that a game ball will pass through a specific area when a plurality of game balls flow down into the ball entry means can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the game balls are accommodated one by one in the movable ball entry means. .. As a result, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation can be balanced with the actual game result, and the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the double-ball guiding means is configured such that a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the gaming ball by coming into contact with the gaming ball and a gaming ball that is in contact with the movable means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels provide a game ball in the specific area as compared with the advantageous side flow path for guiding the game ball to the specific area and the advantageous side flow path. The advantageous side flow path is provided with a disadvantageous side flow path having a low probability of passing, and the advantageous side flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is thrown when the movable means is in a throwing state that can be configured by an operation. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the throwing state is configured when one gaming ball is in contact with the movable means while another gaming ball is in contact with the movable means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, when a plurality of gaming balls come into contact with the movable means of the multi-ball guiding means at the same time, the movable means constitutes a throwing state by the operation, and the plurality of them The game ball can be sent to the advantageous side flow path. Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the driving means for separating the case where the game ball passes through the advantageous side flow path and the case where the game ball passes through the disadvantageous side flow path, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A2, the operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, one game ball comes into contact with the movable means from one direction of the operation direction of the reciprocating operation, and another game ball comes into contact with the movable means. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movable means constitutes the throwing state by abutting on the movable means from another direction of the operation direction of the operation.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the gaming ball applies a load to the movable means from both directions of the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means, and the movable means constitutes a throwing state by balancing these loads. It is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the movable means is in a throwing state when only one game ball is in contact with the movable means.

The mode of reciprocating movement of the movable means is not limited. For example, it may be a rotation operation or a slide operation.

In the gaming machine A3, the movable means constitutes the throwing state in an initial state in which the gaming ball is non-contacting and the force is balanced, and in the initial state, the gaming ball is movable from one direction of the reciprocating motion. After abutting on the means and before the game ball separates from the movable means, a first state and a second state having a movement resistance different from that of the first state are sequentially configured, and the second state is described. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the movement resistance is increased as compared with the first state, and the movable means constitutes the throwing state when the gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means in the second state. ..

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the throwing state can be configured as an initial state in which the forces applied to the movable means are balanced, and when the gaming ball starts to come into contact with the movable means. Since the first state has a lower resistance than the second state, when one game ball comes into contact with the movable means in the initial state, the movable means is immediately moved, so that the game ball is erroneously moved to the advantageous side flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown into the ball, and then the movable means changes to the second state, which has higher resistance than the first state, so that the period until the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means is gained. Can be done. As a result, even when two game balls reach the movable means at intervals, it is possible to easily configure a state in which the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means in the second state of the movable means. Since the movable means constitutes a throwing state when the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means, the game ball can be thrown to the advantageous side flow path.

The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a bridging means that operates as the movable means operates, and the bridging means hits the movable means from one direction in which one game ball operates in the reciprocating motion. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that another gaming ball that comes into contact with the movable means after being brought into contact with the movable means is allowed to flow down to a position where the movable means comes into contact with the movable means from another direction.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the bridging means includes another gaming ball that abuts on the movable means after one game ball abuts on the movable means from one direction. Since it flows down to a position where it comes into contact with the movable means from another direction, even if one game ball and another game ball flow down toward the movable means from the same direction, one game ball and another game Instead of moving the ball to one side, it is possible to direct the ball one by one in both directions in the reciprocating movement direction of the movable means.

In the game machine A1, the double ball guiding means is configured such that a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball and a game ball that is in contact with the movable means can flow down. The movable means is provided with a plurality of distribution flow paths, and when the first game ball and the later game ball come into contact with the movable means, after the contacted destination game balls flow into the distribution flow path. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the movable means constitutes the throwing state when the later gaming ball comes into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movable means is brought into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period after the previous gaming ball has flowed into the distribution flow path. Since the throwing state is configured, the movable means can be put into the throwing state not only when a plurality of balls come into contact with the movable means together, and in that case, only the later game balls flow into the advantageous side flow path. be able to.

As a result, for example, when the movable ball entering means is opened twice by one operation trigger, one game ball enters the movable ball entering means each time the movable ball is opened, and as a result, the movable ball enters the movable ball. When two game balls are accommodated in the means (when the timing at which the game balls come into contact with the movable means becomes longer) and when the movable ball entering means is opened once, the movable ball entering means has two game balls. The number of game balls flowing into the advantageous side flow path can be changed depending on the case where two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry means by inserting individual balls, and the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine A1, the double-ball guiding means includes a driving means having an operating unit that applies a driving force to the gaming ball to eject the ball, and a stopping means for fastening the gaming ball to the front side in the operating direction of the operating unit. A plurality of distribution channels, which are configured to allow the game balls ejected by the driving force given by the means to flow down, are provided, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side flows that guide the game balls to the specific region. The road is provided with a disadvantageous flow path having a lower probability of passing the game ball through the specific area as compared with the advantageous side flow path, and the advantageous side flow path has a plurality of game balls fastened to the stopping means. The flow path on the disadvantaged side is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is thrown when one game ball is fastened to the stopping means. Characteristic gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the movement of the moving part of the driving means causes the moving part to be ejected depending on whether one or more gaming balls fastened to the stopping means are ejected. By utilizing the fact that the resistances are different, it is possible to change whether the gaming ball flows down the advantageous side flow path or the disadvantage side flow path while causing the moving portion of the driving means to perform the same operation.

The mode of the driving means is not limited to a specific mode. For example, it may be composed of a solenoid member that operates electromagnetically by energization, or may be composed of a spring member that applies a driving force by a return operation after elastic deformation.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the operation of the moving unit by the driving means is performed after waiting for the gaming ball that has entered the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating unit of the driving means is operated after waiting for the gaming ball that has entered the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means, for example. In a state where two game balls are inserted into the movable ball entry means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls ejected by the driving force of the drive means collide with the game balls on the way to the stopping means.

As a result, when there are two game balls that have entered the movable ball entry means, the mode in which the two game balls are ejected by the drive means is described in the case where both of the two game balls are of the moving unit of the drive means. It can be limited to a general mode of ejecting while being arranged on the front side.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry means, the operation mode of the game balls can be made uniform.

In the game machine A1, the double ball guiding means includes a plurality of distribution channels configured so that the game ball can flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side channels for guiding the game ball to the specific region. And a disadvantageous side flow path having a lower probability of passing the game ball through the specific area than the advantageous side flow path, and a plurality of game balls housed in the movable ball entry means collide with each other. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured so as to easily pass through the advantageous side flow path.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, whether or not the game ball easily passes through the advantageous side flow path changes depending on whether or not the game ball collides in the distribution flow path, so that it is movable. Even after the game ball enters the ball entry means, the player's attention can be continued to be attracted to the game ball. In addition, the probability that the game ball passes through the flow path on the advantageous side is merely changed by utilizing the fact that the flow-down mode changes due to the collision between the game balls, and the operation is performed by the contact with the game ball. Since no moving body is required, the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A9, the double ball guiding means includes a guiding region for guiding the game ball to each of the plurality of distribution channels, and the guiding region is formed from a shape in which the bottom plate is tapered downward. The advantageous side opening that guides the game ball to the distribution flow path through the opening provided in the bottom plate and guides the game ball to the advantageous side flow path guides the game ball to the disadvantage side flow path. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that it is arranged at a lower position than the opening on the disadvantageous side to be guided.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the advantageous side opening that guides the game ball from the guiding region to the advantageous side flow path is located at a lower position than the disadvantage side opening that guides the game ball to the disadvantage side flow path. Since it is arranged in, it is possible to easily introduce the game ball whose speed has decreased due to the collision into the advantageous side flow path.

<If you get two in V, at least one of them will be the better lottery. ＞
When an operation trigger occurs during a game, a movable ball-entry means that changes from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the winning opening for a predetermined opening time to an open state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening. , A fixed area where it is determined that the game ball entered in the winning opening of the movable ball entering means is guided to a specific area provided in the movable ball entering means, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in the movable ball entering means. Comparison between the first specific area in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player by passing the game ball in the specific area and the profit given to the player by passing the game ball through the first specific area. In a gaming machine including a second specific area in which the profit given to the player by passing the game ball is small, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the first The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a first means for making it easier to obtain a profit from passing a game ball through a specific area as compared with a profit from passing a game ball through the second specific area.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that enables a player to make a profit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), in most cases when the game ball enters the movable ball entry device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entry device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may be inserted into the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device, the player's expectation is significantly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two gaming balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of the two gaming balls pass through the fixed region, one of the gaming balls enters the second specific region. After passing through, even if another game ball passes through the first specific area, the player cannot obtain the benefit of the game ball passing through the first specific area. In this case, there is a problem that the player is discouraged because the actual game result is not accompanied by the degree of improvement of the player's expectation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first means provides the benefit of the gaming ball passing through the first specific area when the plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period. 2 Since it is easier for the player to obtain the profit compared to the profit obtained by passing the game ball through the specific area, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period and the degree of improvement of the player's expectation. It can be balanced with the actual game result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine B1, the first means includes a first passing flow path that connects the fixed region and the first specific region so that the game ball can pass through, and the fixed region and the second specific region. A second passing flow path that allows the game ball to pass between them is provided, and the period during which the game ball passes through the second passing flow path is compared with the period during which the game ball passes through the first passing flow path. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is configured to be long.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the period during which the gaming ball passes through the first passing flow path is shorter than the period during which the gaming ball passes through the second passing flow path. When a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area substantially at the same time and the plurality of game balls are separated into the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path, the game balls preferentially pass through the first specific flow path. It is possible to give the player the benefit of doing so.

The method for differentiating the period during which the game ball passes through the first passing flow path and the period during which the game ball passes through the second passing flow path is not particularly limited. For example, the length of the second passing flow path is set to the first passing flow path so that the flow velocity of the game ball is the same between the case of passing through the first passing flow path and the case of flowing down the second passing flow path. It may be longer than the first passing flow path, or the speed at which the game ball flows down the first passing flow path may be the same as the length of the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path. It may be made larger than the flow speed (for example, the descending inclination angle of the first passing flow path is made larger than the descending inclination angle of the second passing flow path), or the second passing flow path may be increased. The game ball may be stopped for a predetermined period of time inside the second passing flow path by providing a passage preventing means for preventing the game ball from passing by protruding inside the second passage for a predetermined period of time.

In the gaming machine B2, the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path are composed of the same flow path in a predetermined section from the determined region, and the first passing flow path or the second passing flow path. The flow path is branched by bending at least one of the two in a predetermined branch region, the branch region is configured to decelerate the reached gaming ball, and in the first means, a plurality of gaming balls are grouped in the branch region. The gaming machine B3 is provided with a contact inflow means for allowing at least one gaming ball to flow into the first passing flow path.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area, the earlier gaming ball is decelerated in the branching region to cause the later gaming ball and the earlier gaming ball. And can be collectively reached in the branch region, and in that case, the contact inflow means causes at least one gaming ball to flow into the first passing flow path, so that the benefit of the gaming ball passing through the first specific region is obtained. Can be easily obtained by the player.

The mode of the contact inflow means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured as a wall portion that can shield the progress of the game ball, or may be configured as an operating portion that operates as the game ball reaches the branch region, and is constant from the time the power is turned on. It may be configured as an electric unit that operates electrically depending on the operation mode.

In the gaming machine B3, the specific area includes an advantageous specific area that gives a greater benefit to the player than the first specific area, and the first means moves from the second passage flow path to the first passage flow path. The bridging flow path that enables bridging and the game ball that is connected to the advantageous specific area and passes through the first passing flow path are configured to be able to flow in and are connected to the advantageous specific area. With an advantageous passage flow path, the gaming ball that has passed through the bridging flow path and the game ball that passes through the first passage flow path merge with each other, so that the game ball easily flows into the advantageous passage flow path. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being composed of modes.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball flowing into the bridging flow path from the second passing flow path joins the gaming ball flowing down the first passing flow path. Is likely to flow into the advantageous passing flow path connected to the advantageous specific region, so that after the plurality of gaming balls have passed through the fixed region, the gaming balls head toward the first passing flow path and the second passing flow path, respectively. In this case, it is possible to leave the possibility that the gaming ball flowing down the second passing flow path assists the gaming ball passing through the first passing flow path toward the advantageous passing flow path, and the second passing flow path can be used. The presence of the inflowing game balls can be increased.

The method for facilitating the flow of the game ball flowing down the first passing flow path into the advantageous side flow path is not particularly limited. For example, it may be performed by changing the flow direction of the game balls by abutting between the game balls, or by reaching (retaining) a plurality of game balls at the entrance of the advantageous passage flow path, the game is played in the advantageous passage flow path. This may be done by disposing an introduction means that facilitates the introduction of the sphere.

In the gaming machine B4, the first means includes a flow-down mode changing means that affects the flow-down mode of the passing game ball depending on the operating state, and the flow-down mode changing means has an influence on the flow-down mode of the passing game ball. It is configured in a mode in which the state changes at predetermined intervals between a passing state that is reduced and a resistance state in which the influence on the flowing mode of the passing game ball is greater than the passing state, and the gaming ball is the flow mode. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that whether or not the gaming ball is likely to flow into the advantageous passing flow path is changed depending on the state of the flow mode changing means when passing through the changing means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the state of the flow-down mode changing means changes between the passing state and the resistance state at predetermined intervals, and it depends on the timing of passing through the flowing-down mode changing means. Since it changes whether or not the game ball easily flows into the advantageous passing flow path, another game ball flows from the bridging flow path to the first passing flow path while the game ball flows down the first passing flow path. It is possible to generate a plurality of patterns to be played, and it is possible to make the player play a fresh game each time.

In the gaming machines B3 to B5, the contact inflow means is configured so that the state can be changed between a normal state and a special state different from the normal state, and in the normal state, a plurality of gaming balls that have reached the branch region. Among them, one game ball is made to flow into the first passing flow path, and in the special state, all of the plurality of game balls that have reached the branch region are made to flow into the first passing flow path. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the state of the contact inflow means, and the attention of the contact inflow means can be improved. can.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the first means extends at least inward of the second passing flow path and stops the gaming ball flowing down the second passing flow path, and the second passing state. A passage preventing means constituting an immersive state of sinking to the outside of the passing flow path is provided, and the overhanging state is maintained at least at the time when the gaming ball flowing down the movable entering means reaches the passing preventing means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the passing prevention means maintains the overhanging state at least when the gaming ball reaches the passing preventing means and stops the gaming ball. 2. The period until the game ball passing through the passing flow path reaches the second specific region can be extended by the period during which the passage preventing means maintains the overhanging state.

The operation mode of the passage prevention means is, for example, a predetermined period (a period sufficiently longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the passage prevention means) after the operation trigger for opening the movable ball entry means is generated. An example is an operation mode in which the passage prevention means is maintained in an overhanging state and then changed to an immersive state.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a blocking member that is movably arranged in the inflow portion of the second specific region so as to constitute a state in which the gaming ball cannot flow in is provided, and the gaming ball has the inflow of the second specific region. It is characterized in that the blocking member prevents at least one of the plurality of gaming balls from flowing down into the second specific region. Game machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the gaming ball is arranged at a position where it can flow down to the second specific area, the flow-down is blocked by a blocking member. Since the game balls are in a fixed arrangement, it is possible to eliminate the premise that the game balls flow into the second specific area, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game balls.

In the game machine B8, the blocking member constitutes a first state in which a load is applied to the game ball to affect the flow-down mode and a second state in which the game ball does not affect the flow-down mode. It is possible, and depending on whether the first state or the second state is reached, the game ball flows down to the first specific area, or the profit given to the player is larger than that of the first specific area. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the probability of whether or not the gaming ball flows down to an advantageous specific region changes.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, after the gaming ball has passed through the blocking member, the mode of flow of the gaming ball can be made different between the first state and the second state. The difference can be linked to the profits that the player can expect. Therefore, the attention of the game ball can be improved even after passing through the blocking member.

<If two pieces are entered in V, the round distribution of the later game balls will be more than the previous game balls>
A first specific area in which a game ball can pass and a predetermined benefit is given to the player by passing the game ball, and a first specific area in which the game ball can pass and the player is given a predetermined benefit by passing the game ball. It includes a second specific region that gives a profit less than the profit obtained by passing, a composite specific region having a plurality of specific regions including the profit, and a definite region in which it is determined to guide the game ball to the composite specific region. In the gaming machine, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the later gaming balls passing through the composite specific area is given to the earlier gaming balls. A gaming machine C1 comprising a second means for making a profit given to a player or more when passing through the composite specific area alone.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable ball entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time due to an operation trigger, and the game ball entering the movable ball entering device passes through a specific area in the open state. There is a gaming machine that enables a player to make a profit by doing so (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, since the predetermined opening time is set short (about 0.5 seconds), in most cases when the game ball enters the movable ball entry device during the game, the ball enters the movable ball entry device. The number of game balls is one, but in rare cases, two game balls may be inserted into the movable ball entry device. Due to the low frequency of occurrence, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device, the player's expectation is significantly improved. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of these two game balls pass through the fixed area, where in the specific area each game ball passes. There is a problem that it is left to randomness and it cannot be said that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of gaming balls pass through a fixed area within a predetermined period, the benefit given to the player by passing the later gaming balls through a specific area of 1 is obtained. Since the second means is provided to make the profit given to the player by the game ball that has passed through the other specific area first, the previous ball passes when the game ball passes through the specific area. Profit is promised more than the profit obtained by a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to keep the attention until the later ball passes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The mode of profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through the composite specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a profit given to the player when the later game ball passes through the specific area, or the specific area through which the earlier game ball passes as a result of the later game ball passing through the specific area is the first. 2 The profit may be given to the player when the game ball changes (increases) from the specific area to the first specific area and the previous game ball passes through the first specific area (after the change).

In the game machine C1, the second means includes a movable means operated by a game ball, and the profit given by the movement of the movable means caused the game ball on which the movable means is operated to pass through the specific area. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the passage of the gaming ball to another specific area that gives a profit of less than is impossible.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is limited by the movable means operated by the gaming ball, so that the shape of the flow path through which the gaming ball flows is special. It is possible to limit a specific area through which the game ball passes, without making it a problem.

The mode in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the flow path through which the game ball flows down toward the specific area may be blocked, or the opening in which the game ball is guided to the specific area may be closed.

Further, the mode of operating by the game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a means operated by an actuator that operates when the game ball passes through the detection sensor, or it may be a means that operates by being pushed by the game ball when the game ball comes into contact with it.

In the game machine C2, the movable means operates after the specific area through which the previous game ball passes is determined.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, after the state in which the specific area through which the gaming ball passes can be changed (after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is determined, that is, in the specific area Since the movable means operates after the state where there is a possibility of bouncing from the opening), it is possible to prevent inadvertently limiting the specific area through which the game ball passes, and the profit obtained by the player is disturbed. Can be prevented.

For example, if the movable means operates before the specific area to be passed is determined, the game ball itself bounces off the specific area after the operation of the movable means, gains the benefit of the movable means, and obtains a specific area having a larger profit. A situation occurs in which it passes. In this case, even when there is only one game ball, the profit of the movable means can be obtained, and the profit given to the player may become too large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the movable means is operated after the specific area through which the gaming ball passes is determined, so that two gaming balls have reached the specific area. It is possible to ensure the playability in which the movable means exerts its effect on the condition that.

In the gaming machines C2 or C3, the movable means operates in a manner in which the gaming ball narrows the entrance openings arranged in the vicinity of the specific regions as well as the entrances to the specific regions so that the gaming balls cannot pass through. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the movable means is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and operates in a manner of narrowing the entrance opening which is the entrance to each specific area. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the movable means before the later gaming ball enters the specific area.

As a result, even when the distance between the earlier game ball and the later game ball is narrow, it is possible to facilitate the operation of the movable means before the later game ball enters the specific area, so that the movable means can be easily operated from the fixed area to the specific area. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow path through which the game ball flows.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the movable means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down along one surface of the movable means in the post-operation state, and the gaming ball is transmitted along one surface of the movable means to specify the other gaming ball. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is configured in a manner of directing to an area.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, in the state after the operation of the movable means, the gaming ball is configured to travel along one surface of the movable means toward the other entrance opening. In addition to the role of preventing the game ball from passing through the specific area, it is possible to have the role of preventing the subsequent game ball from staying.

The mode in which the game ball is directed toward the entrance opening is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a plate is projected from one surface of the flow path, and the surface of the plate facing the game ball is inclined with respect to the extending direction of the flow path to guide the game ball in a predetermined direction. The movable member operates in a manner of closing the hole with respect to the entrance opening which is an entrance to a specific area and an opening directed in the vertical direction, and is movable when the upper surface thereof is formed to be inclined. The game ball on the upper surface of the member may be configured to flow along an inclination.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means narrows the entrance of the specific area where the gaming ball is determined to pass by the operation, and makes the gaming ball impassable.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the movable means is configured in such a manner that only one gaming ball can pass before passing through the specific area. When two balls have passed through the fixed area, each game ball can be passed through a different specific area, so that the second means can easily operate.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, each entrance opening that is an entrance to each specific area and is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area, and a step at which the previous game ball begins to enter the entrance opening of 1. The gaming machine C7, which is operated by the pachinko / pachislot machine C7, comprises a delayed movable means for extending the period required for the later gaming ball to enter the other entrance opening in the post-operating state.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C6, the delayed movable means is operated at the stage when the previous gaming ball starts to enter the entrance opening of 1, and in the post-operating state, the later. Since the period required for the gaming ball to enter the other entrance opening is extended, it is possible to prevent the later gaming ball from passing through the entrance opening early due to the operation of the delayed movable means.

As a result, when the earlier game ball and the later game ball reach each entrance opening at short intervals, even if the later game ball is likely to pass through a specific area where profit is low, the player enters another entrance opening. It is possible to extend the period of time to change (profit increase) the specific area through which the later game ball passes by the movable means.

A gaming machine Z1 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, and C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that has a winning opening in the game area and can win a game ball in the winning opening (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the game ball after it has flowed down to the winning opening.
The technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a gaming ball that has flowed down to a winning opening can flow down satisfactorily.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game that enters the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a distribution means for sorting whether a ball is discharged after passing through a specific area provided in the movable ball entry means or is discharged without passing through the specific area. The movable ball-entry means is provided with a double-ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all the gaming balls that have entered the movable ball-entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the double ball guiding means is a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the gaming ball by coming into contact with the gaming ball, and its movement. A plurality of distribution channels are provided so that the game ball in contact with the means can flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are an advantageous side flow path for guiding the game ball to the specific region and an advantageous side thereof. The advantageous side flow path includes a disadvantageous side flow path in which the probability of passing the game ball through the specific region is lower than that of the flow path, and the advantageous side flow path is a ball throwing state in which the movable means can be configured by an operation. It is configured as a flow path through which the game ball is thrown when the ball is thrown, and the throwing state is when one game ball is in contact with the movable means while another game ball is in contact with the movable means. It is composed of.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. The operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, and one game ball is described from one direction of the operation direction of the reciprocating operation. The movable means constitutes the throwing state by abutting on the movable means and another game ball coming into contact with the movable means from another direction in the operating direction of the reciprocating operation.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it is possible to improve the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the winning opening.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the flow of the gaming ball can be improved by the contact with the movable means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the flow of the ball can be further improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
190 Movable ball entry accessory device (movable ball entry means)
190b Grand prize opening switch (winning opening)
320, 3320, 4320 Route distribution section (part of distribution means)
322b Plate-shaped part (bridging means)
330 Sorting slope (part of sorting means)
322 Distributor (part of compound ball guiding means, movable means)
325 Special route guide path (part of taxiing channel, advantageous side channel)
326, 3326 Normal route guidance (part of distribution flow path, disadvantageous side flow path)
340 Determining area hole (part of definite area)
410, 5410 1st branch area (branch area)
411 Contact wall (part of the first means, contact inflow means)
421a Movable plate (means for changing the flow mode)
431 distribution protrusion (part of the first means)
441 First specific region hole (part of advantageous passage flow path)
441a, 2441a First specific area switch (part of the first specific area, part of the advantageous specific area, part of the first passage flow path)
442a, 2442a 2nd specific area switch (a part of the 1st specific area, a part of the 2nd specific area, a part of the 1st passage flow path, a part of the 2nd passage flow path)
443a, 2443a 3rd specific area switch (part of the 2nd specific area, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
2411 Timed blocking plate (part of passage prevention means)
2420 Electromagnetic solenoid (part of the first means, part of the passage prevention means)
3321 Guide rail (part of compound ball guiding means, part of guiding area)
3323 Special route hole (advantageous opening)
3324 Normal route hole (disadvantageous opening)
4322 Retention flow path (part of double ball guiding means, stopping means)
4323 Solenoid for injection (part of compound ball guiding means, driving means)
5411 Operating wall (part of the first means, contact inflow means)
6440 Specific region hole (part of composite specific region)
6440i entrance opening (entrance opening)
6450 Profit-increasing device (part of second means)
6451 First rotating member (part of movable means)
6452 Second rotating member (part of movable means)
6460 Slide delay device (part of delay movable means)
7420 Rotational sorting device (part of first means, part of blocking member)
7422 2nd annulus member (part of blocking member)
7440 Specific area hole (part of specific area)
7441 First specific area hole (part of advantageous specific area)
7442 Second specific area hole (part of the first specific area)
7443 Third specific area hole (part of the second specific area)
7453 Screw member (part of contact inflow means)
R1 1st branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R2 2nd branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R3 3rd branch induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R4 special induction flow path (part of the first passage flow path, part of the second passage flow path, bridging flow path)
R5 1st delay induction flow path (part of the 1st passage flow path, part of the 2nd passage flow path)
R6 2nd delay induction flow path (part of the 2nd passage flow path)
RS1 Arc side (one side where the game ball is transmitted)
RS2 Arc side (one side where the game ball is transmitted)

Claims (3)

A movable ball-entry means that constitutes an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening, and a game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable ball-entry means pass through a specific area provided in the movable ball-entry means. In a gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting whether to discharge after being allowed to discharge or to discharge without passing through the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a double-ball guiding means configured in such a manner that all gaming balls that have entered the movable ball-entry means at intervals shorter than a predetermined interval are easily guided to a specific region. The compound ball guiding means includes a movable means that performs an operation that affects the progress of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball, and a plurality of distribution flow paths that allow the game ball that comes into contact with the movable means to flow down. And with
The plurality of distribution flow paths include an advantageous side flow path that guides the game ball to the specific area and a disadvantage side flow path that has a lower probability of passing the game ball through the specific area as compared with the advantageous side flow path. , With
The advantageous side flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is thrown when the movable means is in a throwing state that can be configured by operation.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the throwing state is configured when one gaming ball is in contact with the movable means while another gaming ball is in contact with the movable means. .. The operation mode of the movable means is composed of a reciprocating operation, in which one game ball comes into contact with the movable means from one direction in the operation direction of the reciprocating operation, and another game ball is in the operation direction of the reciprocating operation. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the movable means constitutes the throwing state by contacting the movable means from another direction.

Images